JP2010119725A - Game machine - Google Patents

Game machine Download PDF

Info

Publication number
JP2010119725A
JP2010119725A JP2008297403A JP2008297403A JP2010119725A JP 2010119725 A JP2010119725 A JP 2010119725A JP 2008297403 A JP2008297403 A JP 2008297403A JP 2008297403 A JP2008297403 A JP 2008297403A JP 2010119725 A JP2010119725 A JP 2010119725A
Authority
JP
Japan
Prior art keywords
movable body
base member
shaft
hole
slide
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Granted
Application number
JP2008297403A
Other languages
Japanese (ja)
Other versions
JP5222107B2 (en
Inventor
Takehiro Tajima
毅大 田島
Masataka Nagano
雅隆 長野
Mutsutaka Matsushita
睦孝 松下
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Newgin Co Ltd
Original Assignee
Newgin Co Ltd
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Newgin Co Ltd filed Critical Newgin Co Ltd
Priority to JP2008297403A priority Critical patent/JP5222107B2/en
Publication of JP2010119725A publication Critical patent/JP2010119725A/en
Application granted granted Critical
Publication of JP5222107B2 publication Critical patent/JP5222107B2/en
Active legal-status Critical Current
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical

Links

Images

Landscapes

  • Pinball Game Machines (AREA)

Abstract

<P>PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To arrange a mechanism for moving movable bodies according to an arranging side of a game board. <P>SOLUTION: A side performance unit 400 includes: a side base member 402 arranged along the lateral side of a display section 20b; an upper slide member 438 arranged slidably along the lateral side of the display section 20b; an upper slide base 444 converting reciprocating movement along the lateral side of the upper slide member 438 in an oblique lateral direction; and a first side movable body 420 fixed to the slide base 444 and reciprocating between a position lapping with the peripheral part lateral side of the display section 20b with the reciprocating movement of the slide base 444 and a position protruding from the lateral side to the display section 20b. <P>COPYRIGHT: (C)2010,JPO&INPIT

Description

この発明は、遊技演出を担う可動体が設けられた遊技盤を備えた遊技機に関するものである。   The present invention relates to a gaming machine provided with a gaming board provided with a movable body for playing a game effect.

例えば遊技機の代表例の一つであるパチンコ機は、機内にセットされる遊技盤の盤面にパチンコ球が打ち出される遊技領域が画成されて、該遊技盤における遊技領域の裏側に、各種図柄を変動表示して図柄変動演出を行なう液晶パネルが用いられた図柄表示装置が配設される。またパチンコ機は、遊技盤に形成した開口部等を介して図柄表示装置の表示面を前側から視認し得るよう構成される。この種のパチンコ機では、遊技盤の前面側に、遊技領域に打ち出されたパチンコ球が入賞可能な入賞装置が配設され、該入賞装置へのパチンコ球の入賞により図柄表示装置での図柄変動演出が開始されるよう構成されている。そして、パチンコ機では、図柄変動演出の結果として図柄表示装置に所定の組合わせで図柄が停止すると、遊技者に有利な所謂大当りが発生するようになっている。またパチンコ機には、キャラクターや演出に応じた可動体が配設され、遊技に際して図柄表示装置に表示される図柄や装飾等に合わせて可動体に所定の動作を行なわせて興趣を高めることも行なわれている(例えば、特許文献1参照)。
特開2007−244500号公報
For example, in a pachinko machine that is one of the representative examples of gaming machines, a gaming area where pachinko balls are launched is defined on the surface of the gaming board set in the machine, and various symbols are displayed on the back side of the gaming area on the gaming board. A symbol display device using a liquid crystal panel that displays symbols in a variable manner to provide a symbol variation effect is provided. The pachinko machine is configured so that the display surface of the symbol display device can be viewed from the front side through an opening or the like formed in the game board. In this type of pachinko machine, on the front side of the game board, a winning device capable of winning a pachinko ball launched in the game area is arranged, and the symbol change on the symbol display device by the winning of the pachinko ball to the winning device The production is configured to start. In the pachinko machine, when the symbols stop in a predetermined combination on the symbol display device as a result of the symbol variation effect, a so-called jackpot that is advantageous to the player is generated. Also, the pachinko machine is equipped with a movable body according to the character and performance, and it is also possible to enhance the interest by causing the movable body to perform a predetermined operation in accordance with the pattern or decoration displayed on the symbol display device during the game. (For example, refer to Patent Document 1).
JP 2007-244500 A

特許文献1に開示された可動体は、センター役物の下縁部において上下方向に延在する支軸の上端に設けられ、支軸の下端をモータにより回転されるカム板の周面で保持することで、カム板の外周形状に合わせて上下に振動するようになっている。このように、特許文献1の可動体では、可動体の動作方向と支軸の延在方向が同じであるため、可動体の動作方向に全体として大きくなってしまう難点がある。このため、該センター役物の下方に始動入賞口等の他の部材が設けられる都合上、センター役物の下縁部の上下幅を大きくすることができないパチンコ機では、引用文献1の可動体であれば、カム板を小さくしたり、支軸の長さを抑えたりする必要が生じ、結果として可動体の動作範囲を制限することとなって演出効果が損なわれてしまう。   The movable body disclosed in Patent Document 1 is provided at the upper end of a support shaft extending in the vertical direction at the lower edge of the center accessory, and the lower end of the support shaft is held by the peripheral surface of a cam plate rotated by a motor. By doing so, it vibrates up and down according to the outer peripheral shape of the cam plate. Thus, in the movable body of patent document 1, since the operation direction of a movable body and the extension direction of a spindle are the same, there exists a difficulty which becomes large as a whole in the operation direction of a movable body. For this reason, in the pachinko machine in which the vertical width of the lower edge portion of the center accessory cannot be increased due to the provision of other members such as a start winning opening below the center accessory, the movable body of the cited reference 1 Then, it is necessary to make the cam plate small or to reduce the length of the support shaft, and as a result, the operation range of the movable body is limited, and the effect of rendering is impaired.

すなわち本発明は、従来の技術に係る遊技機に内在する前記問題に鑑み、これらを好適に解決するべく提案されたものであって、可動体を動作させるための機構を遊技盤の配設部位に合わせて適切に配置しても、可動体を効果的に動作できる遊技機を提供することを目的とする。   That is, the present invention has been proposed in order to suitably solve these problems inherent in the gaming machine according to the prior art, and a mechanism for operating the movable body is provided as a part of the gaming board. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can operate a movable body effectively even if it is appropriately arranged.

前記課題を克服し、所期の目的を達成するため、本願の請求項1に係る発明の遊技機は、
遊技球が流下する遊技領域(20a)を有する遊技盤(20)と、この遊技盤(20)の後側に取り付けられ、該遊技盤(20)に設けられた表示部(20b)を介して前側に臨む図柄表示装置(17)とを有する遊技機において、
前記遊技盤(20)において前記表示部(20b)の四辺を画成する周縁部の一辺に沿わせて設けられたベース部材(402)と、
前記ベース部材(402)に対して前記周縁部の一辺に沿ってスライド可能に設けられ、該ベース部材(402)に設けられた駆動手段(434,454)の正逆回転により直線的に往復動するスライド部材(438,458)と、
前記スライド部材(438,458)に開設され、該スライド部材(438,458)の往復動方向と直交する横方向に長手が延在する長孔形状の接続孔部(440,460)と、
前記ベース部材(402)の前側を覆うように該ベース部材(402)に組み付けられ、前記遊技盤(20)の前面に臨むカバー部材(60)と、
前記ベース部材(402)と前記カバー部材(60)との間に設けられ、後面に突出する後軸部(445,465)が前記接続孔部(440,460)に挿入されると共に、前面に突出する前軸部(446,466)が前記カバー部材(60)に前記スライド部材(438,458)の往復動方向と交差する斜め横方向に開設されたスライド孔部(61,62)に挿入されて、該スライド部材(438,458)の往復動につれて該スライド孔部(61,62)に沿って往復動するスライドベース(444,464)と、
前記前軸部(446,466)を介して前記スライドベース(444,464)に固定され、該スライドベース(444,464)の往復動につれて前記周縁部の一辺に重なる位置と該一辺から前記表示部(20b)に突出する位置との間で往復動する可動体(420,428)とを備え、
前記スライド孔部(61,62)を、前記スライド部材(438,458)の往復動距離および前記接続孔部(440,460)における前記後軸部(445,465)の変位許容距離を辺とする仮想直角三角形を構成する斜辺の寸法以上に設定したことを特徴とする。
請求項1に係る発明によれば、スライド部材が遊技盤の周縁部の一辺に沿って設けられているので、当該周縁部のスペースを合理的に利用して、スライド部材の大きさや往復動の範囲を大きくとることができ、可動体の動作を大きくすることも可能となる。また、スライド部材が遊技盤の周縁部の一辺に沿って往復動するものの、可動体が該周縁部で囲われる表示部に対して進退するように変換されて動作するので、表示部での図柄表示装置の表示演出と可動体の動作との関連性が増して、可動体による演出効果を向上し得る。
In order to overcome the above-mentioned problems and achieve the intended purpose, a gaming machine according to claim 1 of the present application is
A game board (20) having a game area (20a) through which game balls flow down, and a display unit (20b) attached to the rear side of the game board (20) and provided on the game board (20) In a gaming machine having a symbol display device (17) facing the front side,
A base member (402) provided along one side of the peripheral edge defining the four sides of the display section (20b) in the game board (20);
A slide that is slidable along one side of the peripheral edge with respect to the base member (402), and that reciprocates linearly by forward and reverse rotation of drive means (434, 454) provided on the base member (402). Members (438,458);
Established in the slide member (438,458), a long hole-shaped connection hole (440,460) extending in the lateral direction perpendicular to the reciprocating direction of the slide member (438,458),
A cover member (60) which is assembled to the base member (402) so as to cover the front side of the base member (402) and faces the front surface of the game board (20);
A front shaft provided between the base member (402) and the cover member (60) and protruding to the rear surface is inserted into the connection hole (440, 460) and protrudes to the front surface. The portion (446,466) is inserted into the slide member (438,458) formed in the cover member (60) in a slide hole portion (61,62) formed in an oblique lateral direction intersecting the reciprocating direction of the slide member (438,458). ) Slide base (444,464) reciprocating along the slide hole (61,62) as the reciprocating motion of
It is fixed to the slide base (444,464) through the front shaft portion (446,466), and projects to the display portion (20b) from a position that overlaps one side of the peripheral edge as the slide base (444,464) reciprocates. A movable body (420, 428) that reciprocates between
The slide hole portion (61, 62) is configured as a virtual right triangle whose sides are the reciprocating distance of the slide member (438, 458) and the displacement allowable distance of the rear shaft portion (445, 465) in the connection hole portion (440, 460). It is characterized by being set to be larger than the size of the hypotenuse.
According to the first aspect of the present invention, since the slide member is provided along one side of the peripheral portion of the game board, the size of the slide member and the reciprocating motion can be reasonably utilized using the space of the peripheral portion. The range can be increased, and the operation of the movable body can be increased. In addition, although the slide member reciprocates along one side of the peripheral part of the game board, the movable body is converted so as to move forward and backward with respect to the display part surrounded by the peripheral part. The relevance between the display effect of the display device and the operation of the movable body is increased, and the effect of the effect by the movable body can be improved.

請求項2に係る発明では、前記カバー部材(60)の前側に位置して、後面に設けた回転軸(425)が該カバー部材(60)に回転可能に支持された第2の可動体(424)を有し、
前記第2の可動体(424)は、後面において前記回転軸(425)から離間配置された連結軸(426)が前記スライド部材(438)に連結されて、該スライド部材(438)の往復動につれて前記可動体(420)と同期して前記回転軸(425)を中心として揺動するよう構成したことを要旨とする。
請求項2に係る発明によれば、表示部に向けて進退するよう往復動する可動体と同期して揺動する第2の可動体を設け、また1つの駆動手段でこれらの可動体を異なる動作をさせることができるので、複数の可動体によって演出効果を向上することができる。
請求項3に係る発明では、前記ベース部材(402)には、該ベース部材(402)の後面に配置された前記スライド部材(438,458)を挟んで、後面を覆って背面カバー(410)が組み付けられ、
前記ベース部材(402)および背面カバー(410)は、前記スライド部材(438,458)の変位経路に沿って延在する筋状の保持リブ(407,412)を有し、該スライド部材(438,458)が前後に対向する保持リブ(407,412)間に挟持されることを要旨とする。
請求項3に係る発明によれば、ベース部材の保持リブと背面カバーの保持リブとの間でスライド部材を保持することで、スライド部材への摺接負荷を軽減して該スライド部材を円滑に往復動することができる。
請求項4に係る発明では、前記ベース部材(402)は、前記背面カバー(410)の外縁部より突出した取付片(409)を有し、
前記ベース部材(402)は、該ベース部材(402)における該背面カバー(410)に覆われる部位に設けた第1の通孔(402a)および前記取付片(409)に設けた第2の通孔(409a)を介して前記カバー部材(60)に対して該ベース部材(402)がネジ止めされ、
前記背面カバー(410)には、前記第1の通孔(402a)に整合して、該通孔(402a)に対してネジを着脱可能な挿脱孔(410c)が設けられることを要旨とする。
請求項4に係る発明によれば、背面カバーを取り外すことなく、ベース部材をカバー部材に対して着脱することができる。
請求項5に係る発明では、前記スライドベース(444,464)は、三角形の板状体を本体(444a,464a)とし、該本体(444a,464a)の3つの頂部に前軸部(446,466)が夫々配置されると共に、該本体(444a,464a)の重心に前記後軸部(445,465)が配置されることを要旨とする。
請求項5に係る発明によれば、可動体を安定して保持し得ると共に、スライド部材からスライドベースに対して力を適切に伝達し得る。
請求項6に係る発明では、前記第2の可動体(424)は、前記回転軸(425)を挟んで前記連結軸(426)と反対側に配置された補助軸(427)を後面に有し、
前記補助軸(427)は、前記第2の可動体(424)の揺動に伴う変位経路に合わせて前記カバー部材(60)に開設された補助孔部(65)を介して該カバー部材(60)の後側に後端部が臨み、該後端部と前記回転軸(425)におけるカバー部材(60)の後側に臨む後端部とが補助片(432)で連結されることを要旨とする。
請求項6に係る発明によれば、第2の可動体が補助軸および補助片によって安定して保持される。
In a second aspect of the present invention, a second movable body (rotating shaft (425) provided on the rear surface is rotatably supported by the cover member (60), located on the front side of the cover member (60). 424),
The second movable body (424) has a connecting shaft (426) spaced apart from the rotating shaft (425) on the rear surface thereof and is connected to the slide member (438), so that the slide member (438) reciprocates. Accordingly, the gist of the present invention is that it is configured to swing around the rotating shaft (425) in synchronization with the movable body (420).
According to the second aspect of the present invention, the second movable body that swings in synchronization with the movable body that reciprocates so as to advance and retreat toward the display unit is provided, and these movable bodies are made different by one driving means. Since the operation can be performed, the production effect can be improved by the plurality of movable bodies.
In the invention according to claim 3, a back cover (410) is assembled to the base member (402) so as to cover the rear surface with the slide member (438, 458) disposed on the rear surface of the base member (402) interposed therebetween. And
The base member (402) and the back cover (410) have streak-like holding ribs (407, 412) extending along the displacement path of the slide member (438, 458), and the slide member (438, 458) is forward and backward. The gist is to be sandwiched between opposing holding ribs (407, 412).
According to the invention of claim 3, by holding the slide member between the holding rib of the base member and the holding rib of the back cover, the sliding contact load on the slide member is reduced, and the slide member is made smooth. Can reciprocate.
In the invention according to claim 4, the base member (402) has a mounting piece (409) protruding from the outer edge of the back cover (410),
The base member (402) has a first through hole (402a) provided in a portion of the base member (402) covered by the back cover (410) and a second passage provided in the attachment piece (409). The base member (402) is screwed to the cover member (60) through the hole (409a),
The gist is that the back cover (410) is provided with an insertion / removal hole (410c) that can be attached to and removed from the through hole (402a) in alignment with the first through hole (402a). To do.
According to the invention which concerns on Claim 4, a base member can be attached or detached with respect to a cover member, without removing a back cover.
In the invention according to claim 5, the slide base (444,464) has a triangular plate-like body as a main body (444a, 464a), and front shaft portions (446,466) are respectively provided at three apexes of the main body (444a, 464a). It is arranged that the rear shaft portion (445, 465) is arranged at the center of gravity of the main body (444a, 464a).
According to the invention which concerns on Claim 5, while being able to hold | maintain a movable body stably, force can be appropriately transmitted with respect to a slide base from a slide member.
In the invention according to claim 6, the second movable body (424) has an auxiliary shaft (427) disposed on the opposite side of the connecting shaft (426) across the rotating shaft (425) on the rear surface. And
The auxiliary shaft (427) is connected to the cover member (65) through an auxiliary hole (65) formed in the cover member (60) in accordance with a displacement path accompanying the swing of the second movable body (424). 60) the rear end faces the rear side, and the rear end and the rear end facing the rear side of the cover member (60) on the rotating shaft (425) are connected by the auxiliary piece (432). The gist.
According to the invention of claim 6, the second movable body is stably held by the auxiliary shaft and the auxiliary piece.

本発明に係る遊技機によれば、可動体を動作させるための機構を遊技盤の配設部位に合わせて適切に配置しても、可動体を効果的に動作できる。   According to the gaming machine according to the present invention, the movable body can be operated effectively even if the mechanism for operating the movable body is appropriately arranged in accordance with the arrangement part of the game board.

次に、本発明に係る遊技機につき、好適な実施例を挙げて、添付図面を参照しながら以下詳細に説明する。なお、実施例では、遊技球としてパチンコ球を用いて遊技を行うパチンコ機を例に挙げて説明する。また、以下の説明において、「前」、「後」、「左」、「右」とは、特に断りのない限り、図1に示すようにパチンコ機を前側(遊技者側)から見た状態で指称する。   Next, the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described in detail below with reference to the accompanying drawings by giving a preferred embodiment. In the embodiment, a pachinko machine that plays a game using a pachinko ball as a game ball will be described as an example. Further, in the following description, “front”, “rear”, “left”, and “right” are states when the pachinko machine is viewed from the front side (player side) as shown in FIG. 1 unless otherwise specified. It points at.

(パチンコ機について)
実施例に係るパチンコ機10は、図1に示すように、矩形枠状に形成されて遊技店の図示しない設置枠台に設置される固定枠としての外枠11の開口前面側に、後述する遊技盤20(図2参照)を着脱可能に保持する本体枠としての中枠12が開閉および着脱可能に組み付けられて、該遊技盤20の裏側に対して、各種図柄を変動表示可能な図柄表示装置17(図3参照)が着脱し得るよう構成される。また、中枠12の前面側には、装飾用の電飾装置等が設置された装飾枠としての前枠13が開閉可能に組み付けられると共に、該前枠13の下方にパチンコ球を貯留する下球受け皿15が開閉可能に組み付けられている。前枠13には、中枠12に保持された遊技盤20の前面に、ガラス板や透明な合成樹脂材により形成された透明保護板13aが備えられており、該遊技盤20を透視保護するよう構成されている。なお、実施例では、前記前枠13の下部位置に、パチンコ球を貯留する上球受け皿14が一体的に組み付けられており、前枠13の開閉に合わせて上球受け皿14も一体的に開閉するよう構成される。
(About pachinko machines)
As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 according to the embodiment will be described later on the front side of the opening of the outer frame 11 as a fixed frame which is formed in a rectangular frame shape and is installed on an installation frame base (not shown) of a game shop. The middle frame 12 as a main body frame that detachably holds the game board 20 (see FIG. 2) is assembled so that it can be opened and closed, and can be variably displayed on the back side of the game board 20 The device 17 (see FIG. 3) is configured to be removable. Further, a front frame 13 as a decorative frame on which a decorative electric device or the like is installed is assembled to the front side of the middle frame 12 so as to be openable and closable, and a pachinko ball is stored below the front frame 13. A ball tray 15 is assembled so as to be openable and closable. The front frame 13 is provided with a transparent protective plate 13a formed of a glass plate or a transparent synthetic resin material on the front surface of the game board 20 held by the middle frame 12, and protects the game board 20 with see-through. It is configured as follows. In the embodiment, an upper ball tray 14 for storing pachinko balls is integrally assembled at a lower position of the front frame 13, and the upper ball tray 14 is also opened and closed integrally with the opening and closing of the front frame 13. Configured to do.

(遊技盤について)
前記遊技盤20は、図3に示すように、略矩形状に形成されたアクリルやポリカーボネート等の透明な合成樹脂材からなる透明板22と、該透明板22の後側に外周装飾部28を介して組み付けられると共に図柄表示装置17が配設される裏ユニット30とから構成される。図2に示すように、前記透明板22の前面には、外レール23と内レール24とが半円弧状に配設されており、両レール23,24により画成される略円形の遊技領域20aに、中枠12に配設された図示しない打球発射装置から発射されたパチンコ球が打ち出されて、該遊技領域20a内をパチンコ球が流下して遊技が行われるようになっている。なお、打球発射装置から発射されたパチンコ球は、透明板22の下側から左側に両レール23,24で案内されて、遊技領域20aの左上部に打ち出される。
(About game board)
As shown in FIG. 3, the gaming board 20 includes a transparent plate 22 made of a transparent synthetic resin material such as acrylic or polycarbonate formed in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer peripheral decorative portion 28 on the rear side of the transparent plate 22. And a back unit 30 on which the symbol display device 17 is disposed. As shown in FIG. 2, an outer rail 23 and an inner rail 24 are arranged in a semicircular arc shape on the front surface of the transparent plate 22, and a substantially circular game area defined by the rails 23 and 24. A pachinko ball launched from a hitting ball launching device (not shown) disposed on the middle frame 12 is launched into 20a, and the pachinko ball flows down in the game area 20a to play a game. The pachinko balls launched from the ball striking device are guided by both rails 23 and 24 from the lower side to the left side of the transparent plate 22 and are launched to the upper left part of the game area 20a.

前記透明板22には、裏ユニット30に配設された図柄表示装置17の表示面17aに対応して前後に開口する図示しない装着口(表示部開口)が形成されており、該装着口に対して枠状装飾体70が配設される。透明板22の前面には、図2に示す如く、枠状装飾体70より下方位置に、遊技領域20aを流下するパチンコ球が入賞可能な始動入賞装置25や特別入賞装置26が配設されており、始動入賞装置25の始動入賞口25aにパチンコ球が入賞することで、図柄表示装置17の表示面17aで図柄変動が開始されるようになっている。また、特別入賞装置26は、入賞口が開閉扉26aで常には閉鎖されており、図柄表示装置17での図柄変動の結果、図柄表示装置17に所定の図柄組み合わせ(例えば同一図柄の三つ揃い等)で図柄が停止表示されることで所謂「大当り」が発生し、これにより開閉扉26aが開放して入賞口への入賞により多数の賞球を獲得し得るようになっている。更に、透明板22の前面には、遊技領域20aの入賞口を臨ませて普通入賞装置27が枠状装飾体70の外側に配設されている。なお、透明板22の遊技領域20aには、枠状装飾体70の外側位置に多数の遊技釘が植設されて、遊技領域20aを流下するパチンコ球の流下方向が不規則に変更される。   The transparent plate 22 is provided with a mounting opening (not shown) that opens in the front and rear corresponding to the display surface 17a of the symbol display device 17 disposed in the back unit 30. On the other hand, a frame-shaped decorative body 70 is provided. On the front surface of the transparent plate 22, as shown in FIG. 2, a start winning device 25 and a special winning device 26 capable of winning a pachinko ball flowing down the game area 20a are disposed below the frame-shaped decorative body 70. The symbol variation is started on the display surface 17a of the symbol display device 17 by winning a pachinko ball in the start winning port 25a of the start winning device 25. In the special winning device 26, the winning opening is always closed by the opening / closing door 26a, and as a result of the symbol variation in the symbol display device 17, a predetermined symbol combination (for example, three sets of the same symbol) is displayed on the symbol display device 17. Etc.), the so-called “big hit” is generated when the symbol is stopped and displayed, whereby the open / close door 26a is opened so that a large number of prize balls can be obtained by winning a prize opening. Furthermore, a normal winning device 27 is disposed on the outer surface of the frame-shaped decorative body 70 on the front surface of the transparent plate 22 so as to face the winning opening of the game area 20a. In the game area 20a of the transparent plate 22, a large number of game nails are planted outside the frame-like decorative body 70, and the flow direction of the pachinko balls flowing down the game area 20a is changed irregularly.

図4〜図8に示すように、前記裏ユニット30は、透明板22の外郭形状と略整合する形状に形成されると共に前方に開口する箱枠状に形成されて、該裏ユニット30の開口前端部を外周装飾部28の後面に当接させた状態で外周装飾部28に連結固定される。そして、裏ユニット30は、外周装飾部28を透明板22の後面に取り付けることで、透明板22の後側に固定される(図3参照)。裏ユニット30には、透明板22との間に画成される空間に、可動体110,130,220,420,424,428を備えた演出装置100,200,400や内周装飾部40,50,60等の装飾部材が配設されており(図4参照)、透明板22を介して外周装飾部28、演出装置100,200,400の可動体110,130,220,420,424,428および各種の装飾部材を視認し得るようになっている(図2参照)。また、裏ユニット30には、略矩形状の裏ユニット開口部30aが前後に開口するよう中央部に開設されると共に(図5および図8参照)、該裏ユニット30の後側に図柄表示装置17が着脱自在に取り付けられており、該開口部30aを介して図柄表示装置17が透明板22の前側から視認し得るようになっている。なお、図柄表示装置17としては、液晶表示装置やドラム式の表示装置、ベルト式の表示装置等の各種図柄を変動表示可能な従来公知の表示装置を用いることができる。   As shown in FIGS. 4 to 8, the back unit 30 is formed in a shape that substantially matches the outer shape of the transparent plate 22 and is formed in a box frame shape that opens to the front. The front end portion is connected and fixed to the outer peripheral decorative portion 28 in a state where the front end portion is in contact with the rear surface of the outer peripheral decorative portion 28. And the back unit 30 is fixed to the rear side of the transparent plate 22 by attaching the outer periphery decoration part 28 to the rear surface of the transparent plate 22 (refer FIG. 3). In the back unit 30, the production devices 100, 200, 400 including the movable bodies 110, 130, 220, 420, 424, 428 and the inner peripheral decoration part 40, in the space defined between the transparent plate 22, Decorative members such as 50 and 60 are disposed (see FIG. 4), and the outer peripheral decorative portion 28 and the movable bodies 110, 130, 220, 420, 424, and the rendering devices 100, 200, and 400 are disposed via the transparent plate 22. 428 and various decorative members can be visually recognized (see FIG. 2). The back unit 30 has a substantially rectangular back unit opening 30a opened at the center so as to open back and forth (see FIGS. 5 and 8), and a symbol display device on the rear side of the back unit 30. 17 is detachably attached, and the symbol display device 17 can be visually recognized from the front side of the transparent plate 22 through the opening 30a. As the symbol display device 17, a conventionally known display device capable of variably displaying various symbols such as a liquid crystal display device, a drum type display device, and a belt type display device can be used.

前記外周装飾部28は、中央に前後に貫通する外周装着部開口(図示せず)が開設されると共に透明板22の外郭形状に略整合する大きさで形成された枠状の板部材であって(図4および図5参照)、透明板22の外周縁を覆うように該透明板22の後面に取り付けられる(図3参照)。また外周装飾部28には、パチンコ機のモチーフに合わせた意匠形状が施されており、遊技盤20の遊技領域20aの外周縁を装飾している。例えば実施例では、外周装飾部28の後側に網目状に設けた外周リブ28a(図5参照)の影が半透明の前面部分に写ることで、前面部分が透明板22の後面に合わせて平坦であるににかかわらず、立体感のある氷塊の如き意匠形状を備えている。なお、透明板22は、アクリル等の樹脂板であって、従来から遊技盤に多く用いられているベニヤ板と比べて薄く、透明板22と外周装飾部28とを重ね合せた厚さがベニヤ板と同一になる。   The outer periphery decorative portion 28 is a frame-shaped plate member that is formed in a size that substantially matches the outer shape of the transparent plate 22 and has an outer peripheral mounting portion opening (not shown) penetrating front and rear in the center. (See FIG. 4 and FIG. 5), and is attached to the rear surface of the transparent plate 22 so as to cover the outer peripheral edge of the transparent plate 22 (see FIG. 3). In addition, the outer periphery decoration portion 28 is provided with a design shape that matches the motif of the pachinko machine and decorates the outer peripheral edge of the game area 20a of the game board 20. For example, in the embodiment, the shadow of the outer peripheral rib 28 a (see FIG. 5) provided in a mesh shape on the rear side of the outer peripheral decorative portion 28 is reflected on the translucent front surface portion, so that the front surface portion matches the rear surface of the transparent plate 22. Despite being flat, it has a design shape like a three-dimensional ice block. The transparent plate 22 is a resin plate made of acrylic or the like, and is thinner than a veneer plate that has been conventionally used in game boards. The thickness of the transparent plate 22 and the outer peripheral decorative portion 28 overlapped with the veneer plate. Be the same.

図4に示すように、前記裏ユニット30の前側には、略矩形状に開設された裏ユニット開口部30aの開口縁四辺に対応して複数の内周装飾部40,50,60,60が配設されている。また、複数の内周装飾部40,50,60,60は、遊技盤20における遊技領域20aの中央部において、図柄表示装置17の表示面17aにおける図柄変動ゲームが表示される領域(図柄変動領域)としての表示部20bを画成している。なお前述した透明板22の装着口は、表示部20bに重なる部位に設けられる。更に、各内周装飾部40,50,60,60は、外周装飾部28と共通するモチーフの意匠形状に形成され、例えば実施例では、光拡散処理を施した有色半透明の部材の表面がカット平面を組み合わせて氷塊の如き意匠形状とされる。各内周装飾部40,50,60,60は、同じ辺の外周装飾部28の内側(遊技盤20において外周装飾部28より中央側)に配置されると共に、外周装飾部28の内側に露出する部位前面が該外周装飾部28の前面より透明板22の後面から離間した後側に延在するよう基本的に構成されている(図7参照)。すなわち、内周装飾部40,50,60,60は、遊技盤20において表示部20bの四辺を画成している。各内周装飾部40,50,60,60は、後側に開口する器形状に形成され、前面部分と裏ユニット30の設置部分との間に、後述する演出装置100,200,400の駆動機構を収容し得るスペースが設けられる。なお、実施例の裏ユニット30は、遊技領域20aの下側に左右に長手が延在するよう設置されて、表示部20bの下辺を画成する下部内周装飾部40と、遊技領域20aの上側に左右に長手が延在するよう設置されて、表示部20bの上辺を画成する上部内周装飾部50と、遊技領域20aの両側部に上下に長手が延在するよう設置されて、表示部20bの側辺を画成する左右の側部内周装飾部60,60とを備えている。なお、内周装飾部40,50,60,60は、演出装置100,200,400の前面を構成するカバーとしても機能する。   As shown in FIG. 4, on the front side of the back unit 30, there are a plurality of inner peripheral decorative portions 40, 50, 60, 60 corresponding to the four sides of the opening edge of the back unit opening 30a that is formed in a substantially rectangular shape. It is arranged. Further, the plurality of inner peripheral decoration portions 40, 50, 60, 60 are regions (design variation areas) in which the symbol variation game is displayed on the display surface 17a of the symbol display device 17 at the central portion of the game area 20a in the game board 20. ) As a display portion 20b. Note that the mounting opening of the transparent plate 22 described above is provided in a portion overlapping the display unit 20b. Furthermore, each inner periphery decoration part 40,50,60,60 is formed in the design shape of the motif which is common with the outer periphery decoration part 28, for example, in the Example, the surface of the colored translucent member which performed the light-diffusion process is A cut plane is combined to form a design like an ice block. Each of the inner decorative portions 40, 50, 60, 60 is disposed inside the outer peripheral decorative portion 28 on the same side (center side of the outer peripheral decorative portion 28 in the game board 20) and exposed to the inner side of the outer peripheral decorative portion 28. The front surface of the part to be extended is basically configured to extend from the front surface of the outer peripheral decorative portion 28 to the rear side away from the rear surface of the transparent plate 22 (see FIG. 7). That is, the inner periphery decoration portions 40, 50, 60, 60 define four sides of the display portion 20b in the game board 20. Each of the inner peripheral decoration portions 40, 50, 60, 60 is formed in a container shape that opens to the rear side, and drives the rendering devices 100, 200, 400 described later between the front portion and the installation portion of the back unit 30. Space is provided that can accommodate the mechanism. In addition, the back unit 30 of the embodiment is installed so that the longitudinal length extends on the lower side of the game area 20a, and includes a lower inner peripheral decoration portion 40 that defines the lower side of the display section 20b, and the game area 20a. It is installed on the upper side so that the longitudinal length extends to the left and right, and is installed so that the longitudinal length extends vertically on the upper inner peripheral decorative portion 50 that defines the upper side of the display portion 20b, and on both sides of the game area 20a, Left and right side inner peripheral decorative portions 60, 60 that define the side of the display portion 20b are provided. In addition, the inner periphery decoration part 40,50,60,60 functions also as a cover which comprises the front surface of the production apparatuses 100,200,400.

(枠状装飾体について)
図1,図2,図9〜図11に示すように、枠状装飾体70は、前後に開口する枠状に形成されてた透明な部材であって、遊技盤20(透明板22)に開設した装着口(図示せず)に取り付けられており、裏ユニット30に配設された図柄表示装置17が枠状装飾体70の枠状開口部71に臨んで前側から視認し得るようになっている。また、枠状装飾体70の左右両側部には、遊技領域20aを流下するパチンコ球が通過可能な球入口72や、該球入口72に通入したパチンコ球を枠状装飾体70の内周下縁部へ誘導する球通路73が形成されると共に(図10および図11参照)、該枠状装飾体70の内周下縁部には、球通路73を通過したパチンコ球が転動するステージ74が形成されている。そして、球通路73を通過したパチンコ球はステージ74上で転動して、パチンコ球が遊技領域20a内に排出されるようになっている。なお、ステージ74は、始動入賞装置25の入賞口25aの真上となる中央部が凹になるよう形成されて、ステージ74から落下したパチンコ球の始動入賞装置25への入賞確率を高めている。また、枠状装飾体70は、後述する前部演出装置300の取付部分としても機能する。
(About frame-shaped ornaments)
As shown in FIGS. 1, 2, and 9 to 11, the frame-shaped decorative body 70 is a transparent member formed in a frame shape that opens back and forth, and is attached to the game board 20 (transparent plate 22). It is attached to an established mounting opening (not shown), and the symbol display device 17 disposed in the back unit 30 faces the frame-shaped opening 71 of the frame-shaped decorative body 70 and can be seen from the front side. ing. In addition, on both left and right sides of the frame-shaped decorative body 70, a ball inlet 72 through which a pachinko ball flowing down the game area 20 a can pass, and a pachinko ball that has passed through the ball inlet 72 are connected to the inner periphery of the frame-shaped decorative body 70. A ball passage 73 that leads to the lower edge is formed (see FIGS. 10 and 11), and a pachinko ball that has passed through the ball passage 73 rolls on the inner peripheral lower edge of the frame-shaped decorative body 70. A stage 74 is formed. The pachinko balls that have passed through the ball passage 73 roll on the stage 74, and the pachinko balls are discharged into the game area 20a. In addition, the stage 74 is formed so that the center part directly above the winning opening 25a of the start winning device 25 is concave, and the winning probability of the pachinko ball dropped from the stage 74 to the start winning device 25 is increased. . Further, the frame-shaped decorative body 70 also functions as an attachment portion of a front effect device 300 described later.

ここで、本願で云う光拡散処理とは、例えば光透過性を有する部材の表面に凹凸を形成するような表面加工や、光反射性を有する微粒子を含有する光拡散インクを種々の濃度分布で光透過性を有する部材の表面に印刷または塗布等する加工や、部材を構成する樹脂自体に光反射性を有する微粒子を分散させる例えばラメ加工や、透過する光の屈折率を変える加工等を指し、1つの加工だけであっても、複数の加工を組み合わせてもよい。なお、表面加工の具体例としては、溝加工、ダイヤモンドカット加工、シボ加工、ブラスト加工などが挙げられ、光の屈折率を変える加工としては、部材の表面に該部材と屈折率が異なる微細な凹凸を設けたシートレンズの如きものが挙げられる。   Here, the light diffusion treatment referred to in the present application is, for example, surface processing for forming irregularities on the surface of a light-transmitting member, or light diffusion ink containing fine particles having light reflectivity in various concentration distributions. Refers to processing that prints or coats the surface of a light-transmitting member, disperses light-reflecting fine particles in the resin that constitutes the member, such as lame processing, or processing that changes the refractive index of transmitted light. Only one process or a plurality of processes may be combined. Specific examples of surface processing include groove processing, diamond cutting processing, texture processing, blast processing, and the like. As processing for changing the refractive index of light, the surface of a member has a fine refractive index different from that of the member. Examples thereof include a sheet lens provided with unevenness.

図2および図4に示すように、前記遊技盤20には、可動体110,130,220,330,420,424,428を有する演出装置100,200,300,400が表示部20bを囲んで複数設けられている。実施例の遊技盤20は、表示部20bの下側に位置して裏ユニット30に設置された下部演出装置100と、表示部20bの上側に位置して裏ユニット30に設置された上部演出装置200と、表示部20bの上側で、上部演出装置200の前側に位置して枠状装飾体70に設置された前部演出装置300と、表示部20bの両側部に位置して裏ユニット30に設置された左右の側部演出装置400,400とを備えている。   As shown in FIG. 2 and FIG. 4, the game board 20 includes a production device 100, 200, 300, 400 having movable bodies 110, 130, 220, 330, 420, 424, 428 surrounding a display unit 20b. A plurality are provided. The gaming board 20 according to the embodiment includes a lower effect device 100 that is located below the display unit 20b and installed in the back unit 30, and an upper effect device that is located above the display unit 20b and installed in the back unit 30. 200, on the upper side of the display unit 20b, on the front side of the upper stage production device 200 and installed on the frame-shaped decorative body 70, and on the back unit 30 on both sides of the display unit 20b. The left and right side direction effect devices 400 and 400 are provided.

(下部演出装置)
前記下部演出装置100は、図3に示すように、裏ユニット30における裏ユニット開口部30a下側を画成する辺部に設置され、透明板22の後側に配置されている。また下部演出装置100は、図2に示すように、表示部20bとこの表示部20bの下側に配置された始動入賞装置25との間に位置し、該下部演出装置100の前面に設けられる後述する第2下部可動体(可動体)130がステージ74の後側に重なるように配置されている。
(Lower production device)
As shown in FIG. 3, the lower effect device 100 is installed on the side that defines the lower side of the back unit opening 30 a in the back unit 30, and is arranged on the rear side of the transparent plate 22. Further, as shown in FIG. 2, the lower effect device 100 is located between the display unit 20b and the start winning device 25 disposed below the display unit 20b, and is provided in front of the lower effect device 100. A second lower movable body (movable body) 130 to be described later is disposed so as to overlap the rear side of the stage 74.

図12〜図33に示すように、前記下部演出装置100は、下部ベース部材102と、この下部ベース部材102の後側に設けられた第1下部可動体110と、下部ベース部材102の前側を覆う下部内周装飾部40の前側に設けられた第2下部可動体130と、下部ベース部材102に設けられ、第1下部可動体110を動作させる第1下部駆動機構と、下部ベース部材102に設けられ、第2下部可動体130を動作させる第2下部駆動機構とから基本的に構成される。下部演出装置100は、第1下部可動体110と第2下部可動体130とが前後の関係で重なるように配置され、下部内周装飾部40の前側で揺動する第2下部可動体130の後側から第1下部可動体110が表示部20bに対して出没するようになっている(図7および図8参照)。   As shown in FIGS. 12 to 33, the lower rendering device 100 includes a lower base member 102, a first lower movable body 110 provided on the rear side of the lower base member 102, and a front side of the lower base member 102. A second lower movable body 130 provided on the front side of the lower inner peripheral decorative portion 40 to be covered, a first lower drive mechanism provided on the lower base member 102 for operating the first lower movable body 110, and a lower base member 102 A second lower drive mechanism that is provided and operates the second lower movable body 130 is basically configured. The lower stage production device 100 is arranged such that the first lower movable body 110 and the second lower movable body 130 overlap with each other in the front-rear relationship, and the second lower movable body 130 swings on the front side of the lower inner peripheral decoration portion 40. The first lower movable body 110 appears and disappears from the rear side with respect to the display unit 20b (see FIGS. 7 and 8).

(下部ベース部材)
前記下部ベース部材102は、第1下部可動体110、第1下部駆動機構および第2下部駆動機構の設置基盤となる透明な板状部材であって、透明板22と裏ユニット30との間に配置されている(図12参照)。下部ベース部材102は、本体部分である設置面部102a,102bの側縁および下縁に、後側に向けて突出形成された突壁103を有し(図16および図22参照)、この突壁103の後端を裏ユニット30の前面に突き合わせて、長手辺を左右方向に延在させると共に設置面部102a,102bを遊技盤面に平行に沿わせて該裏ユニット30に取り付けられる。なお、下部ベース部材102の上縁には突壁103が設けられず、設置面部102aと裏ユニット30との間の隙間を介して該下部ベース部材102の後側に設置される第1下部可動体110が突出するようになっている。下部ベース部材102は、後側に開口する箱形状の下部内周装飾部40の内側に整合する外形形状に形成されると共に(図16参照)、下部内周装飾部40の後面に突出形成された下部取付ボス42(図17参照)に対応して、該下部取付ボス42の後端に整合する凹溝を有する取付凸部106が設けられている(図25参照)。そして、下部ベース部材102は、下部内周装飾部40の内側に嵌め合わせて下部取付凸部106の凹溝に下部取付ボス42を収容して位置決めして、下部ベース部材102の後側からネジ固定することで、該下部ベース部材102と下部内周装飾部40の後面との間に空間をあけた状態で取り付けられる(図14参照)。なお、下部内周装飾部40の後面には、下部取付ボス42とは別に位置決めピン(図示せず)が突出形成されて、下部ベース部材102を取り付けた際に、下部ベース部材102に設置された後述する下部LED基板に当接して前後スペースを維持するようになっている。
(Lower base member)
The lower base member 102 is a transparent plate member serving as an installation base of the first lower movable body 110, the first lower drive mechanism, and the second lower drive mechanism, and is disposed between the transparent plate 22 and the back unit 30. Is arranged (see FIG. 12). The lower base member 102 has projecting walls 103 that project toward the rear side on the side and lower edges of the installation surface portions 102a and 102b, which are main body portions (see FIGS. 16 and 22). The rear end of 103 is abutted against the front surface of the back unit 30, the longitudinal sides extend in the left-right direction, and the installation surface portions 102a and 102b are attached to the back unit 30 along the game board surface. Note that the upper edge of the lower base member 102 is not provided with the protruding wall 103, and the first lower movable member installed on the rear side of the lower base member 102 through a gap between the installation surface portion 102a and the back unit 30. The body 110 protrudes. The lower base member 102 is formed in an outer shape that matches the inside of the box-shaped lower inner peripheral decorative portion 40 that opens to the rear side (see FIG. 16), and is formed to protrude from the rear surface of the lower inner peripheral decorative portion 40. Corresponding to the lower mounting boss 42 (see FIG. 17), a mounting convex portion 106 having a concave groove aligned with the rear end of the lower mounting boss 42 is provided (see FIG. 25). Then, the lower base member 102 is fitted inside the lower inner peripheral decorative portion 40, accommodates and positions the lower mounting boss 42 in the groove of the lower mounting convex portion 106, and is screwed from the rear side of the lower base member 102. By fixing, it attaches in the state which opened the space between this lower base member 102 and the rear surface of the lower inner periphery decoration part 40 (refer FIG. 14). In addition, a positioning pin (not shown) is formed on the rear surface of the lower inner peripheral decorative portion 40 separately from the lower mounting boss 42 and is installed on the lower base member 102 when the lower base member 102 is attached. Further, the front and rear spaces are maintained in contact with the lower LED substrate described later.

図22または図26に示すように、前記下部ベース部材102は、該下部ベース部材102の中央部に設けられた設置面部(特に区別する場合は第1設置面部(機構設置部)という。)102aが、左右の側部の設置面部(特に区別する場合は第2設置面部(可動体支持部)という。)102bより前側に延在するよう段差状に形成されている。下部ベース部材102には、第1設置面部102aの左右両側で該第1設置面部102aより後側に延在する左右の第2設置面部102b,102bに、上下方向に長手が延在する長孔形状に形成された下部取付孔部(取付孔部)104が夫々開設されている(図16参照)。なお、左右一対の下部取付孔部104,104は、下部ベース部材102において平行に延在している。各下部取付孔部104は、下部ベース部材102を前後に貫通するよう形成され、各第2設置面部102bにおける第1設置面部102a側に偏倚した部位に配置されている。下部ベース部材102には、各第2設置面部102bの第1設置面部102a側の縁部に上下に延在して突出形成された下部当接リブ105が夫々設けられており(図22参照)、各下部当接リブは、第2設置面部102bからの突出寸法が突壁103より小さく設定される。下部ベース部材102において左右に離間配置された一対の下部当接リブ105,105は、一対の下部取付孔部104,104で後述する下部取付軸112がスライド可能に保持されて下部ベース部材102の後面に沿って上下に往復動する第1下部可動体110に前側への移動を規制すると共に、下部ベース部材102と第1下部可動体110とが面接触するのを防止している(図26参照)。   As shown in FIG. 22 or FIG. 26, the lower base member 102 is an installation surface portion (referred to as a first installation surface portion (mechanism installation portion) if specifically distinguished) provided at the center of the lower base member 102. However, it is formed in a stepped shape so as to extend to the front side of the left and right side installation surface portions (referred to as a second installation surface portion (movable body support portion) in particular). The lower base member 102 has a long hole extending in the vertical direction in the left and right second installation surface portions 102b and 102b extending to the rear side of the first installation surface portion 102a on both left and right sides of the first installation surface portion 102a. Lower mounting hole portions (mounting hole portions) 104 formed in a shape are respectively opened (see FIG. 16). The pair of left and right lower attachment holes 104 and 104 extend in parallel in the lower base member 102. Each lower mounting hole 104 is formed so as to penetrate the lower base member 102 in the front-rear direction, and is disposed at a portion of each second installation surface portion 102b that is biased toward the first installation surface portion 102a. The lower base member 102 is provided with lower abutment ribs 105 that project from the upper and lower edges of each second installation surface portion 102b on the first installation surface portion 102a side (see FIG. 22). Each of the lower abutment ribs is set such that the projecting dimension from the second installation surface portion 102 b is smaller than the projecting wall 103. A pair of lower abutment ribs 105, 105 that are spaced apart from each other on the lower base member 102 are slidably held by a pair of lower attachment holes 104, 104, which will be described later, so that the lower base member 102 can slide. The first lower movable body 110 that reciprocates up and down along the rear surface restricts forward movement, and prevents the lower base member 102 and the first lower movable body 110 from coming into surface contact (FIG. 26). reference).

(第1下部可動体)
前記第1下部可動体110は、透明な樹脂に光を反射する模様を施した板状部材であって(図20参照)、下部ベース部材102の後側に突壁103により設置面部102a,102bと裏ユニット30との間に画成される空間に収容されるようになっている(図14参照)。第1下部可動体110の前面には、該第1下部可動体110の左右に対向する端縁側に夫々離間して対をなす下部取付軸(取付軸)112,112が設けられ、各下部取付軸112は、第1下部可動体110の下部に配置されている。なお、各下部取付軸112の外径は、下部取付孔部104の短手寸法と略同一寸法に設定される。また第1下部可動体110には、対をなす下部取付軸112,112の間に位置して該取付軸112,112の離間方向である左右に離間して、一対の下部連繋孔部114,114が開設されている。各連繋孔部114は、左右方向に長手が延在する長孔形状に形成されて、第1下部可動体110の下部に下縁に沿って設けられる。第1下部可動体110は、一対の下部取付軸112,112が対応する下部取付孔部104,104に保持されて、下部ベース部材102の長手辺に合わせて長手辺を左右方向に延在して、下部ベース部材102の後側に下部取付孔部104の長手に沿う方向である上下にスライド可能に取り付けられる。すなわち、各取付孔部104は、一対の下部取付軸112,112の離間方向(左右方向)と交差する上下方向に長手が延在する関係にある。
(First lower movable body)
The first lower movable body 110 is a plate-like member having a pattern that reflects light on a transparent resin (see FIG. 20), and the installation surface portions 102a and 102b are provided on the rear side of the lower base member 102 by a protruding wall 103. And the back unit 30 (see FIG. 14). A front surface of the first lower movable body 110 is provided with lower mounting shafts (mounting shafts) 112 and 112 that are spaced apart from each other on the edge sides facing the left and right of the first lower movable body 110, and each lower mounting body The shaft 112 is disposed below the first lower movable body 110. The outer diameter of each lower mounting shaft 112 is set to be approximately the same as the short dimension of the lower mounting hole 104. Further, the first lower movable body 110 is positioned between the pair of lower mounting shafts 112 and 112 and is spaced apart from each other in the direction in which the mounting shafts 112 and 112 are separated from each other. 114 has been established. Each connecting hole portion 114 is formed in a long hole shape extending in the left-right direction, and is provided along the lower edge of the lower portion of the first lower movable body 110. The first lower movable body 110 has a pair of lower mounting shafts 112, 112 held by the corresponding lower mounting holes 104, 104 and extends in the left-right direction along the long side of the lower base member 102. The lower base member 102 is attached to the rear side of the lower base member 102 so as to be slidable up and down, which is the direction along the length of the lower attachment hole 104. That is, each attachment hole 104 has a relationship in which the length extends in the up-down direction intersecting the separating direction (left-right direction) of the pair of lower attachment shafts 112, 112.

そして、第1下部可動体110は、下部ベース部材102の後側に大部分が重なって下部ベース部材102の後側に隠れる位置(以下、下位置という。)と(図23(a)、図24(a)、図25(a)、図30(a)、図31(a)参照)、この下位置から上方に変位して下部ベース部材102(下部内周装飾部40)の上縁から表示部20bに大部分が突出した位置(以下、上突出位置という。)との間で(図23(b)、図24(b)、図25(b)、図30(c)、図31(c)参照)、第1下部駆動機構により往復動される。なお、第1下部可動体110の下位置が、該第1下部可動体110の待機位置となる。また、第1下部可動体110は、左右両側の下部取付軸112,112が第2設置面部102b,102bの下部取付孔部104,104で保持されることで、第2設置面部102bより前側に延在している第1設置面部102aの後面と第1下部可動体110の間に、第1下部駆動機構の後述する下部駆動歯車118や下部従動歯車120が設置される下部機構収容空間102cが画成される。   The first lower movable body 110 overlaps the rear side of the lower base member 102 and is hidden behind the lower base member 102 (hereinafter referred to as the lower position) (see FIG. 23A). 24 (a), FIG. 25 (a), FIG. 30 (a), and FIG. 31 (a)), and displaced upward from this lower position, from the upper edge of the lower base member 102 (lower inner peripheral decorative portion 40) Between a position where most of the display portion 20b protrudes from the display portion 20b (hereinafter referred to as an upper protruding position) (FIGS. 23B, 24B, 25B, 30C, and 31). (refer to (c)), it is reciprocated by the first lower drive mechanism. The lower position of the first lower movable body 110 is the standby position of the first lower movable body 110. Further, the first lower movable body 110 has the lower mounting shafts 112, 112 on both the left and right sides being held by the lower mounting holes 104, 104 of the second installation surface portions 102b, 102b, so that the first lower movable body 110 is located in front of the second installation surface portion 102b. A lower mechanism accommodating space 102c in which a lower drive gear 118 and a lower driven gear 120, which will be described later, of the first lower drive mechanism are installed is disposed between the extended rear surface of the first installation surface portion 102a and the first lower movable body 110. Defined.

前記下部内周装飾部40の右側には、前側に位置して普通入賞装置27が透明板22に取り付けられ(図2参照)、この普通入賞装置27の普通入賞口27aに入賞したパチンコ球を導く下部通路40aおよびこの通路40aを通過するパチンコ球を検出する検出スイッチ80が、下部内周装飾部40の右側後面に設けられている(図17または図19参照)。そして、第1下部可動体110は、下部内周装飾部40の右側に設けられる検出スイッチ80を避けるため、右側に位置する下部取付軸112の右側(外側)が切り欠かれている(図30参照)。   A normal winning device 27 is attached to the transparent plate 22 on the right side of the lower inner periphery decorative portion 40 (see FIG. 2), and a pachinko ball won in the normal winning port 27a of the normal winning device 27 is placed. A lower passage 40a to be guided and a detection switch 80 for detecting a pachinko ball passing through the passage 40a are provided on the right rear surface of the lower inner periphery decorative portion 40 (see FIG. 17 or FIG. 19). In the first lower movable body 110, the right side (outer side) of the lower mounting shaft 112 located on the right side is cut away in order to avoid the detection switch 80 provided on the right side of the lower inner periphery decorative portion 40 (FIG. 30). reference).

(第1下部駆動機構)
第1下部駆動機構は、駆動手段としての第1下部モータ116と、この第1下部モータ116の出力軸116aに固定された下部駆動歯車(駆動歯車)118と、この下部駆動歯車118の回転につれて回転する複数の下部従動歯車(従動歯車)120と、この下部従動歯車120に設けられ、第1下部可動体110の下部連繋孔部114に挿入される下部連繋軸122とから構成される(図22および図27参照)。第1下部モータ116は、下部ベース部材102の前面に出力軸116aを後側に向けて取り付けられ、第1設置面部102aの左右方向の中央部に配置されている。下部駆動歯車118は、板状の平歯車であって、第1設置面部102aの後面に突出する出力軸116aに固定されて、第1設置面部102aの後側に第1下部可動体110との間に画成される下部機構収容空間102cに配置される。
(First lower drive mechanism)
The first lower drive mechanism includes a first lower motor 116 as drive means, a lower drive gear (drive gear) 118 fixed to the output shaft 116a of the first lower motor 116, and as the lower drive gear 118 rotates. A plurality of lower driven gears (driven gears) 120 that rotate, and a lower connecting shaft 122 that is provided in the lower driven gear 120 and is inserted into the lower connecting hole 114 of the first lower movable body 110 (see FIG. 22 and FIG. 27). The first lower motor 116 is attached to the front surface of the lower base member 102 with the output shaft 116a facing rearward, and is disposed at the center in the left-right direction of the first installation surface portion 102a. The lower drive gear 118 is a plate-like spur gear, and is fixed to the output shaft 116a that protrudes from the rear surface of the first installation surface portion 102a, and is connected to the first lower movable body 110 on the rear side of the first installation surface portion 102a. It is arranged in the lower mechanism accommodation space 102c defined therebetween.

下部駆動歯車118の後面には、圧入される出力軸116aを安定して固定するために下部駆動ボス部(ボス部)118aが後側に向けて突出形成されており(図22参照)、第1下部可動体110の中央下縁には、該第1下部可動体110の下位置で下部駆動ボス部118aに整合する部位を切り欠いてボス切欠部110aが設けられている(図30参照)。第1下部可動体110は、下部駆動歯車118の下部駆動ボス部118aが下位置で重なる位置まで突出していても、ボス切欠部110aで下部駆動ボス部118aとの干渉を回避できるので、第1下部可動体110を下部駆動歯車118の後側に重なる下部ベース部材102の下側まで変位させることが可能となり、変位範囲を大きくとることができる。   On the rear surface of the lower drive gear 118, a lower drive boss portion (boss portion) 118a is formed to protrude rearward in order to stably fix the press-fitted output shaft 116a (see FIG. 22). A boss notch 110a is provided at the center lower edge of the lower movable body 110 by notching a portion that aligns with the lower drive boss 118a at the lower position of the first lower movable body 110 (see FIG. 30). . Even if the first lower movable body 110 protrudes to a position where the lower drive boss portion 118a of the lower drive gear 118 overlaps at the lower position, the first lower movable body 110 can avoid interference with the lower drive boss portion 118a by the boss notch portion 110a. The lower movable body 110 can be displaced to the lower side of the lower base member 102 overlapping the rear side of the lower drive gear 118, and the displacement range can be increased.

前記下部従動歯車120は、板状の平歯車であって、前後方向に回転軸を延在させて下部ベース部材102の第1設置面部102aに対して回転自在に軸支されている(図21または図22参照)。また、複数(実施例では4つ)の下部従動歯車120は、外径が同一であって、下部駆動歯車118の外径より大きいもの(実施例)または同一径のものが採用される。4つの下部従動歯車120は、第1設置面部102aの中央部にある下部駆動歯車118を挟んで左右対称な関係で第1設置面部102aに配置されており、4つの下部従動歯車120の回転軸が左右方向に一直線上に並ぶようになっている(図21参照)。更に、4つの下部従動歯車120は、板面を遊技盤面に沿わせて左右に並設されて、第1設置面部102aと第1下部可動体110との間の下部機構収容空間102cに収容されている。そして、内側2つの下部従動歯車120は、下部駆動歯車118にかみ合って、下部駆動歯車118を基準として第1設置面部102aにおける同一の側部にある下部従動歯車120,120同士がかみ合うようになっている。すなわち、第1下部駆動機構は、下部駆動歯車118により内側の下部従動歯車120が回転されて、隣り合う下部従動歯車120のうち内側に位置する下部従動歯車120により外側の下部従動歯車120が順次回転されるよう構成される。なお、4つの下部従動歯車120の中で外側に位置する2つの下部従動歯車120の回転方向は同一になっている。   The lower driven gear 120 is a plate-like spur gear and is rotatably supported with respect to the first installation surface portion 102a of the lower base member 102 by extending a rotation shaft in the front-rear direction (FIG. 21). Or refer to FIG. Further, a plurality (four in the embodiment) of the lower driven gears 120 having the same outer diameter and larger than the outer diameter of the lower drive gear 118 (the embodiment) or those having the same diameter are employed. The four lower driven gears 120 are arranged on the first installation surface portion 102a in a symmetrical relationship with respect to the lower drive gear 118 at the center of the first installation surface portion 102a. Are arranged in a straight line in the left-right direction (see FIG. 21). Further, the four lower driven gears 120 are arranged side by side along the board surface along the game board surface, and are accommodated in the lower mechanism accommodation space 102c between the first installation surface portion 102a and the first lower movable body 110. ing. The inner two lower driven gears 120 mesh with the lower drive gear 118 so that the lower driven gears 120 and 120 on the same side of the first installation surface portion 102a mesh with each other with the lower drive gear 118 as a reference. ing. That is, in the first lower drive mechanism, the inner lower driven gear 120 is rotated by the lower drive gear 118, and the outer lower driven gear 120 is sequentially moved by the lower driven gear 120 located inside the adjacent lower driven gear 120. Configured to be rotated. In addition, the rotation direction of the two lower driven gears 120 located outside among the four lower driven gears 120 is the same.

前記4つの下部従動歯車120のなかで下部駆動歯車118より最も遠くに位置して左右方向における外側にある2つの下部従動歯車120,120には、第1下部可動体110の連繋孔部114に挿入される下部連繋軸122が夫々設けられている(図21参照)。各下部連繋軸122は、下部従動歯車120の回転中心から半径方向外側に偏倚した位置に配置されて、該下部従動歯車120の後面から後側に突出するよう形成される。なお、各下部連繋軸122の外径は、下部連繋孔部114の短手寸法とが略同一寸法に設定される。第1下部駆動機構では、対をなす下部連繋軸122,122の位相が同じになるよう設定されており、対をなす下部連繋軸122,122が、下部駆動歯車118の回転につれて対応の下部従動歯車120の回転中心に対して互いに同じ位置を同期して変位するよう構成される(図30および図31参照)。すなわち、第1下部可動体110は、対をなす下部連繋軸122,122が対応の下部連繋孔部114,114の長手辺に当接しつつ同期して回転変位することで、左右の下部取付軸112,112の水平状態が維持されたまま直線的に往復動するようになっている。なお、実施例では、左右の下部連繋軸122,122の位相を合わせる構成であるが、左右の下部連繋軸122,122の位相をずらすように構成することで、第1下部可動体110を一方の側部と他方の側部とでずらして変位させることができ、第1下部可動体110の各側部が交互に上下するような動作態様とすることも可能である。   Of the four lower driven gears 120, the two lower driven gears 120, 120 located farthest from the lower drive gear 118 and on the outer side in the left-right direction are connected to the connecting holes 114 of the first lower movable body 110. Each of the lower connecting shafts 122 to be inserted is provided (see FIG. 21). Each of the lower connecting shafts 122 is disposed at a position deviated radially outward from the rotation center of the lower driven gear 120 and is formed to protrude rearward from the rear surface of the lower driven gear 120. The outer diameter of each lower connecting shaft 122 is set to be approximately the same as the short dimension of the lower connecting hole 114. In the first lower drive mechanism, the phase of the paired lower connecting shafts 122 and 122 is set to be the same, and the paired lower connecting shafts 122 and 122 correspond to the lower driven gear corresponding to the rotation of the lower drive gear 118. The same position is configured to be synchronously displaced with respect to the rotation center of the gear 120 (see FIGS. 30 and 31). That is, the first lower movable body 110 is configured such that the pair of lower connecting shafts 122 and 122 are synchronously rotated and displaced while contacting the long sides of the corresponding lower connecting holes 114 and 114, so that the left and right lower mounting shafts 112 and 112 are reciprocated linearly while maintaining the horizontal state. In the embodiment, the phases of the left and right lower connecting shafts 122 and 122 are matched. However, the first lower movable body 110 can be moved in one direction by shifting the phases of the left and right lower connecting shafts 122 and 122. It is also possible to make an operation mode in which each side portion of the first lower movable body 110 moves up and down alternately.

前記下部ベース部材102の第1設置面部102aにおいて、第1下部モータ116の出力軸116aと下部従動歯車120とは、出力軸116aが下部駆動歯車118にかみ合う下部従動歯車120の上下幅の範囲に対応する部位に少なくとも位置するよう配置される(図21参照)。ここで、実施例では、下部従動歯車120の回転中心から下側(第1下部可動体110の下位置から上突出位置に向かう方向の反対側)において、下部駆動歯車118にかみ合う下部従動歯車120における上下の半径範囲に対応して、第1下部モータ116の出力軸116aを位置させて、この出力軸116aに固定される下部駆動歯車118を下部従動歯車120より小径に設定している。これにより、第1下部駆動機構では、下部駆動歯車118を挟んで左右に並ぶ2つの下部従動歯車120,120において隣り合う四半円のなす隙間に、これら下部従動歯車120,120にかみ合う下部駆動歯車118の一部が収まって、下部ベース部材102において下部駆動歯車118および下部従動歯車120の設置に要する上下スペースを少なくでき、第1下部駆動機構の上下寸法をコンパクトにできる。   In the first installation surface portion 102 a of the lower base member 102, the output shaft 116 a and the lower driven gear 120 of the first lower motor 116 are within the range of the vertical width of the lower driven gear 120 where the output shaft 116 a meshes with the lower drive gear 118. It arrange | positions so that it may be located in a corresponding site | part at least (refer FIG. 21). Here, in the embodiment, the lower driven gear 120 that meshes with the lower drive gear 118 on the lower side from the rotation center of the lower driven gear 120 (on the opposite side in the direction from the lower position of the first lower movable body 110 to the upper protruding position). The output shaft 116a of the first lower motor 116 is positioned so as to correspond to the upper and lower radius ranges, and the lower drive gear 118 fixed to the output shaft 116a is set to have a smaller diameter than the lower driven gear 120. As a result, in the first lower drive mechanism, the lower drive gear meshing with the lower driven gears 120, 120 is formed in a gap formed by the adjacent quadrants of the two lower driven gears 120, 120 arranged on the left and right sides of the lower drive gear 118. A part of 118 is accommodated, and the vertical space required for installing the lower drive gear 118 and the lower driven gear 120 in the lower base member 102 can be reduced, and the vertical dimension of the first lower drive mechanism can be made compact.

前記下部連繋孔部114は、短手寸法(短手に沿う方向の寸法)が下部連繋軸122の外径と一致すると共に、長手寸法(長手に沿う方向の寸法)が下部従動歯車120の回転に伴う下部連繋軸122の回転変位経路の直径以上に形成される(図24参照)。実施例では、下部連繋軸122の直径分以下の余裕寸法をとって下部連繋孔部114の長手寸法が設定されている。また、下部取付孔部104は、長手寸法が下部従動歯車120の回転に伴う下部連繋軸122の回転変位経路の直径以上に形成されている(図21参照)。すなわち、下部取付孔部104の長手寸法により規定される第1下部可動体110(下部取付軸112)の変位許容範囲は、下部連繋軸122の回転変位経路の直径以上になるよう設定される。実施例では、第1下部可動体110の変位許容範囲を下部連繋軸122の回転変位経路の直径と同一に設定して、下部連繋軸122の最下点で下部取付軸112が下部取付孔部104の開口縁下縁に当接し(図24(a)参照)、下部連繋軸122の最上点で下部取付軸112が下部取付孔部104の開口縁上縁に当接するようになっている(図24(b)参照)。   The lower connecting hole 114 has a short dimension (dimension in the direction along the short side) that matches the outer diameter of the lower connecting shaft 122, and a long dimension (dimension in the direction along the length) is the rotation of the lower driven gear 120. This is formed to be larger than the diameter of the rotational displacement path of the lower connecting shaft 122 (see FIG. 24). In the embodiment, the longitudinal dimension of the lower connecting hole 114 is set with a margin dimension equal to or less than the diameter of the lower connecting shaft 122. The lower mounting hole 104 is formed so that its longitudinal dimension is equal to or larger than the diameter of the rotational displacement path of the lower connecting shaft 122 accompanying the rotation of the lower driven gear 120 (see FIG. 21). That is, the allowable displacement range of the first lower movable body 110 (lower mounting shaft 112) defined by the longitudinal dimension of the lower mounting hole 104 is set to be equal to or larger than the diameter of the rotational displacement path of the lower connecting shaft 122. In the embodiment, the allowable displacement range of the first lower movable body 110 is set to be the same as the diameter of the rotational displacement path of the lower connecting shaft 122, and the lower mounting shaft 112 is the lower mounting hole at the lowest point of the lower connecting shaft 122. 104 (see FIG. 24A), and the lower mounting shaft 112 contacts the upper edge of the opening edge of the lower mounting hole 104 at the uppermost point of the lower connecting shaft 122 (see FIG. 24A). (See FIG. 24 (b)).

なお実施例では、下部従動歯車120を4つ組み合わせる構成であるが、2つ以上であれば例えば3つでも5つでもよい。また複数の下部従動歯車120を、下部駆動歯車118を挟んで対称な位置関係で配置するのが好ましいが、下部駆動歯車118を基準として何れかの側部のみに下部従動歯車120を配置しても、各側部の配置数を変えてもよい。この場合、下部連繋軸122は、左右方向に最も離間した外側に位置する下部従動歯車120,120に夫々設けるとよい。   In the embodiment, four lower driven gears 120 are combined. However, the number may be three or five as long as there are two or more. In addition, it is preferable that a plurality of lower driven gears 120 be arranged in a symmetrical positional relationship with the lower drive gear 118 interposed therebetween. However, the lower driven gear 120 is arranged only on one side with respect to the lower drive gear 118. Alternatively, the number of each side portion may be changed. In this case, the lower connecting shaft 122 is preferably provided on each of the lower driven gears 120 and 120 located on the outermost side that is the most separated in the left-right direction.

前記第1下部駆動機構による第1下部可動体110の動作について説明する。第1下部可動体110が下位置で待機している場合に、左右の下部連繋軸122,122は、下部従動歯車120の最下点に位置すると共に、対応の下部連繋孔部114の中央部に位置している(図24(a)、図30(a)、図31(a)参照)。第1下部モータ116が駆動すると、下部駆動歯車118が回転し、これにつれて下部従動歯車120が回転し、左右外側の下部従動歯車120の下部連繋軸122,122が、同じ方向に同期して回転変位する。この際、下部連繋軸122は、左右方向に延在する下部連繋孔部114の長手辺に沿って左右方向の変位が許容される一方、下部連繋孔部114の上側開口縁に係合することで、左右の下部連繋軸122,122の上方変位につれて第1下部可動体110の左右方向の姿勢を維持したまま押し上げる。左右の下部連繋軸122,122が、下部従動歯車120において右端または左端にあって対応の下部連繋孔部114の何れか一方の側端部に位置した際に、第1下部可動体110が下位置と上突出位置との中間に位置している(図30(b)または図31(b)参照)。   The operation of the first lower movable body 110 by the first lower drive mechanism will be described. When the first lower movable body 110 stands by at the lower position, the left and right lower connecting shafts 122 and 122 are positioned at the lowest point of the lower driven gear 120 and the center portion of the corresponding lower connecting hole 114. (See FIG. 24 (a), FIG. 30 (a), FIG. 31 (a)). When the first lower motor 116 is driven, the lower drive gear 118 is rotated, and the lower driven gear 120 is rotated accordingly. The lower connecting shafts 122 and 122 of the lower driven gear 120 on the left and right outer sides are synchronously rotated in the same direction. Displace. At this time, the lower connecting shaft 122 is allowed to be displaced in the left-right direction along the longitudinal side of the lower connecting hole 114 extending in the left-right direction, and is engaged with the upper opening edge of the lower connecting hole 114. Then, as the left and right lower connecting shafts 122 and 122 are displaced upward, the first lower movable body 110 is pushed up while maintaining the horizontal posture. When the left and right lower connecting shafts 122, 122 are located at the right end or the left end of the lower driven gear 120 and located at either side end of the corresponding lower connecting hole 114, the first lower movable body 110 is moved downward. It is located between the position and the upper protruding position (see FIG. 30B or FIG. 31B).

左右の下部連繋軸122,122が下部従動歯車120の最上点に位置すると、第1下部可動体110が下部ベース部材102の上縁から最も突出した上突出位置に至る(図24(b)、図30(c)、図31(c)参照)。なお、下部連繋軸122の最上点において、該下部連繋軸122が下部連繋孔部114の中央部に位置している。そして、下部連繋軸122が最上点から更に回転すると、下部連繋軸122が左右方向に延在する下部連繋孔部114の長手辺に沿って左右方向の変位が許容される一方、下部連繋孔部114の下側開口縁に係合することで、左右の下部連繋軸122,122の下方変位につれて第1下部可動体110の左右方向の姿勢を維持したまま押し下げる。第1下部駆動機構は、第1下部可動体110を例えば所定回数だけ上下に往復動した後、後述する第1下部検出手段(原位置検出手段)124による第1下部検出片(検出片)115の検出によって、第1下部可動体110を下位置で停止する(例えば図26参照)。   When the left and right lower connecting shafts 122 and 122 are positioned at the uppermost point of the lower driven gear 120, the first lower movable body 110 reaches the upper protruding position where it protrudes most from the upper edge of the lower base member 102 (FIG. 24B). (See FIGS. 30 (c) and 31 (c)). The lower connecting shaft 122 is located at the center of the lower connecting hole 114 at the uppermost point of the lower connecting shaft 122. When the lower connecting shaft 122 further rotates from the uppermost point, the lower connecting shaft 122 is allowed to be displaced in the left-right direction along the longitudinal side of the lower connecting hole 114 extending in the left-right direction. By engaging with the lower opening edge of 114, the first lower movable body 110 is pushed down while maintaining the horizontal posture as the left and right lower connecting shafts 122, 122 are displaced downward. The first lower drive mechanism reciprocates the first lower movable body 110 up and down a predetermined number of times, for example, and then a first lower detection piece (detection piece) 115 by a first lower detection means (original position detection means) 124 described later. Is detected, the first lower movable body 110 is stopped at the lower position (see, for example, FIG. 26).

このように、第1下部駆動機構は、第1下部モータ116を一方向に回転するだけで、第1下部可動体110を上下に往復動することができ、第1下部モータ116の制御を簡単にすることが可能となる。また、第1下部駆動機構は、下部駆動歯車118を基準として一側部に複数(実施例では2つ)の下部従動歯車120を設置することで、一側部に例えば1つの下部従動歯車120を設置する場合と比べて下部従動歯車120の外径を大きくすることなく、左右に長尺な第1下部可動体110を外側で支持することができ、左右長尺な第1下部可動体110をバランスよく支持して、適切に動作させることができる。換言すれば、下部駆動歯車118を基準として一側部に複数の下部従動歯車120を設置することで、一つ一つの下部従動歯車120を小さくできるから、下部従動歯車120の設置に要する上下スペースを削減できる。   As described above, the first lower drive mechanism can reciprocate the first lower movable body 110 up and down only by rotating the first lower motor 116 in one direction, and the first lower motor 116 can be easily controlled. It becomes possible to. In addition, the first lower drive mechanism is provided with a plurality of (two in the embodiment) lower driven gears 120 on one side with respect to the lower drive gear 118, for example, one lower driven gear 120 on one side. The first lower movable body 110 that is long on the left and right can be supported on the outside without increasing the outer diameter of the lower driven gear 120 as compared with the case where the first lower movable body 110 is formed on the left and right. Can be supported appropriately and operated properly. In other words, by installing a plurality of lower driven gears 120 on one side with respect to the lower drive gear 118, each lower driven gear 120 can be made smaller, so that the vertical space required for installing the lower driven gear 120 is reduced. Can be reduced.

実施例では、第1下部モータ116を一方向に回転する構成であるが、該第1下部モータ116の制御負荷の増大を考慮しなければ、第1下部モータ116を正逆回転制御してもよい。   In the embodiment, the first lower motor 116 is configured to rotate in one direction. However, if the increase in the control load of the first lower motor 116 is not taken into consideration, the first lower motor 116 can be controlled to rotate forward and backward. Good.

(第2下部可動体)
図13および図15に示すように、前記第2下部可動体130は、下部内周装飾部40の前側に回転可能に設けられ、下部ベース部材102に設けられた第2下部駆動機構によって下部内周装飾部40への支持部位を中心として揺動するようになっている。図15、図28および図29に示すように、第2下部可動体130は、細長く薄型の箱状体であって、後面の中央部に下部支持軸(支持軸)132が設けられると共に、この下部支持軸132から該第2下部可動体130の長手に沿う方向に離間して下部連結軸(連結軸)134が後面に設けられている。また第2下部可動体130の後面には、下部支持軸132を挟んで下部連結軸134と反対側に下部補助軸(補助軸)136が設けられると共に、同様に下部支持軸132を挟んで下部連結軸134と反対側の後面に、後述する第2下部検出手段(原位置検出手段)126の検出対象となる第2下部検出片(検出片)138が突出形成されている。なお、実施例の第2下部可動体130では、左側に下部連結軸134が設けられ、右側に下部補助軸136が設けられている。そして、第2下部検出片138は、下部補助軸136の右側(外側)に並べて配置されている。
(Second lower movable body)
As shown in FIGS. 13 and 15, the second lower movable body 130 is rotatably provided on the front side of the lower inner periphery decorative portion 40, and the second lower movable body 130 is disposed in the lower portion by a second lower drive mechanism provided on the lower base member 102. It swings around a support site for the peripheral decoration portion 40. As shown in FIGS. 15, 28 and 29, the second lower movable body 130 is a thin and thin box-like body, and a lower support shaft (support shaft) 132 is provided at the center of the rear surface. A lower connecting shaft (connecting shaft) 134 is provided on the rear surface so as to be separated from the lower support shaft 132 in a direction along the length of the second lower movable body 130. A lower auxiliary shaft (auxiliary shaft) 136 is provided on the rear surface of the second lower movable body 130 on the opposite side of the lower connecting shaft 134 with the lower support shaft 132 interposed therebetween. A second lower detection piece (detection piece) 138 to be detected by a second lower detection means (original position detection means) 126, which will be described later, is formed on the rear surface on the side opposite to the connecting shaft 134 so as to protrude. In the second lower movable body 130 of the embodiment, the lower connecting shaft 134 is provided on the left side, and the lower auxiliary shaft 136 is provided on the right side. The second lower detection pieces 138 are arranged side by side on the right side (outside) of the lower auxiliary shaft 136.

図28および図29に示すように、前記第2下部可動体130は、光を透過しない不透明な枠部140を本体として、光拡散部142,144、ロゴLED基板(発光体基板)146および後壁部148を順に枠部140に取り付けて構成される。なお、第2下部可動体130は、パチンコ機のモチーフに合わせた複雑な外形とされる。枠部140は、第2下部可動体130の前面を構成する前壁140aと、この前壁140aの外周縁から後側に延出形成されて、第2下部可動体130の側面を構成する周壁140bとを備え、前壁140aの後側に周壁140bで囲われて光拡散部142,144、ロゴLED基板146および後壁部148の収容空間が画成される。また枠部140には、前壁140に複数の前壁開口部(開口部)140cが設けられると共に、前壁140aの後面から後側へ向けて円柱形状の突片140dが複数突出形成され、実施例では、長手辺が延在する左右方向に離間して3つの突片140dが設けられている。すなわち、複数の突片140dは、前壁140aの後面に設けられるので、前壁140aに隠れて前壁開口部140cを介して第2下部可動体130の外側から視認不能である。なお、突片140dの前壁140aからの突出寸法は、周壁140bの前壁140aからの突出寸法より僅かに(後壁部148の板厚分)小さくなるよう設定される。更に枠部140は、突片140dより突出寸法を抑えて前壁140aの後面に形成され、第2下部可動体130の短手に沿う方向に延在する規制突部140eを備えている。なお、実施例の規制突部140eは、光拡散部の後述する前光拡散部142の板厚分程度の突出寸法にしてある。   As shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, the second lower movable body 130 has an opaque frame portion 140 that does not transmit light as a main body, light diffusion portions 142 and 144, a logo LED substrate (light emitter substrate) 146, and a rear portion. The wall portion 148 is configured to be attached to the frame portion 140 in order. In addition, the 2nd lower movable body 130 is made into the complicated external shape matched with the motif of the pachinko machine. The frame portion 140 includes a front wall 140a that forms the front surface of the second lower movable body 130, and a peripheral wall that extends from the outer peripheral edge of the front wall 140a to the rear side and forms the side surface of the second lower movable body 130. 140b, and is surrounded by a peripheral wall 140b on the rear side of the front wall 140a to define an accommodation space for the light diffusion portions 142 and 144, the logo LED substrate 146, and the rear wall portion 148. The frame 140 is provided with a plurality of front wall openings (openings) 140c on the front wall 140, and a plurality of columnar protruding pieces 140d projecting from the rear surface of the front wall 140a to the rear side. In the embodiment, three projecting pieces 140d are provided apart from each other in the left-right direction in which the long side extends. That is, since the plurality of projecting pieces 140d are provided on the rear surface of the front wall 140a, they are hidden from the front wall 140a and are not visible from the outside of the second lower movable body 130 through the front wall opening 140c. The projecting dimension of the projecting piece 140d from the front wall 140a is set to be slightly smaller than the projecting dimension of the peripheral wall 140b from the front wall 140a (the thickness of the rear wall portion 148). Further, the frame portion 140 includes a restricting protrusion 140e that is formed on the rear surface of the front wall 140a with a protrusion size smaller than that of the protrusion piece 140d and extends in the direction along the short side of the second lower movable body 130. In addition, the control protrusion 140e of an Example is made into the protrusion dimension about the board thickness of the front light-diffusion part 142 which the light-diffusion part mentions later.

図28および図29に示すように、前記光拡散部142,144は、枠部140の収容空間に嵌め合わせてロゴLED基板146の前側に配置され、前壁140aの複数の前壁開口部140cから露出する部位が第2下部可動体130の前面を構成している。光拡散部142,144は、光拡散処理が施された部材単体または光拡散処理が施された光透過性を有する部材を複数組み合わせて構成され、実施例では、前側から前光拡散部142、後光拡散部144および光拡散シート(図示せず)を順に重ね合せて構成される。   As shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, the light diffusing portions 142 and 144 are fitted in the housing space of the frame portion 140 and disposed on the front side of the logo LED substrate 146, and a plurality of front wall openings 140c of the front wall 140a. The part exposed from the above constitutes the front surface of the second lower movable body 130. The light diffusion portions 142 and 144 are configured by combining a single member subjected to light diffusion processing or a plurality of light transmissive members subjected to light diffusion processing. In the embodiment, the front light diffusion portion 142, The rear light diffusing unit 144 and the light diffusing sheet (not shown) are sequentially stacked.

図28および図29に示すように、前記前光拡散部142は、光拡散処理が施された有色半透明の部材であって、枠部140の収容空間において最前に取り付けられる。また前光拡散部142は、枠部140の前壁140aに設けられた複数の前壁開口部140cに夫々整合する突出部142aを複数有すると共に、外形形状が枠部140の周壁140bの内側に整合する形状に形成されている。なお、各突出部142aは、前壁開口部140cの中央部に向けて凸となるよう傾斜面を組み合わせて形成される。更に前光拡散部142は、前壁140a後面に突出する複数の突片140dに対応して光拡散部通孔143が前後に貫通形成されると共に、前壁140a後面に突出する規制突部140eに対応する部位に規制切欠142bが切り欠き形成されている。そして、前光拡散部142は、周壁140bの内側に嵌め込んで光拡散部通孔143に対応の突片140dを挿通すると共に、前壁140aの後面に突出部142aを除く前面を突き合わせて規制突部140eに規制切欠142bを嵌め合わせることで、収容空間において上下左右方向に移動しないよう位置決めされる。この際、前光拡散部142は、突出部142aが対応の前壁開口部140cから前側に突出して、第2下部可動体130の前面を構成するので(図15参照)、第2下部可動体130の立体感が増し、突出部142aの形状によって後側から照射された光を適切に拡散し得る。   As shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, the front light diffusing portion 142 is a colored translucent member that has been subjected to a light diffusing process, and is attached to the front in the housing space of the frame portion 140. The front light diffusing portion 142 has a plurality of protrusions 142a that are respectively aligned with the plurality of front wall openings 140c provided on the front wall 140a of the frame portion 140, and has an outer shape on the inner side of the peripheral wall 140b of the frame portion 140. It is formed in a matching shape. In addition, each protrusion part 142a is formed combining an inclined surface so that it may become convex toward the center part of the front wall opening part 140c. Further, the front light diffusing portion 142 has a light diffusing portion through-hole 143 formed through the front and rear corresponding to the plurality of protruding pieces 140d protruding on the rear surface of the front wall 140a, and a restricting protrusion 140e protruding on the rear surface of the front wall 140a. A restriction notch 142b is cut out at a portion corresponding to. The front light diffusing portion 142 is fitted inside the peripheral wall 140b to insert the corresponding protruding piece 140d into the light diffusing portion through-hole 143, and the front surface excluding the protruding portion 142a is abutted against the rear surface of the front wall 140a to be regulated. By fitting the restriction notch 142b into the protrusion 140e, the protrusion 140e is positioned so as not to move in the vertical and horizontal directions in the accommodation space. At this time, the front light diffusing unit 142 forms the front surface of the second lower movable body 130 with the projecting portion 142a projecting forward from the corresponding front wall opening 140c (see FIG. 15). The three-dimensional effect of 130 increases, and the light irradiated from the rear side can be appropriately diffused by the shape of the protrusion 142a.

図28および図29に示すように、前記後光拡散部144は、光拡散処理が施された有色半透明の部材であって、枠部140の収容空間において前から2番目(前光拡散部142の後側)に取り付けられる。また後光拡散部144は、外形形状が枠部140の周壁140bの内側に整合する形状に形成されると共に、平坦な板状本体部分の後面外周縁に、後隔片(スペーサ部)144aが後側に向けて突出形成されている。更に後光拡散部144は、前壁140a後面に突出する複数の突片140dに対応して光拡散部通孔143が前後に貫通形成されると共に、前壁140a後面に突出する規制突部140eに対応する部位に規制切欠144bが切り欠き形成されている。そして、後光拡散部144は、周壁140bの内側に嵌め込んで光拡散部通孔143に対応の突片140dを挿通すると共に、前光拡散部142の後面に前面を突き合わせて規制突部140eに規制切欠144bを重ねて、収容空間において上下左右方向に移動しないよう位置決めされる。   As shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, the rear light diffusing portion 144 is a colored translucent member that has been subjected to a light diffusing process, and is the second member from the front (front light diffusing portion) in the housing space of the frame portion 140. 142). Further, the rear light diffusing portion 144 is formed so that the outer shape matches the inner side of the peripheral wall 140b of the frame portion 140, and a rear piece (spacer portion) 144a is formed on the outer peripheral edge of the rear surface of the flat plate-like main body portion. It protrudes toward the rear side. Further, the rear light diffusing portion 144 has a light diffusing portion through-hole 143 formed through the front and rear corresponding to the plurality of projecting pieces 140d projecting to the rear surface of the front wall 140a, and a regulating projection 140e projecting to the rear surface of the front wall 140a. A restriction notch 144b is formed in a portion corresponding to the notch. Then, the rear light diffusing portion 144 is fitted inside the peripheral wall 140b and the corresponding protrusion piece 140d is inserted into the light diffusing portion through hole 143, and the front surface is abutted against the rear surface of the front light diffusing portion 142 and the restricting protrusion 140e. The restriction notch 144b is overlaid on the housing space so that it does not move in the vertical and horizontal directions in the accommodation space.

前記光拡散シートは、所謂レンズシートの如き光拡散処理が施されたシートであって、枠部140の収容空間において前から3番目(後光拡散部144の後側でロゴLED基板146の前側)に取り付けられる。また光拡散シートは、外形形状が枠部140の周壁140bに内側に整合する形状に形成されている。更に光拡散シートは、前壁140a後面に突出する複数の突片140dに対応して光拡散部通孔が前後に貫通形成されると共に、前壁140a後面に突出する規制突部140eに対応する部位に規制切欠が切り欠き形成されている。そして、光拡散シートは、周壁140bの内側に嵌め込んで光拡散部通孔に対応の突片140dを挿通すると共に、後光拡散部144における後隔片144aの後端に外周縁前面を突き合わせて規制突部140eに規制切欠を重ねて、後隔片144aとロゴLED基板146とに挟まれて収容空間において位置決めされる。   The light diffusion sheet is a sheet subjected to light diffusion processing such as a so-called lens sheet, and is the third from the front in the housing space of the frame portion 140 (the rear side of the rear light diffusion portion 144 and the front side of the logo LED substrate 146). ). Further, the light diffusion sheet is formed in a shape in which the outer shape matches the inner wall 140b of the frame portion 140 inward. Further, the light diffusion sheet has light diffusion portion through holes formed in front and rear corresponding to the plurality of protrusions 140d protruding on the rear surface of the front wall 140a, and corresponds to the restriction protrusion 140e protruding on the rear surface of the front wall 140a. A restriction notch is formed in the part. Then, the light diffusion sheet is fitted inside the peripheral wall 140b and the projection piece 140d corresponding to the light diffusion portion through hole is inserted, and the front surface of the outer peripheral edge is abutted against the rear end of the rear piece 144a in the rear light diffusion portion 144. Then, the regulation notch is overlapped with the regulation projection 140e, and is sandwiched between the rear piece 144a and the logo LED substrate 146 and positioned in the accommodation space.

図28および図29に示すように、前記ロゴLED基板146は、前面に複数のLED(発光体)146aを有し、枠部140の収容空間において光拡散部142,144の後側に配置されている。またロゴLED基板146は、外形形状が枠部140の周壁140bの内側に整合する形状に形成されている。更にロゴLED基板146は、前壁140a後面に突出する複数の突片140dに対応して基板通孔146bが前後に貫通形成されると共に、前壁140a後面に突出する規制突部140eに対応する部位に規制切欠146cが切り欠き形成されている。なお、基板通孔146bは、LED146aの配置に応じてロゴLED基板146の外周縁から切り欠いて形成したものがある。ロゴLED基板146の後面には、該ロゴLED基板146に電力を供給する配線が接続されるロゴLED基板ソケット(ソケット)147が後側に向けて突出形成され、このソケット147は後側に開口している。そして、ロゴLED基板146は、周壁140bの内側に嵌め込んで基板通孔146bに対応の突片140dを挿通すると共に、後光拡散部144における後隔片144aの後端に光拡散シートを介して外周縁前面を突き合わせて規制突部140eに規制切欠146cを重ねて、収容空間において上下左右方向に移動しないように位置決めされる。また、ロゴLED基板146は、後隔片144aによってLED146aと後光拡散部144におけるLED146aの前側に延在する光拡散面との間のスペースが一定間隔で保持される。   As shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, the logo LED substrate 146 has a plurality of LEDs (light emitters) 146a on the front surface, and is disposed on the rear side of the light diffusion portions 142 and 144 in the housing space of the frame portion 140. ing. Further, the logo LED substrate 146 is formed in a shape in which the outer shape matches the inside of the peripheral wall 140b of the frame portion 140. Further, the logo LED substrate 146 has a board through hole 146b formed through the front and rear corresponding to the plurality of protrusions 140d protruding on the rear surface of the front wall 140a, and corresponds to the restricting protrusion 140e protruding on the rear surface of the front wall 140a. A restriction cutout 146c is cut out at the site. In addition, the board | substrate through-hole 146b has what was formed by notching from the outer periphery of the logo LED board | substrate 146 according to arrangement | positioning of LED146a. On the rear surface of the logo LED board 146, a logo LED board socket (socket) 147 to which wiring for supplying power to the logo LED board 146 is connected is formed to protrude rearward, and the socket 147 opens to the rear side. is doing. The logo LED substrate 146 is fitted inside the peripheral wall 140b and the corresponding projection piece 140d is inserted into the substrate through-hole 146b, and the rear end of the rear piece 144a in the rear light diffusion portion 144 is interposed via a light diffusion sheet. Then, the front surface of the outer peripheral edge is abutted and the restriction notch 146c is overlapped with the restriction protrusion 140e, and is positioned so as not to move in the vertical and horizontal directions in the accommodation space. Further, in the logo LED substrate 146, the space between the LED 146a and the light diffusion surface extending to the front side of the LED 146a in the rear light diffusion portion 144 is held at a constant interval by the rear piece 144a.

図28および図29に示すように、前記後壁部148は、ロゴLED基板146の後側に設けられて、第2下部可動体130の後面を構成する不透明の部材であって、後面に前記下部支持軸132、下部連結軸134、下部補助軸136および第2下部検出片138が設けられている。後壁部148は、周壁140bの内側に整合する外形形状に形成されている。また後壁部148は、圧入して固定される下部支持軸132を保持する前ボス部148aが前面中央部に設けられ、この前ボス部148aは、側部を面取りして外形が多角形状になるよう形成されている。そして、後壁部148は、周壁140bの内側に嵌め込んで前面外周縁に前側に突出形成した前隔片(スペーサ部)148bの前端をロゴLED基板146の後面に当接させると共に、複数の突片140dに対応して前面に凹状に設けられた受部148cに対応の突片140dを収容して収容空間の後側を塞ぐように組み付けられる。この際、後壁部148は、ロゴLED基板146の中央部に前ボス部148aに整合する形状で開設された前ボス孔146dに前ボス部148aを挿入し、この後壁部148にロゴLED基板ソケット147に対応して開設された後壁ソケット開口(ソケット開口)149を介してロゴLED基板ソケット147を後側に露出させるようになっている。すなわち、ロゴLED基板146と後壁部148とは、前ボス孔146dと前ボス部148aとの嵌合によっても互いに位置決めされる。   As shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, the rear wall 148 is an opaque member that is provided on the rear side of the logo LED substrate 146 and forms the rear surface of the second lower movable body 130. A lower support shaft 132, a lower connection shaft 134, a lower auxiliary shaft 136, and a second lower detection piece 138 are provided. The rear wall portion 148 is formed in an outer shape that matches the inside of the peripheral wall 140b. The rear wall portion 148 is provided with a front boss portion 148a that holds the lower support shaft 132 that is press-fitted and fixed at the center of the front surface. The front boss portion 148a has a chamfered side portion and a polygonal outer shape. It is formed to become. And the rear wall part 148 is fitted inside the peripheral wall 140b, and the front end of the front piece (spacer part) 148b formed to protrude to the front outer peripheral edge is brought into contact with the rear surface of the logo LED substrate 146, and a plurality of The projection 140d corresponding to the receiving portion 148c provided in a concave shape on the front surface corresponding to the projection 140d is accommodated so as to close the rear side of the accommodation space. At this time, the rear wall portion 148 is inserted into a front boss hole 146d formed in a shape matching the front boss portion 148a at the center of the logo LED substrate 146, and the logo LED is inserted into the rear wall portion 148. The logo LED board socket 147 is exposed to the rear side through a rear wall socket opening (socket opening) 149 opened corresponding to the board socket 147. That is, the logo LED substrate 146 and the rear wall portion 148 are positioned with respect to each other by fitting the front boss hole 146d and the front boss portion 148a.

更に、後壁部148は、前壁140a後面に突出する規制突部140eに対応する部位に規制切欠148dが切り欠き形成されている。後壁部148は、前隔片148bによってロゴLED基板146との間に隙間を設け、ロゴLED基板146の後側に突出する抵抗が該後壁部148に干渉しないようになっている。ここで、第2下部可動体130では、ロゴLED基板ソケット147が下部支持軸132から該第2下部可動体130の長手に沿う方向に離間して配置され、実施例のロゴLED基板ソケット147は、第2下部可動体130の後面において下部支持軸132と下部連結軸134との間に位置している。   Further, the rear wall portion 148 has a notch 148d formed in a portion corresponding to the restriction protrusion 140e protruding from the rear surface of the front wall 140a. The rear wall portion 148 is provided with a gap between the logo LED substrate 146 by the front separation piece 148b, and the resistance protruding to the rear side of the logo LED substrate 146 does not interfere with the rear wall portion 148. Here, in the second lower movable body 130, the logo LED board socket 147 is disposed away from the lower support shaft 132 in the direction along the length of the second lower movable body 130, and the logo LED board socket 147 of the embodiment is The rear surface of the second lower movable body 130 is located between the lower support shaft 132 and the lower connection shaft 134.

前記第2下部可動体130は、枠部140の周壁140bおよび突片140dによって光拡散部142,144、光拡散シート、ロゴLED基板146および後壁部148が上下左右方向に位置決めされて、突片140dに受部148cを介して後壁部148の後側からネジで固定される。ここで、光拡散部142,144、光拡散シートおよびロゴLED基板146は、枠部140の前壁140aと後壁部148の前隔片148bとの間に挟まれて互いに前後に位置決めされるので、光拡散部142,144、光拡散シートおよびロゴLED基板146の夫々をネジ等で別々に固定する必要はない。また、第2下部可動体130では、枠部140における前壁140aに設けた規制突部140eが前光拡散部142の規制切欠142bに嵌合するが、後光拡散部144、光拡散シート、ロゴLED基板146および後壁部148の規制切欠144b,146c,148dは、規制突部140eに重なって該第2下部可動体130の後側に開口している。すなわち、第2下部可動体130は、これらの規制切欠144b,146c,148dからなる開口を介して前光拡散部142から後壁部148までの収容空間に取り付けた部材を確認することができる。また、前光拡散部142は、枠部140の前壁開口部140cから突出部142aが露出するので、第2下部可動体130の揺動時にがたつきのないより確実な位置決め保持がなされている。   In the second lower movable body 130, the light diffusion portions 142, 144, the light diffusion sheet, the logo LED substrate 146, and the rear wall portion 148 are positioned in the vertical and horizontal directions by the peripheral wall 140b of the frame portion 140 and the protruding piece 140d. It is fixed to the piece 140d with a screw from the rear side of the rear wall portion 148 through the receiving portion 148c. Here, the light diffusing portions 142 and 144, the light diffusing sheet, and the logo LED substrate 146 are sandwiched between the front wall 140a of the frame portion 140 and the front piece 148b of the rear wall portion 148 and are positioned forward and backward. Therefore, it is not necessary to fix each of the light diffusion portions 142 and 144, the light diffusion sheet, and the logo LED substrate 146 with screws or the like. Further, in the second lower movable body 130, the restriction protrusion 140e provided on the front wall 140a of the frame part 140 is fitted into the restriction notch 142b of the front light diffusion part 142, but the rear light diffusion part 144, the light diffusion sheet, The restriction notches 144b, 146c, and 148d of the logo LED substrate 146 and the rear wall portion 148 are overlapped with the restriction protrusion 140e and open to the rear side of the second lower movable body 130. That is, the second lower movable body 130 can confirm a member attached to the accommodation space from the front light diffusing portion 142 to the rear wall portion 148 through the openings formed by the restriction notches 144b, 146c, and 148d. Further, since the protrusion 142a is exposed from the front wall opening 140c of the frame portion 140, the front light diffusion portion 142 is more reliably positioned and held without shaking when the second lower movable body 130 is swung. .

前記第2下部可動体130を支持する取付部としての下部内周装飾部40は、半透明の樹脂を基本とした部材であって、下部ベース部材102の前側を覆って該下部ベース部材102に取り付けられている(図14参照)。すなわち、下部内周装飾部40は、裏ユニット30の下辺に亘って左右に長手を延在させて下部ベース部材102を介して裏ユニット30に取り付けられ、遊技盤20において透明板22を介して前面から視認可能で、また表示部20bの下辺を構成している(図2参照)。また下部内周装飾部40は、透明板22の後面に沿って前面が延在する前突部43と、透明板22の後面から離間するよう前突部43より後側に凹んだ設置凹部44とを有している(図17または図19参照)。前突部43は、下部内周装飾部40における左右方向中央部の下側領域に設けられ、下縁を裾とする山形に形成されており、前突部43の下部は、表示部20bの下側に位置して透明板22の下部に取り付けられる始動入賞装置25の後側に重なっている。なお、下部演出装置100では、前突部43および下部ベース部材102の下部中央に、透明板22の後側に突出する始動入賞装置25の後部に合わせて、下縁から一部切り欠いて入賞装置凹部101が設けられ、この入賞装置凹部101に始動入賞装置25の後部を受け入れるようになっている。設置凹部44は、下部内周装飾部40における前突部43の上側領域に、前突部43より後側に下がって延在した段差状に設けられ、透明板22と設置凹部44との間のスペースに第2下部可動体130が設置される。すなわち、第2下部可動体130は、始動入賞装置25における遊技領域20aに開口する始動入賞口25aの直上に位置して、透明板22におけるステージ74の後側に配置される   The lower inner periphery decorative portion 40 as a mounting portion for supporting the second lower movable body 130 is a member based on a translucent resin, and covers the front side of the lower base member 102 to the lower base member 102. It is attached (see FIG. 14). That is, the lower inner peripheral decorative portion 40 is attached to the rear unit 30 via the lower base member 102 with its longitudinal length extending to the left and right over the lower side of the rear unit 30, It is visible from the front and constitutes the lower side of the display unit 20b (see FIG. 2). The lower inner peripheral decorative portion 40 includes a front protrusion 43 whose front surface extends along the rear surface of the transparent plate 22 and an installation recess 44 that is recessed rearward from the front protrusion 43 so as to be separated from the rear surface of the transparent plate 22. (See FIG. 17 or FIG. 19). The front protrusion 43 is provided in the lower region of the central portion in the left-right direction of the lower inner periphery decorative portion 40, and is formed in a mountain shape with the lower edge as a hem. The lower portion of the front protrusion 43 is formed on the display portion 20b. It is located on the lower side and overlaps the rear side of the start winning device 25 attached to the lower part of the transparent plate 22. In the lower stage production device 100, the lower center of the front projecting portion 43 and the lower base member 102 is partially cut out from the lower edge in accordance with the rear portion of the start winning device 25 protruding rearward of the transparent plate 22. A device recess 101 is provided, and the rear portion of the start winning device 25 is received in the winning device recess 101. The installation recess 44 is provided in a step shape extending downward from the front projection 43 in the upper region of the front projection 43 in the lower inner periphery decorative portion 40, and between the transparent plate 22 and the installation recess 44. The second lower movable body 130 is installed in the space. That is, the second lower movable body 130 is located immediately above the start winning opening 25a that opens to the game area 20a in the start winning apparatus 25, and is disposed on the rear side of the stage 74 in the transparent plate 22.

図17、図18および図19に示すように、前記設置凹部44には、中央部に第2下部可動体130の下部支持軸132を回転可能に支持する下部支持孔部(支持孔部)45が設けられ、この下部支持孔部45に支持されて揺動する第2下部可動体130に伴う下部連結軸134および下部補助軸136の移動経路に対応して下部連結軸通孔(通孔)46および下部補助軸通孔(別の通孔)47が開設されている。また、設置凹部44には、下部支持孔部45に支持されて揺動する第2下部可動体130に伴うロゴLED基板ソケット147および第2下部検出片138の移動経路に対応して第2下部ソケット通孔(ソケット通孔)48および第2下部検出片通孔(検出片通孔)49が開設されている。ここで、設置凹部44には、下部支持孔部45の左側に下部連結軸134に対応した下部連結軸通孔46が前後に貫通形成され、下部支持孔部45の右側に下部補助軸136に対応した下部補助軸通孔47が前後に貫通形成されている。また設置凹部44には、下部支持孔部45と下部連結軸通孔46との間に第2下部ソケット通孔48が前後に貫通形成されて、第2下部可動体130の後面から突出するロゴLED基板ソケット147を受け入れるようになっている。更に、設置凹部44には、下部補助軸通孔47の右側(外側)に第2下部検出片通孔49が前後に貫通形成され、この第2下部検出片通孔49の上下の中間部位が左右方向に拡張して開設されて、当該拡張部位に第2下部検出手段126を受け入れるようになっている(図17または図19参照)。   As shown in FIGS. 17, 18 and 19, the installation recess 44 has a lower support hole (support hole) 45 for rotatably supporting the lower support shaft 132 of the second lower movable body 130 at the center. The lower connecting shaft through hole (through hole) corresponding to the movement path of the lower connecting shaft 134 and the lower auxiliary shaft 136 associated with the second lower movable body 130 that is supported by the lower support hole 45 and swings. 46 and a lower auxiliary shaft through hole (another through hole) 47 are opened. The installation recess 44 has a second lower portion corresponding to the movement path of the logo LED board socket 147 and the second lower detection piece 138 associated with the second lower movable body 130 supported by the lower support hole 45 and swinging. A socket through hole (socket through hole) 48 and a second lower detection piece through hole (detection piece through hole) 49 are provided. Here, a lower connection shaft through hole 46 corresponding to the lower connection shaft 134 is formed through the installation recess 44 on the left side of the lower support hole portion 45 in the front and rear direction, and the lower auxiliary shaft 136 is formed on the right side of the lower support hole portion 45. Corresponding lower auxiliary shaft through-holes 47 are formed through the front and rear. In addition, a second lower socket through hole 48 is formed in the installation recess 44 between the lower support hole 45 and the lower connecting shaft through hole 46 in the front-rear direction so as to protrude from the rear surface of the second lower movable body 130. The LED board socket 147 is received. Further, a second lower detection piece through hole 49 is formed in the installation recess 44 in the front and rear direction on the right side (outer side) of the lower auxiliary shaft through hole 47, and upper and lower intermediate portions of the second lower detection piece through hole 49 are formed. The second lower detection means 126 is received by being expanded in the left-right direction so as to receive the second lower detection means 126 (see FIG. 17 or FIG. 19).

図17に示すように、前記設置凹部44の前面には、下部支持孔部45を挟んで左右に支持突起44a,44aが設けられ、これら支持突起44a,44aが第2下部可動体130の対応する側部後面に当接し、下部支持軸132の外周に有するスリーブのフランジが下部支持孔部45の開口縁に当接して、設置凹部44と第2下部可動体130との摺接部位を最小限に抑えている。なお、下部連結軸134および下部補助軸136も外周にスリーブを有し、下部連結軸134のスリーブは、下部連結軸通孔46の後側に後述する下部ラックの上端が整合するので短尺であり、下部補助軸136のスリーブは、下部補助軸通孔47の開口縁が後側に向けて突出しているので(図22参照)、下部連結軸134のスリーブと比べて長尺に設定されている。   As shown in FIG. 17, support protrusions 44 a and 44 a are provided on the front surface of the installation recess 44 on the left and right sides of the lower support hole 45, and these support protrusions 44 a and 44 a correspond to the second lower movable body 130. The flange of the sleeve on the outer periphery of the lower support shaft 132 contacts the opening edge of the lower support hole 45, and the sliding contact portion between the installation recess 44 and the second lower movable body 130 is minimized. To the limit. The lower connecting shaft 134 and the lower auxiliary shaft 136 also have sleeves on the outer periphery, and the sleeve of the lower connecting shaft 134 is short because the upper end of the lower rack described later is aligned with the rear side of the lower connecting shaft through hole 46. The sleeve of the lower auxiliary shaft 136 is set to be longer than the sleeve of the lower connecting shaft 134 because the opening edge of the lower auxiliary shaft through-hole 47 protrudes toward the rear side (see FIG. 22). .

(第2下部駆動機構)
図25に示すように、前記第2下部可動体を揺動する第2下部駆動機構は、駆動手段としての第2下部モータ(モータ)160と、この第2下部モータ160の出力軸に固定された下部ピニオン(ピニオン)162と、第2下部可動体130の下部連結軸134に連結されると共に、下部ピニオン162の回転につれて往復動する下部ラック(ラック)164とから構成される。下部演出装置100では、第1下部可動体110を動作させる第1下部駆動機構の第1下部モータ116を下部ベース部材102の前側に設けると共に下部駆動歯車118や下部従動歯車120等の伝達手段および第1下部可動体110を下部ベース部材102の後側に設けている。下部演出装置100では、第2下部可動体130を動作させる第2下部駆動機構の第2下部モータ160を下部ベース部材102の後側に設けると共に下部ピニオン162や下部ラック164等の伝達手段および第2下部可動体130を下部ベース部材102の前側に設けている。すなわち、第1下部駆動機構と第2下部駆動機構とは、下部モータ116,160および下部モータ116,160の出力を下部可動体110,130に伝える伝達手段が下部ベース部材102を挟んで前後反対の関係で配置されている(図26参照)。
(Second lower drive mechanism)
As shown in FIG. 25, the second lower drive mechanism that swings the second lower movable body is fixed to a second lower motor (motor) 160 as drive means and an output shaft of the second lower motor 160. The lower pinion 162 is connected to the lower connecting shaft 134 of the second lower movable body 130 and reciprocates as the lower pinion 162 rotates. In the lower rendering device 100, a first lower motor 116 of a first lower drive mechanism that operates the first lower movable body 110 is provided on the front side of the lower base member 102, and transmission means such as a lower drive gear 118 and a lower driven gear 120, and the like. The first lower movable body 110 is provided on the rear side of the lower base member 102. In the lower effect device 100, the second lower motor 160 of the second lower drive mechanism that operates the second lower movable body 130 is provided on the rear side of the lower base member 102, and the transmission means such as the lower pinion 162 and the lower rack 164, and the first 2 The lower movable body 130 is provided on the front side of the lower base member 102. In other words, the first lower drive mechanism and the second lower drive mechanism are opposite to each other in that the transmission means for transmitting the outputs of the lower motors 116 and 160 and the lower motors 116 and 160 to the lower movable bodies 110 and 130 sandwiches the lower base member 102. (See FIG. 26).

前記第2下部可動体130が第1下部可動体110の前側で下部演出装置100が有する下部可動体110,130の中で最前面に位置しているので、第2下部駆動機構は、下部ベース部材102の前側に伝達手段を設け、前後に設置スペースを要する第2下部モータ160を下部ベース部材102の後側に設けるのが、スペースの有効利用の観点から合理的である。一方、第1下部駆動機構は、第1下部可動体110が下部ベース部材102の後側に位置しているので、下部ベース部材102の後側に伝達手段を設け、前後に設置スペースを要する第1下部モータ116を下部ベース部材102の前側に設けるのが、スペースの有効利用の観点から合理的である。しかも、第1下部モータ116は、下部内周装飾部40の後側に設置凹部44と比較して空間を有する前突部43に収容されるので、設置凹部44の前側に設置される第2下部可動体130と干渉することはない。このように、下部演出装置100は、第1下部駆動機構と第2下部駆動機構とを動作させる下部可動体110,130の位置に応じて下部ベース部材102の前面と後面とに振り分けて設置することで、全体としてコンパクトにでき、透明板22と裏ユニット30との間の限られた前後スペースであっても、前後に並べて複数(2つ)の下部可動体110,130を設けることが可能となる(図3参照)。   Since the second lower movable body 130 is positioned at the forefront of the lower movable bodies 110 and 130 included in the lower rendering device 100 on the front side of the first lower movable body 110, the second lower drive mechanism is configured to have a lower base. It is reasonable from the viewpoint of effective use of space to provide transmission means on the front side of the member 102 and to provide the second lower motor 160 that requires installation space in the front and rear sides on the rear side of the lower base member 102. On the other hand, in the first lower drive mechanism, since the first lower movable body 110 is located on the rear side of the lower base member 102, a transmission means is provided on the rear side of the lower base member 102, and installation space is required in the front and rear. Providing the first lower motor 116 on the front side of the lower base member 102 is reasonable from the viewpoint of effective use of space. In addition, since the first lower motor 116 is accommodated in the front protrusion 43 having a space in comparison with the installation recess 44 on the rear side of the lower inner periphery decoration portion 40, the second lower motor 116 is installed on the front side of the installation recess 44. There is no interference with the lower movable body 130. As described above, the lower effect device 100 is installed by being distributed between the front surface and the rear surface of the lower base member 102 according to the positions of the lower movable bodies 110 and 130 that operate the first lower drive mechanism and the second lower drive mechanism. Thus, it is possible to make the whole compact, and even in the limited front and rear space between the transparent plate 22 and the back unit 30, a plurality of (two) lower movable bodies 110 and 130 can be provided side by side. (See FIG. 3).

前記第2下部駆動機構について具体的に説明する。図24に示すように、前記第2下部モータ160は、出力軸を前側に向けて下部ベース部材102における第1設置面部102aの後面に取り付けられる。第2下部モータ160は、第1下部可動体110の往復動の範囲外(実施例では、下位置の第1下部可動体110の下側)で、下部ベース部材102における何れか一方の側部(実施例では、左側)に偏倚させて配置される。第2下部モータ160は、ネジ固定のためのモータ取付片160aが突出形成されて、下部ベース部材102の後面にモータ取付片160aに対応して設けた下部保持片107に外周が保持されて位置決めされている。なお、裏ユニット30は、第2下部モータ160の後側に対応する位置に放熱用の開口32を備えている(図5および図8参照)。   The second lower drive mechanism will be specifically described. As shown in FIG. 24, the second lower motor 160 is attached to the rear surface of the first installation surface portion 102a of the lower base member 102 with the output shaft directed to the front side. The second lower motor 160 is outside the reciprocating range of the first lower movable body 110 (in the embodiment, below the first lower movable body 110 in the lower position), and either one of the side portions of the lower base member 102. (In the embodiment, it is arranged biased to the left side). The second lower motor 160 is provided with a motor mounting piece 160a for fixing a screw so that the outer periphery is held by a lower holding piece 107 provided on the rear surface of the lower base member 102 corresponding to the motor mounting piece 160a. Has been. The back unit 30 includes a heat radiation opening 32 at a position corresponding to the rear side of the second lower motor 160 (see FIGS. 5 and 8).

図25または図27に示すように、前記下部ピニオン162は、板状の平歯車であって、下部ベース部材102における第1設置面部102aの前側に突出する出力軸に固定されて第1設置面部102aの前側に設けられる。下部ピニオン162は、下部ベース部材102の前側から取り付けられるピニオン保持片163と下部ベース部材102との間に回転可能に保持されている。   As shown in FIG. 25 or FIG. 27, the lower pinion 162 is a plate-like spur gear, and is fixed to an output shaft that projects to the front side of the first installation surface portion 102a of the lower base member 102 and is fixed to the first installation surface portion 102a is provided on the front side. The lower pinion 162 is rotatably held between a pinion holding piece 163 attached from the front side of the lower base member 102 and the lower base member 102.

図25または図27に示すように、前記下部ラック164は、細長い板状部材であって、第1設置面部102aの前面に上下に離間して突出形成された2つの下部ラック軸108,108に対応して、下部ラック164には該下部ラックの長手に沿う方向に離間して2つの下部ラック孔部166,166が開設されている。下部ラック孔部166は、下部ラック164の長手辺に長手を沿わせた長孔形状に形成されて、該下部ラック孔部166の短手寸法が下部ラック軸108の外径と略同一に設定されている。下部ラック164は、上下の下部ラック軸108,108を対応する下部ラック孔部166,166に夫々収容して下部ベース部材102に対してスライド可能に保持され、第1設置面部102aの前側において下部ピニオン162の内側(第1設置面部102aの中央部に設けられた第1下部モータ116と下部ピニオン162との間)に配置される。すなわち、下部ラック164は、その長手辺が上下方向に延在すると共に、下部ラック孔部166の長手も上下方向に延在するようになっている。また下部ラック164には、下部ピニオン162に臨む側縁(左側縁)下部に、該下部ピニオン162にかみ合う歯部が設けられている。そして、下部ラック164は、第2下部モータ160の正逆回転に伴う下部ピニオン162の正逆回転により遊技盤面に沿う上下方向に直線的に往復動するよう構成される。なお、下部ラック164は、下部ベース部材102の前側を覆う下部内周装飾部40の内側の範囲で変位するようになっている。   As shown in FIG. 25 or FIG. 27, the lower rack 164 is an elongated plate-like member, and is formed on two lower rack shafts 108 and 108 that are formed to protrude from the front surface of the first installation surface portion 102a. Correspondingly, the lower rack 164 has two lower rack holes 166 and 166 that are spaced apart in the direction along the length of the lower rack. The lower rack hole 166 is formed in a long hole shape along the long side of the lower rack 164, and the short dimension of the lower rack hole 166 is set to be substantially the same as the outer diameter of the lower rack shaft 108. Has been. The lower rack 164 accommodates the upper and lower lower rack shafts 108 and 108 in the corresponding lower rack holes 166 and 166, and is slidably held with respect to the lower base member 102. The lower rack 164 is lower on the front side of the first installation surface portion 102a. It is arranged inside the pinion 162 (between the first lower motor 116 and the lower pinion 162 provided at the center of the first installation surface portion 102a). That is, the lower rack 164 has a longitudinal side extending in the vertical direction, and the lower rack hole 166 also extends in the vertical direction. Further, the lower rack 164 is provided with a tooth portion that meshes with the lower pinion 162 at the lower portion of the side edge (left edge) facing the lower pinion 162. The lower rack 164 is configured to reciprocate linearly in the vertical direction along the game board surface by forward and reverse rotation of the lower pinion 162 accompanying forward and reverse rotation of the second lower motor 160. Note that the lower rack 164 is displaced in a range inside the lower inner periphery decoration portion 40 that covers the front side of the lower base member 102.

図25または図27に示すように、前記下部ラック164は、下部ピニオン162がかみ合う下部と反対側の端部である上部に、第2下部可動体130の下部連結軸134を受け入れる下部連結孔部(連結孔部)168を備えている。下部連結孔部168は、下部ラック164の往復移動方向と交差する遊技盤面に沿う左右方向に長手が延在する長孔形状に形成されている。そして、下部ラック164は、下部連結軸通孔46を介して下部内周装飾部40の後側に突出した下部連結軸134を下部連結孔部168に受容して、上下への往復動につれて下部連結孔部168における上下の開口縁に当接する下部連結軸134を上下に押動するようになっている。すなわち、第2下部可動体130は、下部連結軸134が下部ラック164により上下に押動されることで、下部支持軸132を中心として揺動される。   As shown in FIG. 25 or FIG. 27, the lower rack 164 has a lower connecting hole portion that receives the lower connecting shaft 134 of the second lower movable body 130 at the upper portion that is the end opposite to the lower portion where the lower pinion 162 is engaged. (Connecting hole) 168 is provided. The lower connecting hole portion 168 is formed in a long hole shape extending in the left-right direction along the game board surface intersecting the reciprocating direction of the lower rack 164. The lower rack 164 receives the lower connecting shaft 134 protruding to the rear side of the lower inner periphery decorative portion 40 via the lower connecting shaft through hole 46 in the lower connecting hole portion 168, and moves downward as the reciprocating motion is made up and down. The lower connecting shaft 134 that contacts the upper and lower opening edges of the connecting hole 168 is pushed up and down. That is, the second lower movable body 130 is swung around the lower support shaft 132 when the lower connecting shaft 134 is pushed up and down by the lower rack 164.

図33に示すように、前記下部支持軸132、下部連結軸134および下部補助軸136は、下部支持孔部45、下部連結軸通孔46および下部補助軸通孔47を介して下部内周装飾部40の後側に夫々突出した後端が、下部リンク(リンク)170で互いに連結されてる。下部リンク170は、下部連結軸134および下部補助軸136の後端に夫々合わせて、該下部リンク170の両端に凹状に形成された2ヶ所の側部受容部と、下部内周装飾部40の後面から突出形成された下部支持孔部45の後部およびこの下部支持孔部45から突出する下部支持軸132の後部に合わせて、該下部リンク170の中央部に段状に凹ませて形成された中央受容部(何れも図示せず)とを備えている。下部リンク170は、前記受容部に対応の軸132,134,136を受け入れて組み付けた際に、下部補助軸通孔47の開口縁全周に突出形成された保持リブ(リブ)47aと、第2下部ソケット通孔48における下部連結軸通孔46側の開口縁に突出形成された保持リブ(リブ)48aとに前面が当接するよう構成されている。なお、保持リブ47a,48aは、第2下部可動体130の揺動に伴う下部補助軸136およびロゴLED基板ソケット147の移動経路に合わせて開設された通孔47,48の開口縁に沿わせて設けられているので、該保持リブ47a,48aは、第2下部可動体130の揺動に伴う下部リンク170の移動経路全体に亘って該下部リンク170を支持可能になっている。   As shown in FIG. 33, the lower support shaft 132, the lower connection shaft 134 and the lower auxiliary shaft 136 are connected to the lower inner peripheral decoration via the lower support hole 45, the lower connection shaft through hole 46 and the lower auxiliary shaft through hole 47. The rear ends projecting to the rear side of the portion 40 are connected to each other by a lower link (link) 170. The lower link 170 is aligned with the rear ends of the lower connecting shaft 134 and the lower auxiliary shaft 136 so that two side receiving portions formed in a concave shape at both ends of the lower link 170, and the lower inner peripheral decoration portion 40. The lower link 170 is formed so as to be stepped in the center of the lower link 170 in accordance with the rear portion of the lower support hole 45 protruding from the rear surface and the rear portion of the lower support shaft 132 protruding from the lower support hole 45. And a central receiving portion (both not shown). The lower link 170 has a holding rib (rib) 47a formed so as to protrude from the entire periphery of the opening edge of the lower auxiliary shaft through-hole 47 when the shafts 132, 134, 136 corresponding to the receiving portion are received and assembled. (2) The front surface of the lower socket through-hole 48 is configured to abut against a holding rib (rib) 48a formed to project from the opening edge of the lower connecting shaft through-hole 46 side. The holding ribs 47a and 48a are arranged along the opening edges of the through holes 47 and 48 that are established in accordance with the movement paths of the lower auxiliary shaft 136 and the logo LED board socket 147 accompanying the swing of the second lower movable body 130. Accordingly, the holding ribs 47a and 48a can support the lower link 170 over the entire movement path of the lower link 170 accompanying the swing of the second lower movable body 130.

このように、第2下部可動体130は、下部連結軸134が下部ラック164によって押動される構成であるが、下部連結軸134と下部補助軸136とを連結する下部リンク170によって下部支持軸132を挟んで下部連結軸134と反対側の下部補助軸136側からも、下部連結軸134側と同期して第2下部可動体130を押動することができる(図33参照)。第2下部可動体130は、左右方向に長手が延在する比較的大型の部材であるが、長手に離間する下部連結軸134と下部補助軸136とからバランスよく押動されるので、安定して動作させることができる。しかも、第2下部可動体130は、前側への移動が下部支持孔部45の後部に嵌合すると共に保持リブ47a,48aで前方変位を規制された下部リンク170によって阻まれるので、ロゴLED基板146等を内蔵して重くなっても前のめりになることはなく、適切な姿勢を維持し得る。   As described above, the second lower movable body 130 is configured such that the lower connecting shaft 134 is pushed by the lower rack 164, but the lower support shaft is connected by the lower link 170 that connects the lower connecting shaft 134 and the lower auxiliary shaft 136. The second lower movable body 130 can also be pushed in synchronism with the lower connecting shaft 134 side from the lower auxiliary shaft 136 side opposite to the lower connecting shaft 134 across the 132 (see FIG. 33). The second lower movable body 130 is a relatively large member whose length extends in the left-right direction. However, the second lower movable body 130 is pushed in a balanced manner from the lower connecting shaft 134 and the lower auxiliary shaft 136 that are spaced apart in the longitudinal direction. Can be operated. In addition, since the second lower movable body 130 is fitted to the rear portion of the lower support hole 45 and the front link is restricted by the lower link 170 restricted by the holding ribs 47a, 48a, the logo LED substrate. Even if it becomes heavier with the built-in 146, etc., it will not be bent forward and an appropriate posture can be maintained.

前記第2下部駆動機構による第2下部可動体130の動作について説明する。第2下部可動体130が待機姿勢にある場合に、第2下部検出片138は、第2下部検出手段126に位置している。第2下部モータ160の一方への回転駆動につれて下部ピニオン162が回転すると、下部ラック164が例えば上方に変位し、これに伴って下部連結孔部168に挿入された下部連結軸134が上方に変位されることで、第2下部可動体130の左側部が下部支持軸132を中心として押し上げられて右側部が下がる(図32(a)参照)。また、第2下部モータ160が他方へ回転駆動されて、下部ラック164が下方に変位し、これに伴って下部連結孔部168に挿入された下部連結軸134が下方に変位されることで、第2下部可動体130の左側部が下部支持軸132を中心として押し下げられて右側部が上がる(図32(b)参照)。すなわち、第2下部モータ160が所定の制御下に正逆回転することで、下部ラック164の上下往復動につれて第2下部可動体130が揺動する。そして、第2下部可動体130は、例えば所定回数揺動されると、第2下部検出片138が第2下部検出手段126で検出されることを条件として第2下部モータ160が停止される。   The operation of the second lower movable body 130 by the second lower drive mechanism will be described. When the second lower movable body 130 is in the standby posture, the second lower detection piece 138 is positioned on the second lower detection means 126. When the lower pinion 162 rotates as the second lower motor 160 rotates, the lower rack 164 is displaced upward, for example, and the lower coupling shaft 134 inserted in the lower coupling hole 168 is displaced upward accordingly. Thus, the left side portion of the second lower movable body 130 is pushed up around the lower support shaft 132 and the right side portion is lowered (see FIG. 32A). Further, the second lower motor 160 is rotationally driven to the other, the lower rack 164 is displaced downward, and the lower coupling shaft 134 inserted into the lower coupling hole 168 is displaced downward along with this, The left side of the second lower movable body 130 is pushed down about the lower support shaft 132, and the right side is raised (see FIG. 32B). That is, when the second lower motor 160 rotates forward and backward under predetermined control, the second lower movable body 130 swings as the lower rack 164 moves up and down. For example, when the second lower movable body 130 is swung a predetermined number of times, the second lower motor 160 is stopped on condition that the second lower detection piece 138 is detected by the second lower detection means 126.

図24に示すように、前記第1下部可動体110は、左右の下部連繋孔部114,114の間に位置して左右に離間配置されて、前後に貫通する2つの下部挿脱孔110b,110bを有している。下部演出装置100では、第1下部可動体110の上突出位置において、左側の下部挿脱孔110bが待機位置にある第2下部可動体130の下部リンク170の左端部後側に位置し、右側の下部挿脱孔110bが待機位置にある第2下部可動体130の下部リンク170の右端部後側に位置するよう構成される。すなわち、下部演出装置100では、下部リンク170の左端部後側から下部ラック164の下部連結孔部168を挟んで下部連結軸134に螺合されるネジを、第1下部可動体110を取り外すことなく左側の下部挿脱孔110bを介して着脱し得ると共に、下部リンク170の右端部後側から下部補助軸136に螺合されるネジを、第1下部可動体110を取り外すことなく右側の下部挿脱孔110bを介して着脱し得る。   As shown in FIG. 24, the first lower movable body 110 is positioned between the left and right lower connecting holes 114, 114 and is spaced apart from each other in the left and right directions, and has two lower insertion / removal holes 110b, 110b. In the lower rendering device 100, the left lower insertion / removal hole 110b is located at the rear side of the left end of the lower link 170 of the second lower movable body 130 in the standby position at the upper protruding position of the first lower movable body 110, and the right side. The lower insertion / removal hole 110b is positioned on the rear side of the right end of the lower link 170 of the second lower movable body 130 in the standby position. That is, in the lower effect device 100, the first lower movable body 110 is removed from the screw that is screwed into the lower connecting shaft 134 with the lower connecting hole 168 of the lower rack 164 sandwiched from the left end rear side of the lower link 170. And can be attached / detached via the left lower insertion / removal hole 110 b without using a screw that is screwed into the lower auxiliary shaft 136 from the rear side of the right end of the lower link 170 without removing the first lower movable body 110. It can be attached / detached via the insertion / removal hole 110b.

(発光手段)
前記下部演出装置100は、第2下部可動体130の内蔵されたロゴLED基板146だけでなく、他にもLED基板(発光体基板)172,174,176を備えている。図23または図25に示すように、下部ベース部材102には、中央部に設置した第1下部モータ116の前側に位置して該モータ116を隠すように取り付けられた第1下部LED基板(発光体基板)172と、第1設置面部102aの前側から第2設置面部102bの前側を延在するように下部ベース部材102の両側部に取り付けられた2つの第2下部LED基板(別の発光体基板)174,174とを備えている。第1下部LED基板172は、下部内周装飾部40の前突部43に第1下部モータ116と共に収容されて、前突部43の入賞装置凹部101に合わせて透明板22に設置される始動入賞装置25の上側に配置される。第1下部LED基板172の配線接続口(図示せず)は、該第1下部LED基板172と下部ベース部材102との間に設けられて前側から隠れている。すなわち、第1下部LED基板172は、始動入賞装置25の始動入賞口25aの上側で、ステージ74から始動入賞口25aへパチンコ球が流下する経路を照明することになり、遊技者が注目する始動入賞口25aの回りを適切に発光演出し得る。また、下部演出装置100は、下部内周装飾部40の前突部43に第1下部LED基板172および第1下部モータ116を収容する構成であるので、下部内周装飾部40の下部ベース部材102への取り付けに際して、位置合わせを行い易い。なお、枠状装飾体70には、第1下部LED基板172の前側に対応して重なる下部部位に、光拡散処理が施されており、この光拡散処理によって第1下部LED基板172から照射された光をより適切に拡散している。
(Light emission means)
The lower rendering device 100 includes not only the logo LED substrate 146 in which the second lower movable body 130 is built, but also LED substrates (light emitter substrates) 172, 174, 176. As shown in FIG. 23 or FIG. 25, a first lower LED substrate (light emitting device) is attached to the lower base member 102 so as to be located on the front side of the first lower motor 116 installed in the central portion so as to hide the motor 116. Body substrate) 172 and two second lower LED substrates (another light emitters) attached to both side portions of the lower base member 102 so as to extend from the front side of the first installation surface portion 102a to the front side of the second installation surface portion 102b. Substrate) 174, 174. The first lower LED board 172 is housed together with the first lower motor 116 in the front protrusion 43 of the lower inner peripheral decoration portion 40 and installed on the transparent plate 22 in accordance with the winning device recess 101 of the front protrusion 43. It is arranged above the winning device 25. A wiring connection port (not shown) of the first lower LED board 172 is provided between the first lower LED board 172 and the lower base member 102 and is hidden from the front side. That is, the first lower LED board 172 illuminates the path where the pachinko ball flows down from the stage 74 to the start winning opening 25a above the start winning opening 25a of the start winning apparatus 25, and the start that the player pays attention to. A light emission effect can be appropriately produced around the winning opening 25a. Further, since the lower effect device 100 is configured to house the first lower LED board 172 and the first lower motor 116 in the front protrusion 43 of the lower inner peripheral decorative portion 40, the lower base member of the lower inner peripheral decorative portion 40 When attaching to 102, it is easy to align. Note that the frame-shaped decorative body 70 is subjected to a light diffusion process at a lower portion corresponding to the front side of the first lower LED substrate 172, and is irradiated from the first lower LED substrate 172 by this light diffusion process. Diffuses light more properly.

前記第2下部LED基板174は、下部ベース部材102の前側に設置される下部ピニオン162および下部ラック164の略同一垂直平面上に前面が位置しており(図26参照)、下部ベース部材102の左側部に設置される第2下部LED基板174は、下部ピニオン162の上側で下部ラック164の左側(外側)に配置される(図23または図25参照)。また第2下部LED基板174は、下部ベース部材102において下部内周装飾部40の設置凹部44に前側が覆われて、下部連繋軸122が設けられた外側の下部従動歯車120の前側に位置している。第2下部LED基板174は、第1設置面部102aの前側から第2設置面部102bの前側を延在するように下部ベース部材102に取り付けてあるので、第1設置面部102aの後側に延在する第2設置面部102bと第2下部LED基板174との間に、第1下部可動体110の下部取付軸112の前端が変位するスペースや第1および第2下部検出手段124,126の設置スペースを確保できる。なお、左側の第2下部LED基板174は、下部ベース部材102の左下部に設けられる第2下部モータ160の取り付け部分を避けるように切り欠き形成されている。   The second lower LED substrate 174 has a front surface positioned on substantially the same vertical plane of the lower pinion 162 and the lower rack 164 installed on the front side of the lower base member 102 (see FIG. 26). The second lower LED substrate 174 installed on the left side is disposed on the left side (outside) of the lower rack 164 above the lower pinion 162 (see FIG. 23 or FIG. 25). Further, the second lower LED substrate 174 is positioned on the front side of the outer lower driven gear 120 on the lower base member 102 where the front side is covered with the installation recess 44 of the lower inner periphery decorative portion 40 and the lower connecting shaft 122 is provided. ing. Since the second lower LED substrate 174 is attached to the lower base member 102 so as to extend from the front side of the first installation surface portion 102a to the front side of the second installation surface portion 102b, it extends to the rear side of the first installation surface portion 102a. The space where the front end of the lower mounting shaft 112 of the first lower movable body 110 is displaced between the second installation surface portion 102b and the second lower LED substrate 174, and the installation space of the first and second lower detection means 124, 126 Can be secured. Note that the second lower LED substrate 174 on the left side is cut out so as to avoid the attachment portion of the second lower motor 160 provided in the lower left portion of the lower base member 102.

図15に示すように、前記下部内周装飾部40における前突部43の後面には、第3下部LED基板(更に別の発光体基板)176が、第1下部LED基板172および第2LED基板174の前側から外れた位置に設けられている。第3下部LED基板176は、下部ベース部材102の中央に位置する第1下部モータ116の左右に位置すると共に、下部連繋軸122が設けられた下部従動歯車120の下部駆動歯車118側に連繋する内側の下部従動歯車120の前側に位置しており、前突部43の入賞装置凹部101に合わせて透明板22に設置される始動入賞装置25の左右に配置される。そして、第3下部LED基板176を前突部43に設置することで、第3下部LED基板176の後側に下部ピニオン162や下部ラック164を配置する前後スペースを確保できる。なお、下部ベース部材102の右側上部には、下部内周装飾部40の下部通路40aの後側に対応して第4下部LED基板178が設けられている(図23参照)。第4下部LED基板178は、下部通路40aを隠すと共に、普通入賞装置27の周辺を発光演出している。   As shown in FIG. 15, on the rear surface of the front protrusion 43 in the lower inner periphery decorative portion 40, a third lower LED substrate (another light emitter substrate) 176 is provided on the first lower LED substrate 172 and the second LED substrate. It is provided at a position away from the front side of 174. The third lower LED board 176 is located on the left and right sides of the first lower motor 116 located at the center of the lower base member 102 and is linked to the lower drive gear 118 side of the lower driven gear 120 provided with the lower linkage shaft 122. It is located on the front side of the inner lower driven gear 120 and is arranged on the left and right of the start winning device 25 installed on the transparent plate 22 in accordance with the winning device recess 101 of the front protrusion 43. Then, by installing the third lower LED board 176 on the front protrusion 43, a front and rear space for arranging the lower pinion 162 and the lower rack 164 on the rear side of the third lower LED board 176 can be secured. A fourth lower LED board 178 is provided on the upper right side of the lower base member 102 so as to correspond to the rear side of the lower passage 40a of the lower inner periphery decorative portion 40 (see FIG. 23). The fourth lower LED board 178 hides the lower passage 40a and emits light around the normal winning device 27.

前記下部内周装飾部40の前面には、所要部位に下部カバー開口40bが前後に貫通形成され、この下部カバー開口40bに下部光拡散カバー40cが取り付けられている(図13参照)。すなわち、下部内周装飾部40は、下部カバー開口40bを覆う下部光拡散カバー40cによって前面の一部が構成されている。なお、下部光拡散カバー40cは、下部カバー開口40bに整合する外形形状に形成された側縁に設けた図示しない爪を、下部カバー開口40bの開口縁に引っ掛けて取り付けられる。下部内周装飾部40は、ラメ入りの樹脂からなる有色半透明であるのに対して、下部光拡散カバー40cは、後面に筋状の凹凸を並べた無色問透明な樹脂部材であり、下部内周装飾部40と下部光拡散カバー40cとの光拡散処理が相違するよう構成される。ここで、下部内周装飾部40では、下部カバー開口40bが設置凹部44における第2下部可動体130の側方に位置して、第2下部可動体130の揺動によって一部が隠れるように配置される。また下部カバー開口40bは、前突部43の左右の側部にも設けられている。   A lower cover opening 40b is formed through a front portion of the lower inner periphery decorative portion 40 in a required portion, and a lower light diffusion cover 40c is attached to the lower cover opening 40b (see FIG. 13). That is, a part of the front surface of the lower inner periphery decorative portion 40 is configured by the lower light diffusion cover 40c that covers the lower cover opening 40b. The lower light diffusion cover 40c is attached by hooking a claw (not shown) provided on a side edge formed in an outer shape matching the lower cover opening 40b to the opening edge of the lower cover opening 40b. The lower inner periphery decorative portion 40 is a colored translucent made of a resin containing lame, whereas the lower light diffusion cover 40c is a colorless transparent resin member in which streaks are arranged on the rear surface. The inner periphery decoration part 40 and the lower light-diffusion cover 40c are comprised so that the light-diffusion process may differ. Here, in the lower inner periphery decorative portion 40, the lower cover opening 40 b is located on the side of the second lower movable body 130 in the installation recess 44, and a part thereof is hidden by the swinging of the second lower movable body 130. Be placed. The lower cover opening 40 b is also provided on the left and right sides of the front protrusion 43.

前記第1〜第4下部LED基板172,174,176,178は、下部内周装飾40の本体部分で覆われる部位に配置されるLEDとしてフルカラーで発光可能なものが用いられ、前側が下部光拡散カバー40cで覆われる部位に配置されるLEDとして単色(実施例では白色)発光のものが用いられる。すなわち、下部LED基板172,174,176,178では、前側に位置する相違する光拡散処理の施された部材に合わせて、設置するLEDの発光態様を変える構成である。   The first to fourth lower LED substrates 172, 174, 176, and 178 are LEDs that can emit light in full color as LEDs disposed in a portion covered by the main body portion of the lower inner periphery decoration 40, and the front side is lower light. A single color (white in the embodiment) emitting light is used as the LED disposed in the portion covered with the diffusion cover 40c. That is, the lower LED substrates 172, 174, 176, and 178 have a configuration in which the light emission mode of the LED to be installed is changed in accordance with a member that has been subjected to different light diffusion processing located on the front side.

前記下部演出装置100は、前面の大部分を構成する下部内周装飾部40の本体部分と下部光拡散カバー40cとで光拡散態様が異なり、夫々の部位に対応して設けられたLEDの発光態様も異なるので、下部内周装飾部40の部位によって異なる発光演出を行うことができる。しかも、第2下部可動体130の動作につれて該可動体130により覆われる下部内周装飾部40の本体部分および下部光拡散カバー40cの領域が変化するので、発光態様に変化を与えることができる。そして、下部演出装置100は、強く光を照射したい部分を無色透明な下部光拡散カバー40cで構成すると共に、下部光拡散カバー40cに対応して強い光を照射し得る白色のLEDを用い、これに対して下部内周装飾部40の大部分を有色半透明としてフルカラーのLEDを用いており、下部内周装飾部40と下部光拡散カバー40cとで夫々の光拡散処理に合わせ適切な種類のLEDを対応して配置してあるので、発光態様の変化を大きくすることができる。なお、下部内周装飾部40の下部光拡散カバー40cを用いた発光態様を変化させる構成は、他の演出装置200,300,400でも採用可能である。   The lower rendering device 100 has different light diffusion modes between the main body portion of the lower inner peripheral decoration portion 40 and the lower light diffusion cover 40c that constitute most of the front surface, and the light emission of LEDs provided corresponding to the respective portions. Since the aspect is also different, different light effects can be performed depending on the portion of the lower inner periphery decorative portion 40. Moreover, as the operation of the second lower movable body 130, the main body portion of the lower inner periphery decorative portion 40 and the region of the lower light diffusion cover 40c that are covered by the movable body 130 change, so that the light emission mode can be changed. And the lower production | presentation apparatus 100 uses the white LED which can irradiate strong light corresponding to the lower light diffusion cover 40c while comprising the part which wants to irradiate light strongly with the colorless and transparent lower light diffusion cover 40c. On the other hand, most of the lower inner periphery decoration portion 40 is colored and translucent and full-color LEDs are used, and the lower inner periphery decoration portion 40 and the lower light diffusion cover 40c are of an appropriate type according to each light diffusion process. Since the LEDs are arranged correspondingly, the change in the light emission mode can be increased. In addition, the structure which changes the light emission aspect using the lower light-diffusion cover 40c of the lower inner periphery decoration part 40 is employable also with other production | presentation apparatus 200,300,400.

図23に示すように、下部ベース部材102の前面には、中央部に設けた第1下部モータ116を挟んで両側に第2下部LED基板174,174が設置されており、該下部ベース部材102の前面に、第1下部モータ116と左側(一方)の第2下部LED基板174との間に第2下部駆動機構の下部ピニオン162および下部ラック164が設けられている。また下部ベース部材102には、第1下部モータ116と下部ラック164との間に下部配線開口(配線用の開口)109aが前後に貫通形成されており、この配線用開口109aを介して左側の第3下部LED基板176に接続する配線が下部ベース部材102の後側に取り出される。更に、下部ベース部材102には、第1下部モータ116と右側(他方)の第2下部LED基板174との間に下部配線開口(配線用の開口)109bが前後に貫通形成されており、この下部配線開口109bを介して第1下部モータ116、第1下部LED基板172および右側の第3下部LED基板176に接続する配線が下部ベース部材102の後側に取り出される。実施例の下部ベース部材102では、第1下部モータ116の下部から該第1下部モータ116の下側に位置する入賞装置凹部101の横側にかけて下部配線開口109a,109bが開設されている。このように、下部演出装置100では、下部駆動機構および配線の配設スペースを確保しつつ、下部LED基板174,176により光の演出を行える。   As shown in FIG. 23, on the front surface of the lower base member 102, second lower LED boards 174 and 174 are installed on both sides with the first lower motor 116 provided in the center therebetween, and the lower base member 102 The lower pinion 162 and the lower rack 164 of the second lower drive mechanism are provided between the first lower motor 116 and the left (one) second lower LED board 174 on the front surface of the first lower motor 116. The lower base member 102 has a lower wiring opening (wiring opening) 109a formed between the first lower motor 116 and the lower rack 164 in the front-rear direction. The wiring connected to the third lower LED substrate 176 is taken out to the rear side of the lower base member 102. Furthermore, a lower wiring opening (wiring opening) 109b is formed through the lower base member 102 in the front-rear direction between the first lower motor 116 and the right (other) second lower LED board 174. Wirings connected to the first lower motor 116, the first lower LED board 172, and the right third lower LED board 176 are taken out to the rear side of the lower base member 102 through the lower wiring opening 109b. In the lower base member 102 of the embodiment, lower wiring openings 109a and 109b are opened from the lower portion of the first lower motor 116 to the lateral side of the winning device recess 101 located below the first lower motor 116. Thus, in the lower rendering device 100, the lower LED substrates 174 and 176 can produce light while securing the lower drive mechanism and wiring arrangement space.

前記下部演出装置100では、第1下部可動体110および第2下部可動体130の位置検出のために、夫々の下部可動体110,130に対応した下部検出手段(原位置検出手段)124,126を備えており、これら下部検出手段124,126は、左右の第2下部LED基板174,174に振り分けて設置されている(図26参照)。   In the lower effect device 100, lower detection means (original position detection means) 124 and 126 corresponding to the lower movable bodies 110 and 130 for detecting the positions of the first lower movable body 110 and the second lower movable body 130, respectively. These lower detection means 124, 126 are arranged separately on the left and right second lower LED boards 174, 174 (see FIG. 26).

先ず、第1下部可動体110の原位置を検出するための構成について説明する。第1下部可動体110は、一方(実施例では左側)の下部取付軸112の左側(外側)に並べて前面から突出形成された第1下部検出片(検出片)115を有している(図27参照)。下部ベース部材102は、左側に位置する下部取付孔部104の左側(外側)に平行して、第1下部可動体110の往復動に伴う第1下部検出片115の移動経路に対応して開設された第1下部検出片通孔(検出片通孔)102dを左側の第2設置面部102bに有し(図16参照)、この第1下部検出片通孔102dを介して第1下部検出片115が下部ベース部材102の前側に臨むようになっている。第1下部可動体110に対応する第1下部検出手段124は、左側に位置する第2下部LED基板174の後面に設けられ、第2下部LED基板174と第2設置面部102bとの間のスペースに収容されている(図26参照)。また、第1下部検出手段124は、下部取付孔部104の下端部の横側に配置されており、下位置にある第1下部可動体110の第1下部検出片115を第1下部検出手段124で検出するようになっている。すなわち、第1下部検出手段124を第1下部可動体110を支持する下部取付軸112の一方の近くに配置することで、第1下部可動体110の原点位置を確実に検出できる。   First, a configuration for detecting the original position of the first lower movable body 110 will be described. The first lower movable body 110 has a first lower detection piece (detection piece) 115 that is formed so as to protrude from the front side along the left side (outside) of one (left side in the embodiment) lower mounting shaft 112 (see FIG. 27). The lower base member 102 is opened in parallel with the left side (outside) of the lower mounting hole 104 located on the left side corresponding to the movement path of the first lower detection piece 115 accompanying the reciprocation of the first lower movable body 110. The first lower detection piece through hole 102d (detection piece through hole) 102d is provided on the second installation surface portion 102b on the left side (see FIG. 16), and the first lower detection piece through the first lower detection piece through hole 102d. 115 faces the front side of the lower base member 102. The first lower detection means 124 corresponding to the first lower movable body 110 is provided on the rear surface of the second lower LED substrate 174 located on the left side, and a space between the second lower LED substrate 174 and the second installation surface portion 102b. (See FIG. 26). The first lower detection means 124 is disposed on the side of the lower end portion of the lower mounting hole 104, and the first lower detection piece 115 of the first lower movable body 110 at the lower position is used as the first lower detection means. 124 is detected. That is, by arranging the first lower detection unit 124 near one of the lower attachment shafts 112 that support the first lower movable body 110, the origin position of the first lower movable body 110 can be reliably detected.

前記下部ベース部材102には、第1下部可動体110の往復動の範囲より外側において第1下部検出片通孔102dの下部に繋げて、左側に位置する第2下部LED基板174の後面に設けた第2下部ソケット(ソケット)174aが臨むソケット通孔102eが開設されている(図24参照)。すなわち、第1下部可動体110や第2下部駆動機構の伝達手段との第2下部ソケット174aに接続される配線との干渉を回避し得る。なお、右側に位置する第2下部LED基板174の第2下部ソケット174aは、裏ユニット30の配線開口(図示せず)に向けて斜め下側に開口するよう遊技盤面に沿って後面に設けられる。   The lower base member 102 is connected to the lower portion of the first lower detection piece through hole 102d outside the range of reciprocation of the first lower movable body 110, and is provided on the rear surface of the second lower LED substrate 174 located on the left side. Further, a socket through hole 102e facing the second lower socket (socket) 174a is opened (see FIG. 24). That is, interference with the wiring connected to the second lower socket 174a with the transmission means of the first lower movable body 110 and the second lower drive mechanism can be avoided. The second lower socket 174a of the second lower LED board 174 located on the right side is provided on the rear surface along the game board surface so as to open obliquely downward toward the wiring opening (not shown) of the back unit 30. .

次に、第2下部可動体130の原位置を検出するための構成について説明する。第2下部可動体130に対応する第2下部検出手段126は、右側に位置する第2下部LED基板174の前面に設けられ(図26参照)、下部内周装飾部40の第2下部検出片通孔49の拡張部位に収容される(図19参照)。そして、実施例では、左右方向に長手辺が延在する第2下部可動体130が略水平となった際に、第2下部検出手段126が第2下部検出片138を検出するようになっている。第2下部検出手段126は、第2下部LED基板174から前側に突出するものの、下部内周装飾部40の第2下部検出片通孔49の拡張部位に収容される構成であるので、下部内周装飾部40の板厚分のスペースを有効利用して、第2下部検出手段126を設置するために要する前後のスペースを短縮することができる。第2下部可動体130では、下部連結軸134と反対側に第2下部検出手段126の検出対象となる第2下部検出片138を設けることで、下部ラック164による第2下部可動体130の揺動を該検出片138や第2下部検出手段126が邪魔することなく、第2下部検出手段126における誤検出を抑制することができる。   Next, a configuration for detecting the original position of the second lower movable body 130 will be described. The second lower detection means 126 corresponding to the second lower movable body 130 is provided on the front surface of the second lower LED board 174 located on the right side (see FIG. 26), and the second lower detection piece of the lower inner periphery decoration portion 40. It is accommodated in an expanded portion of the through hole 49 (see FIG. 19). In the embodiment, the second lower detection means 126 detects the second lower detection piece 138 when the second lower movable body 130 whose longitudinal side extends in the left-right direction becomes substantially horizontal. Yes. Although the second lower detection means 126 protrudes forward from the second lower LED board 174, the second lower detection means 126 is housed in an extended portion of the second lower detection piece through-hole 49 of the lower inner peripheral decoration portion 40. The space before and after the installation of the second lower detection means 126 can be shortened by effectively using the space corresponding to the plate thickness of the peripheral decoration portion 40. In the second lower movable body 130, the second lower movable body 130 is shaken by the lower rack 164 by providing the second lower detection piece 138 to be detected by the second lower detection means 126 on the side opposite to the lower coupling shaft 134. The detection piece 138 and the second lower detection means 126 do not interfere with the movement, and erroneous detection in the second lower detection means 126 can be suppressed.

前記下部演出装置100では、下部内周装飾部40の後面から突出した下部支持孔部45の後部を基準として左側に第2下部ソケット通孔48を介してロゴLED基板ソケット147が下部内周装飾部40の後側に臨んでいる。また、下部内周装飾部40には、下部支持孔部45の後部を基準として左側で、かつ前記第2下部ソケット通孔48の下側に位置して、ロゴLED基板ソケット147に接続した配線の接続先となる第3下部ソケット(ソケット)176aを後面に備えた第3下部LED基板176が設けられている(図18参照)。更に下部内周装飾部40の後面には、下部支持孔部45の後部を基準として右側(下部支持孔部45を挟んで第2下部ソケット通孔48と反対側)に位置して、下部配線保持具41が設けられている。そして、ロゴLED基板ソケット147と第3下部ソケット176aとを接続する配線を、下部支持孔部45の後部の左側を迂回して取り回し、下部支持孔部45の後部左側に位置する下部配線保持具41で該配線の中間部位を保持するよう構成している。具体的には、ロゴLED基板ソケット147に接続した配線は、下部支持孔部45の左側から下部支持孔部45の上方を通り、下部支持孔部45の右側を回って下部支持孔部45の下方を通って第3下部ソケット176aに接続される。なお、下部内周装飾部40の後面には、下部支持孔部45の下側に該下部内周装飾部40を下部ベース部材102にネジ固定するための下部取付ボス42が突出形成されており、支持孔部45の下側を通る配線は、下部支持孔部45の後部と下部取付ボス42との間に保持される。   In the lower effect device 100, the logo LED board socket 147 is decorated to the lower inner circumference via the second lower socket through hole 48 on the left side with respect to the rear portion of the lower support hole 45 protruding from the rear surface of the lower inner decoration portion 40. It faces the rear side of the section 40. In addition, the lower inner peripheral decorative portion 40 is connected to the logo LED board socket 147 on the left side with respect to the rear portion of the lower support hole portion 45 and below the second lower socket through hole 48. A third lower LED board 176 having a third lower socket (socket) 176a on the rear surface is provided (see FIG. 18). Further, on the rear surface of the lower inner periphery decorative portion 40, the lower wiring is located on the right side (on the opposite side of the second lower socket through-hole 48 across the lower support hole 45) with respect to the rear portion of the lower support hole 45. A holder 41 is provided. And the wiring which connects the logo LED board socket 147 and the 3rd lower socket 176a detours around the left side of the rear part of the lower support hole part 45, and the lower wiring holder located in the rear left side of the lower support hole part 45 41 is configured to hold the intermediate portion of the wiring. Specifically, the wiring connected to the logo LED board socket 147 passes from the left side of the lower support hole 45 to the upper side of the lower support hole 45 and turns to the right side of the lower support hole 45 to form the lower support hole 45. It passes through the lower part and is connected to the third lower socket 176a. A lower mounting boss 42 for projecting and fixing the lower inner peripheral decorative portion 40 to the lower base member 102 is formed on the rear surface of the lower inner peripheral decorative portion 40 below the lower support hole 45. The wiring passing below the support hole 45 is held between the rear part of the lower support hole 45 and the lower mounting boss 42.

図18に示すように、前記下部演出装置100では、ロゴLED基板ソケット147と第3下部ソケット176aとが、同一の側部に上下の関係で配置されているが、配線を最短距離となる上下に通して両ソケット147,176aに接続すると、配線の取り回し長さを確保することができずに両ソケット147,176aに対する着脱作業を行い難い。また、上下方向に変位するロゴLED基板ソケット147のために配線の余裕寸法をとると、後側が凸となるように湾曲した配線が、ロゴLED基板ソケット147の上下変位につれて前後方向に変位するので、後側の下部ベース部材102に干渉して配線の断線や第2下部可動体130の揺動を妨げるおそれがある。実施例の下部演出装置100は、配線を第2下部可動体130の揺動方向と交差する左右方向に迂回させて取り回すことで、配線の取り回し寸法を長くすることができるから、両ソケット147,176aに対する着脱作業を行い易く、配線が邪魔をして第2下部可動体130の変位を妨げることもない。しかも、配線を、左右方向(実施例では右側)に凸になるよう湾曲することができ、ロゴLED基板ソケット147が上下に変位しても、配線が下部内周装飾部40の後面に沿って上下に変位するので、配線が下部ベース部材102に干渉することを回避できる。   As shown in FIG. 18, in the lower effect device 100, the logo LED board socket 147 and the third lower socket 176a are arranged in the vertical relationship on the same side, but the upper and lower wirings have the shortest distance. If it is connected to both the sockets 147 and 176a through the wire, it is difficult to secure the wiring length and to perform the attaching / detaching operation to both the sockets 147 and 176a. Also, if the wiring margin is taken for the logo LED board socket 147 that is displaced in the vertical direction, the wiring curved so that the rear side is convex is displaced in the front-rear direction as the logo LED board socket 147 is displaced up and down. There is a risk that the lower base member 102 on the rear side may interfere to hinder the disconnection of the wiring and the swinging of the second lower movable body 130. The lower rendering device 100 of the embodiment can increase the wiring dimension by detouring the wiring in the left-right direction intersecting with the swinging direction of the second lower movable body 130, so both sockets 147. , 176a can be easily attached and detached, and the wiring does not interfere with the displacement of the second lower movable body 130. In addition, the wiring can be curved so as to be convex in the left-right direction (right side in the embodiment), and even if the logo LED board socket 147 is displaced up and down, the wiring is along the rear surface of the lower inner periphery decorative portion 40. Since it is displaced up and down, it can be avoided that the wiring interferes with the lower base member 102.

前記下部演出装置100は、第1下部モータ116を一方向に回転することで、下部従動歯車120の下部連繋軸122の回転変位が第1下部可動体110の往復動に変換されるので、第1下部可動体を往復動させるために第1下部モータ116を正逆回転する必要がなく、第1下部モータ116への負荷および制御負荷を軽減することができる。また、第1下部可動体110は、左右に長手が延在しているが、左右に離間して設けられた対をなす下部連繋軸122,122で第1下部可動体110を支持すると共に、第1下部可動体110の左右に離間する下部取付軸112,112が下部ベース部材102で保持される構成であるから、第1下部可動体110をバランスよく支持でき、第1下部可動体110を大型化したり、第1下部可動体110の動作頻度や動作速度を増しても、第1下部可動体110をがたつきなく安定して動作することができる。下部演出装置100は、複数の下部LED基板172,174,176,178を備えているので、第1下部可動体110および第2下部可動体130の動作演出と併せて、光による発光演出も行うことができる。   Since the lower rendering device 100 rotates the first lower motor 116 in one direction, the rotational displacement of the lower connecting shaft 122 of the lower driven gear 120 is converted into the reciprocating motion of the first lower movable body 110. It is not necessary to rotate the first lower motor 116 forward and backward in order to reciprocate the first lower movable body, and the load and control load on the first lower motor 116 can be reduced. In addition, the first lower movable body 110 extends in the left and right directions, but supports the first lower movable body 110 with the lower connecting shafts 122 and 122 that are provided apart from each other on the left and right sides. Since the lower mounting shafts 112, 112 that are spaced apart from each other on the left and right sides of the first lower movable body 110 are held by the lower base member 102, the first lower movable body 110 can be supported in a well-balanced manner. Even if the size is increased or the operation frequency and operation speed of the first lower movable body 110 are increased, the first lower movable body 110 can be stably operated without rattling. Since the lower effect device 100 includes a plurality of lower LED substrates 172, 174, 176, and 178, in addition to the operation effects of the first lower movable body 110 and the second lower movable body 130, a light emission effect by light is also performed. be able to.

前記下部演出装置100は、下部駆動歯車118および下部従動歯車120を下部ベース部材102の下部機構収容空間102cに配置すると共に、前後方向に重ねて配置せずに遊技盤面に沿って並べているので、第1下部可動体110に第1下部モータ116から動力を伝達する伝達手段が前後方向に大型化しない。また、第2LED基板174と下部ベース部材102における第2設置面部102aとの間の隙間を利用して第1下部検出手段124を設けてあるので、第1下部検出手段124が前または後に突出することを回避できる。すなわち、下部演出装置100は、全体として前後方向にコンパクトであって、透明板22と裏ユニット30との間の狭いスペースに設置可能である。   Since the lower stage production device 100 arranges the lower drive gear 118 and the lower driven gear 120 in the lower mechanism accommodating space 102c of the lower base member 102 and arranges them along the game board surface without overlapping in the front-rear direction. The transmission means for transmitting power from the first lower motor 116 to the first lower movable body 110 does not increase in size in the front-rear direction. Further, since the first lower detection means 124 is provided using the gap between the second LED substrate 174 and the second installation surface portion 102a of the lower base member 102, the first lower detection means 124 protrudes forward or backward. You can avoid that. That is, the lower effect device 100 is compact in the front-rear direction as a whole, and can be installed in a narrow space between the transparent plate 22 and the back unit 30.

前記下部演出装置100は、第1下部可動体110の下部取付軸112,112を保持する下部取付孔部104,104、複数の下部従動歯車120および下部駆動歯車118を、第1下部可動体110の動作方向である上下方向と交差する左右方向に並べて配置してあるので、第1下部可動体110に第1下部モータ116から動力を伝達する伝達手段が第1下部可動体110の動作方向に大型化しない。すなわち、下部演出装置100は、全体として上下方向にコンパクトであって、透明板22と裏ユニット30との間の狭いスペースにおいて表示部20bを塞ぐことなく該表示部20bの下側に設置可能である。   The lower rendering device 100 includes lower mounting holes 104 and 104 that hold the lower mounting shafts 112 and 112 of the first lower movable body 110, a plurality of lower driven gears 120, and a lower drive gear 118. The transmission means for transmitting power from the first lower motor 116 to the first lower movable body 110 is arranged in the operation direction of the first lower movable body 110. Does not increase in size. That is, the lower effect device 100 is compact in the vertical direction as a whole, and can be installed below the display unit 20b without blocking the display unit 20b in a narrow space between the transparent plate 22 and the back unit 30. is there.

前記第2下部可動体130は、左右に長手辺が延在しているが、中央部に設けた下部支持軸132と該第2下部可動体130の長手に沿う左右方向に離間した部位に設けた下部連結軸134を、第2下部モータ160に下部ピニオン162を介して接続する下部ラック164で動かす構成であるので、第2下部可動体130の長手を少なくとも2ヶ所で支持することができる。すなわち、第2下部可動体130が大型化すると共にロゴLED基板146を内蔵する等によって重量が嵩んだとしても、第2下部モータ160の正逆回転に適切に連動して該第2下部可動体130を安定して揺動させることができる。しかも、第2下部可動体130は、下部連結軸134と下部支持軸132を挟んで反対側に設けた下部補助軸136を、下部リンク170を介して連結しているので、合計3ヶ所でまた左右にバランスよく支持されている。従って、LED146aによる発光演出が可能な大型の第2下部可動体130を採用することができ、第2下部可動体130の動作による演出効果をより向上し得る。更に、第2下部可動体130は、透明板22の後側に配置されているので、遊技領域20aを流下するパチンコ球に第2下部可動体130が干渉することはなく、遊技者が注視する始動入賞口25aの近くに第2下部可動体130を配置することができ、演出効果をより向上し得る。   The second lower movable body 130 has long sides extending in the left and right directions, but is provided in a portion separated in the left-right direction along the length of the lower support shaft 132 provided in the central portion and the second lower movable body 130. Since the lower connecting shaft 134 is moved by the lower rack 164 connected to the second lower motor 160 via the lower pinion 162, the length of the second lower movable body 130 can be supported at at least two places. That is, even if the second lower movable body 130 is increased in size and increased in weight due to the incorporation of the logo LED substrate 146, the second lower movable body is appropriately interlocked with the forward / reverse rotation of the second lower motor 160. The body 130 can be rocked stably. In addition, since the second lower movable body 130 connects the lower auxiliary shaft 136 provided on the opposite side with the lower connecting shaft 134 and the lower support shaft 132 interposed therebetween via the lower link 170, It is supported in a balanced manner on the left and right. Therefore, the large second lower movable body 130 capable of producing a light emission effect by the LED 146a can be employed, and the effect produced by the operation of the second lower movable body 130 can be further improved. Further, since the second lower movable body 130 is disposed on the rear side of the transparent plate 22, the second lower movable body 130 does not interfere with the pachinko ball flowing down the game area 20a, and the player watches. The 2nd lower movable body 130 can be arrange | positioned near the start winning opening 25a, and a production effect can be improved more.

前記第2下部可動体130は、ロゴLED基板146に設けたLED146aの前側に設けられる光拡散部142,144がLED146aと間隔をあけて位置決めされると共に、前光拡散部142が枠部140における前壁140aの前壁開口部140cから突出する突出部142aを有する立体的な形状であるので、LED146aから照射された光が適切に拡散されて、第2下部可動体130の前側に臨む突出部142a全体が発光しているように視認される。しかも、光拡散部が光拡散シートを含めて前後に重なる複数の部材で構成されているので、各光拡散部の光拡散処理の組み合わせによってLED146aから照射される光を適切に拡散することができ、第2下部可動体130における光の演出効果を向上できる。また第2下部可動体130を構成する部材142,144,146,148が、枠部140の収容空間において周壁140bおよび突片140dで位置決めされた状態で配設されているので、第2下部可動体130を揺動しても第2下部可動体の構成部材142,144,146,148のがたつきを防止することができる。更に、第2下部可動体130の側面および後面が不透明な枠部140の周壁140bおよび後壁部148で構成されているので、前面以外の部分からLED146aの光が漏れることはない。   In the second lower movable body 130, the light diffusion portions 142 and 144 provided on the front side of the LED 146a provided on the logo LED substrate 146 are positioned with a space from the LED 146a, and the front light diffusion portion 142 is positioned in the frame portion 140. Since it has a three-dimensional shape having a protrusion 142a protruding from the front wall opening 140c of the front wall 140a, the light irradiated from the LED 146a is appropriately diffused and protrudes toward the front side of the second lower movable body 130 It is visually recognized that the entire 142a emits light. Moreover, since the light diffusing part is composed of a plurality of members that overlap in the front and back, including the light diffusing sheet, the light emitted from the LED 146a can be appropriately diffused by the combination of the light diffusing processes of each light diffusing part The effect of producing light in the second lower movable body 130 can be improved. Further, since the members 142, 144, 146, and 148 constituting the second lower movable body 130 are disposed in the housing space of the frame portion 140 in a state of being positioned by the peripheral wall 140b and the projecting piece 140d, the second lower movable body Even if the body 130 is swung, it is possible to prevent the constituent members 142, 144, 146, 148 of the second lower movable body from rattling. Furthermore, since the side surface and the rear surface of the second lower movable body 130 are constituted by the peripheral wall 140b and the rear wall portion 148 of the opaque frame portion 140, the light of the LED 146a does not leak from portions other than the front surface.

なお、下部演出装置は、下部ベース部材102に下部駆動機構、第1下部可動体110および下部内周装飾部40が取り付けられる構成であるので、下部ベース部材102を基準としてユニットとして取り扱い可能である。   In addition, since the lower stage production device is configured such that the lower drive mechanism, the first lower movable body 110, and the lower inner periphery decoration portion 40 are attached to the lower base member 102, the lower stage production device can be handled as a unit with the lower base member 102 as a reference. .

(上部演出装置)
前記上部演出装置200は、図3に示すように、裏ユニット30における裏ユニット開口部30a上側を画成する辺部に設置され、装着口に臨んで透明板22の後側に配置されている。また上部演出装置200は、図2に示すように、表示部20bの上側に位置して、枠状装飾体70に装着口に延出するように設けられた前部演出装置300の後側に設置されている。
(Upper production device)
As shown in FIG. 3, the upper effect device 200 is installed on a side that defines the upper side of the back unit opening 30 a in the back unit 30, and is arranged on the rear side of the transparent plate 22 facing the mounting opening. . Further, as shown in FIG. 2, the upper effect device 200 is located on the rear side of the front effect device 300 provided on the upper side of the display unit 20 b so as to extend to the attachment opening in the frame-shaped decorative body 70. is set up.

図34〜図47に示すように、前記上部演出装置200は、上部ベース部材(取付部材)202と、この上部ベース部材202の後側に設けられた上部可動体220と、上部ベース部材202に設けられ、上部可動体220を動作させる上部駆動機構とから基本的に構成される。なお、上部演出装置200は、表示部20bの上側の縁辺を構成する上部内周装飾部50が上部ベース部材202の前側を覆って該上部ベース部材202に取り付けられ、この上部内周装飾部50が上部演出装置200の前面を構成するカバーとして機能している(図35または図37参照)。上部演出装置200は、後述する前部演出装置300と前後の関係で重なるように配置され、前部演出装置300の後側から上部可動体220が表示部20bに対して出没するようになっている(例えば図34参照)。   As shown in FIGS. 34 to 47, the upper effect device 200 includes an upper base member (attachment member) 202, an upper movable body 220 provided on the rear side of the upper base member 202, and an upper base member 202. An upper drive mechanism that is provided and operates the upper movable body 220 is basically configured. In the upper effect device 200, the upper inner peripheral decorative portion 50 that constitutes the upper edge of the display unit 20b covers the front side of the upper base member 202 and is attached to the upper base member 202. The upper inner peripheral decorative portion 50 Functions as a cover constituting the front surface of the upper rendering device 200 (see FIG. 35 or FIG. 37). The upper effect device 200 is arranged so as to overlap with a front effect device 300 described later, and the upper movable body 220 appears and disappears from the rear side of the front effect device 300 with respect to the display unit 20b. (See, for example, FIG. 34).

前記上部ベース部材202の前側を覆うカバーとしての上部内周装飾部50は、半透明の樹脂を基本とした部材であって、上部ベース部材202の中央部の前側を覆って該上部ベース部材202に取り付けられている(図35または図37参照)。すなわち、上部内周装飾部50は、裏ユニット30の下辺に亘って左右に長手を延在させて上部ベース部材202を介して裏ユニット30に取り付けられ、遊技盤20において透明板22を介して前面から視認可能で、また表示部20bの上辺を構成している(図4参照)。   The upper inner periphery decorative portion 50 as a cover covering the front side of the upper base member 202 is a member based on a translucent resin, and covers the front side of the central portion of the upper base member 202 so as to cover the upper base member 202. (See FIG. 35 or FIG. 37). In other words, the upper inner periphery decorative portion 50 is attached to the rear unit 30 via the upper base member 202 with its longitudinal length extending to the left and right over the lower side of the back unit 30, and via the transparent plate 22 on the game board 20. It is visible from the front and constitutes the upper side of the display unit 20b (see FIG. 4).

(上部ベース部材)
前記上部ベース部材202は、上部可動体220および上部駆動機構の設置基盤となる透明で細長い板状部材であって(図45または図46参照)、透明板22の後側に位置して裏ユニット30の前側に配置されている(図34参照)。また、上部ベース部材202は、長手辺を左右方向に延在させて板面を遊技盤面に平行に沿わせて該裏ユニット30に取り付けられる。上部ベース部材202は、左右方向の中央部分が後側に開口する箱形状の上部内周装飾部50の内側に整合する外形形状に形成されると共に、上部内周装飾部50の後面に突出形成された上部取付ボス(図示せず)に対応して、該上部取付ボスの後端に整合する凹溝を有する上部取付凹部204が設けられている(図40参照)。そして、上部ベース部材202は、中央部分を上部内周装飾部50の内側に嵌め合わせて上部取付凹部204に上部取付ボスを収容して位置決めして、上部ベース部材202の後側からネジ固定することで、該上部ベース部材202と上部内周装飾部50の後面との間に空間をあけた状態で取り付けられる(図34または図38参照)。ここで、上部ベース部材202の左右の側部は、上部内周装飾部50の側縁より突出しており、後述する側部内周装飾部60,60の上部で前側が覆われるようになっている(図4または図7参照)。
(Upper base member)
The upper base member 202 is a transparent and elongated plate-like member that serves as an installation base of the upper movable body 220 and the upper drive mechanism (see FIG. 45 or 46), and is located on the rear side of the transparent plate 22 and is a rear unit. 30 (see FIG. 34). Further, the upper base member 202 is attached to the back unit 30 with its longitudinal side extending in the left-right direction and the plate surface parallel to the game board surface. The upper base member 202 is formed in an outer shape that matches the inner side of the box-shaped upper inner peripheral decorative portion 50 whose central portion in the left-right direction opens to the rear side, and is formed to protrude from the rear surface of the upper inner peripheral decorative portion 50. Corresponding to the upper mounting boss (not shown), an upper mounting recess 204 having a concave groove aligned with the rear end of the upper mounting boss is provided (see FIG. 40). Then, the upper base member 202 is fitted with the center portion inside the upper inner periphery decorative portion 50, accommodates and positions the upper mounting boss in the upper mounting recess 204, and is fixed by screws from the rear side of the upper base member 202. Thus, the upper base member 202 is attached with a space between the upper inner peripheral decorative portion 50 and the rear surface (see FIG. 34 or FIG. 38). Here, the left and right side portions of the upper base member 202 protrude from the side edges of the upper inner peripheral decorative portion 50, and the front side is covered by upper portions of side inner peripheral decorative portions 60, 60 described later. (See FIG. 4 or FIG. 7).

図45または図46に示すように、前記上部ベース部材202は、後面部202aおよびこの後面部202aの前側に段差をつけて延在する前面部202bを有しており、部材の設置部分となる板面(後面部202aと前面部202b)が前後にずらしてある。上部ベース部材202は、左右側部および上縁部を除く中央部分が前側に向けて突出するよう凹んだ段差形状に形成され、該上部ベース部材202の左右側部および上縁部が後面部202aとなり、左右側部および上縁部を除く中央部分が後面部より前側に板面が延在する前面部202bとなっている。すなわち、上部ベース部材202は、後面部202aを裏ユニット30に突き合わせて取り付けた際に、前面部202bと裏ユニット30との間に可動体収容空間を画成するよう構成される。   As shown in FIG. 45 or 46, the upper base member 202 has a rear surface portion 202a and a front surface portion 202b extending with a step on the front side of the rear surface portion 202a, and serves as a member installation portion. The plate surfaces (rear surface portion 202a and front surface portion 202b) are shifted back and forth. The upper base member 202 is formed in a stepped shape in which a central portion excluding the left and right side portions and the upper edge portion protrudes toward the front side. Thus, the central portion excluding the left and right side portions and the upper edge portion is a front surface portion 202b whose plate surface extends in front of the rear surface portion. That is, the upper base member 202 is configured to define a movable body accommodation space between the front surface portion 202b and the back unit 30 when the rear surface portion 202a is attached to the back unit 30 in abutment.

前記上部ベース部材202の前面部202bには、左右方向に離間して上下方向に長手が延在する長孔形状に形成された上部取付孔部206が複数開設されている(図36、図45または図46参照)。ここで、実施例の上部ベース部材202は、互いに平行な関係で延在する3つの上部取付孔部206を有しており、前面部202bの中央に位置する上部取付孔部206を挟んで対称な位置関係で前面部202bの側部に位置する上部取付孔部206,206が配置されている。各上部取付孔部206は、上部ベース部材202を前後に貫通するよう形成されている。上部ベース部材202には、前面部202bの後面に左右側部の上部取付孔部206の外側に上下に延在して突出形成された上部当接リブ205が夫々設けられている(図46参照)。上部ベース部材202において左右に離間配置された上部当接リブ205,205は、上部取付孔部206,206で後述する上部取付軸がスライド可能に保持されて前面部202bの後面に沿って上下に往復動する上部可動体220が前側へ移動するのを規制すると共に、上部ベース部材202と上部可動体220とが面接触するのを防止している(図44参照)。   A plurality of upper mounting holes 206 are formed in the front surface portion 202b of the upper base member 202. The upper mounting holes 206 are formed in a long hole shape spaced apart in the left-right direction and extending in the vertical direction (FIGS. 36 and 45). Or refer to FIG. 46). Here, the upper base member 202 of the embodiment has three upper mounting holes 206 extending in parallel with each other, and is symmetrical with respect to the upper mounting hole 206 located at the center of the front surface 202b. The upper mounting holes 206 and 206 located on the sides of the front surface 202b are arranged in a simple positional relationship. Each upper mounting hole 206 is formed so as to penetrate the upper base member 202 back and forth. The upper base member 202 is provided with upper abutment ribs 205 that are formed so as to project vertically from the left and right upper mounting holes 206 on the rear surface of the front surface 202b (see FIG. 46). ). The upper abutment ribs 205 and 205 spaced apart from each other on the upper base member 202 are vertically moved along the rear surface of the front surface portion 202b by holding upper mounting shafts, which will be described later, slidable in the upper mounting holes 206 and 206. The reciprocating upper movable body 220 is restricted from moving forward, and the upper base member 202 and the upper movable body 220 are prevented from making surface contact (see FIG. 44).

図36または図46に示すように、前記上部ベース部材202の前面部202bは、左右の側部に位置する上部取付孔部206,206の間に、前後に貫通形成された歯車開口207を有している。歯車開口207は、上部駆動機構の後述する上部従動歯車(従動歯車)に合わせて開設される。なお、中央の上部取付孔部206は、歯車開口207の下側に配置されている。また上部ベース部材202の前面部202bには、左側の上部取付孔部206と左側部の後面部202aとの間に、上下に長手が延在する長孔形状で上部検出片通孔(検出片通孔)208が前後に貫通形成されている。なお、上部検出片通孔208は、上部取付孔部206と平行に形成されると共に、上下寸法が上部取付孔部206の上下寸法と略同一に設定される。   As shown in FIG. 36 or FIG. 46, the front surface portion 202b of the upper base member 202 has a gear opening 207 penetrating in the front-rear direction between upper mounting holes 206, 206 located on the left and right side portions. is doing. The gear opening 207 is opened in accordance with an upper driven gear (driven gear) described later of the upper drive mechanism. The central upper mounting hole 206 is disposed below the gear opening 207. Further, the upper base member 202 has a front surface portion 202b having a long hole extending vertically between the left upper mounting hole 206 and the rear surface portion 202a on the left side. A through hole 208 is formed through the front and rear. The upper detection piece through-hole 208 is formed in parallel with the upper attachment hole 206 and the vertical dimension is set to be substantially the same as the vertical dimension of the upper attachment hole 206.

(上部可動体)
前記上部可動体220は、透明な樹脂に光を反射する模様を施した板状部材であって(図47参照)、上部ベース部材202の後側に前面部202bと裏ユニット30との間に画成される空間に収容されるようになっている(図34または図44参照)。上部可動体220の前面には、該上部可動体220の長手に沿う方向に離間して凹状の上部取付軸受部222が複数設けられている。上部取付軸受部222は、上部ベース部材202の3ヶ所の上部取付孔部206に対応して3ヶ所に設けられると共に、これら上部取付軸受部222は、3ヶ所の上部取付孔部206に対応する位置関係で上部可動体220に配置されている。なお、3ヶ所の上部取付軸受部222は、上部可動体220の上縁部に形成されている。また、上部可動体220は、上部左縁の前面に前側に突出形成された上部検出片(検出片)224を備え(図42(b)、図44または図47参照)、上部可動体220を上部ベース部材202に取り付けた際に、上部検出片224が上部検出片通孔208に挿入されて、上部検出片224の前端部が前面部202bの前側に臨むようになっている。
(Upper movable body)
The upper movable body 220 is a plate-like member having a pattern reflecting light on a transparent resin (see FIG. 47), and between the front surface portion 202b and the back unit 30 on the rear side of the upper base member 202. The space is defined (see FIG. 34 or 44). A plurality of concave upper mounting bearing portions 222 are provided on the front surface of the upper movable body 220 so as to be spaced apart in a direction along the length of the upper movable body 220. The upper mounting bearing portions 222 are provided at three positions corresponding to the three upper mounting hole portions 206 of the upper base member 202, and these upper mounting bearing portions 222 correspond to the three upper mounting hole portions 206. The upper movable body 220 is disposed in a positional relationship. Note that the three upper mounting bearing portions 222 are formed on the upper edge portion of the upper movable body 220. Further, the upper movable body 220 includes an upper detection piece (detection piece) 224 that protrudes forward from the front surface of the upper left edge (see FIG. 42 (b), FIG. 44 or FIG. 47). When attached to the upper base member 202, the upper detection piece 224 is inserted into the upper detection piece through-hole 208 so that the front end of the upper detection piece 224 faces the front side of the front surface portion 202b.

前記上部可動体220は、上部ベース部202の後側に大部分が重なって上部ベース部材202の後側に隠れる位置(以下、上位置という。)と(図39(a)、図40(a)、図41(a)、図42(a)参照)、この上位置から下方に変位して上部ベース部材202(上部内周装飾部50)の下縁から表示部20bに大部分が突出した位置(以下、下突出位置という。)との間で(図39(b)、図40(b)、図41(b)、図42(b)参照)、上部駆動機構により往復動される。なお、上部可動体220の上位置が、該上部可動体220の待機位置となる。また、上部可動体220は、前面部202bと裏ユニット30との間に画成される可動体収容空間に収容される(図34または図44参照)。   The upper movable body 220 overlaps with the rear side of the upper base portion 202 and overlaps with the rear side of the upper base member 202 (hereinafter referred to as the upper position) (FIGS. 39A and 40A). ), FIG. 41 (a), FIG. 42 (a)), it is displaced downward from this upper position, and most of the upper base member 202 (upper inner peripheral decorative portion 50) protrudes from the lower edge to the display portion 20b. The position is reciprocated by the upper drive mechanism (refer to FIG. 39 (b), FIG. 40 (b), FIG. 41 (b), and FIG. 42 (b)). Note that the upper position of the upper movable body 220 is the standby position of the upper movable body 220. The upper movable body 220 is housed in a movable body housing space defined between the front surface portion 202b and the back unit 30 (see FIG. 34 or FIG. 44).

(上部駆動機構)
前記上部駆動機構は、駆動手段としての上部モータ(モータ)230と、この上部モータ230の出力軸に固定された上部駆動歯車(駆動歯車)232と、この上部駆動歯車232の回転につれて回転する複数の上部従動歯車(従動歯車)234と、この上部従動歯車234に設けられた上部連繋軸236と、上部可動体220に連結されると共に上部連繋軸236の回転変位につれて往復動するスライドベース238とから構成される(図39〜図46参照)。図42に示すように、上部モータ230は、上部ベース部材202における後面部202aの後面に出力軸を前側に向けて取り付けられ、上部ベース部材202の上縁部に延在する後面部202の左右方向中央部に配置されている。上部駆動歯車232は、板状の平歯車であって、後面部202aの前側に突出する出力軸に固定されて、上部ベース部材202の前側において後面部202aと前面部202bとの段差により画成される上部機構収容空間に配置される(図45参照)。
(Upper drive mechanism)
The upper drive mechanism includes an upper motor (motor) 230 as drive means, an upper drive gear (drive gear) 232 fixed to the output shaft of the upper motor 230, and a plurality of members that rotate as the upper drive gear 232 rotates. An upper driven gear (driven gear) 234, an upper connecting shaft 236 provided on the upper driven gear 234, a slide base 238 connected to the upper movable body 220 and reciprocating as the upper connecting shaft 236 rotates. (See FIGS. 39 to 46). As shown in FIG. 42, the upper motor 230 is attached to the rear surface of the rear surface portion 202 a of the upper base member 202 with the output shaft facing forward, and the left and right sides of the rear surface portion 202 extending to the upper edge portion of the upper base member 202. It is arranged in the center of the direction. The upper drive gear 232 is a plate-like spur gear, and is fixed to an output shaft protruding to the front side of the rear surface portion 202a. The upper drive gear 232 is defined by a step between the rear surface portion 202a and the front surface portion 202b on the front side of the upper base member 202. (See FIG. 45).

前記上部従動歯車234は、板状の平歯車であって、前後方向に回転軸を延在させて上部ベース部材202の後面部202aの前面に対して回転自在に軸支されている(図46参照)。なお、上部従動歯車234の回転軸は、上部ベース部材202に圧入して取り付けられている。ここで、上部従動歯車234は、前面部202bに開設された歯車開口207の後側に重なるように、上部ベース部材202の上縁部をなす後面部202aから下方に延出した部位に支持され、歯車開口207に整合して前記上部機構収容空間に収容されるようになっている(図45および図46参照)。すなわち、上部従動歯車234を歯車開口207に収容して、上部ベース部材202の板厚分のスペースを有効利用することで、前後方向にコンパクトになっている。また、複数(実施例では2つ)の上部従動歯車234は、外径が同一であって、上部駆動歯車232の外径より大きいもの(実施例)または同一径のものが採用される。2つの上部従動歯車234は、上部駆動歯車232を挟んで左右対称な関係で配置されており、板面を遊技盤面に沿わせて左右に並設して2つの上部従動歯車234の回転軸が左右方向に一直線上に並ぶようになっている(図41参照)。そして、2つの上部従動歯車234は、上部駆動歯車234にかみ合って、上部駆動歯車232により回転されるよう構成される(図45参照)。なお、2つの上部従動歯車234の回転方向は同一になっている。実施例では、左右外側の上部取付孔部206,206の間に2つの上部従動歯車234,234が配置されると共に、2つの上部従動歯車234,234の間であって上部駆動歯車232の下側に中央の上部取付孔部206が配置されている。   The upper driven gear 234 is a plate-like spur gear, and is rotatably supported with respect to the front surface of the rear surface portion 202a of the upper base member 202 by extending a rotating shaft in the front-rear direction (FIG. 46). reference). The rotating shaft of the upper driven gear 234 is attached by being press-fitted into the upper base member 202. Here, the upper driven gear 234 is supported by a portion extending downward from the rear surface portion 202a forming the upper edge portion of the upper base member 202 so as to overlap the rear side of the gear opening 207 formed in the front surface portion 202b. The upper mechanism accommodation space is accommodated in alignment with the gear opening 207 (see FIGS. 45 and 46). That is, the upper driven gear 234 is accommodated in the gear opening 207, and the space corresponding to the plate thickness of the upper base member 202 is effectively used, so that it is compact in the front-rear direction. The plurality (two in the embodiment) of the upper driven gears 234 have the same outer diameter and are larger than those of the upper drive gear 232 (the embodiment) or those having the same diameter. The two upper driven gears 234 are arranged in a bilaterally symmetrical relationship with the upper drive gear 232 interposed therebetween, and the plate surfaces are arranged side by side along the game board surface so that the rotation shafts of the two upper driven gears 234 are aligned. They are arranged in a straight line in the left-right direction (see FIG. 41). The two upper driven gears 234 mesh with the upper drive gear 234 and are configured to be rotated by the upper drive gear 232 (see FIG. 45). Note that the rotation directions of the two upper driven gears 234 are the same. In the embodiment, two upper driven gears 234 and 234 are disposed between the left and right upper mounting holes 206 and 206, and between the two upper driven gears 234 and 234 and below the upper drive gear 232. A central upper mounting hole 206 is disposed on the side.

前記2つの上部従動歯車234には、スライドベース238の後述する上部連繋孔部240に挿入される上部連繋軸(連繋軸)236が夫々設けられている。各上部連繋軸236は、上部従動歯車234の回転中心から半径方向外側に偏倚した位置に配置されて、該上部従動歯車234の前面から前側に突出するよう形成される。上部駆動機構では、対をなす上部連繋軸236,236の位相が同じになるよう設定されており、対をなす上部連繋軸236,236が、上部駆動歯車232の回転につれて対応の上部従動歯車234の回転中心に対して互いに同じ位置を同期して変位するよう構成される。   The two upper driven gears 234 are respectively provided with upper connecting shafts (connecting shafts) 236 inserted into upper connecting hole portions 240 described later of the slide base 238. Each upper connecting shaft 236 is disposed at a position biased radially outward from the rotation center of the upper driven gear 234 and is formed to protrude forward from the front surface of the upper driven gear 234. In the upper drive mechanism, the phases of the upper connecting shafts 236 and 236 forming a pair are set to be the same, and the upper connecting shafts 236 and 236 forming a pair correspond to the corresponding upper driven gear 234 as the upper drive gear 232 rotates. The same position is displaced synchronously with respect to the rotation center of each other.

前記上部ベース部材202において、上部モータ230の出力軸と上部従動歯車234とは、出力軸が上部駆動歯車232にかみ合う上部従動歯車234の上下幅の範囲に対応する部位に少なくとも位置するよう配置される(図39(b)参照)。実施例では、上部従動歯車234の回転中心から上側(上部可動体220の上位置から下突出位置に向かう方向の反対側)において、上部駆動歯車232にかみ合う上部従動歯車234における上下の半径範囲に対応して、上部モータ230の出力軸を位置させて、この出力軸に固定される上部駆動歯車232を上部従動歯車234より小径に設定している。これにより、上部駆動機構では、上部駆動歯車232を挟んで左右に並ぶ2つの上部従動歯車234,234において隣り合う四半円のなす隙間に上部駆動歯車232の一部が収まって、上部ベース部材202において上部駆動歯車232および上部従動歯車234の設置に要する上下スペースを少なくでき、上部駆動機構の上下寸法をコンパクトにできる。   In the upper base member 202, the output shaft of the upper motor 230 and the upper driven gear 234 are disposed so as to be positioned at least in a portion corresponding to the range of the vertical width of the upper driven gear 234 where the output shaft meshes with the upper drive gear 232. (See FIG. 39 (b)). In the embodiment, on the upper side from the rotation center of the upper driven gear 234 (on the side opposite to the direction from the upper position of the upper movable body 220 toward the lower protruding position), the upper and lower radial ranges of the upper driven gear 234 that mesh with the upper drive gear 232 are set. Correspondingly, the output shaft of the upper motor 230 is positioned, and the upper drive gear 232 fixed to the output shaft is set to have a smaller diameter than the upper driven gear 234. Accordingly, in the upper drive mechanism, a part of the upper drive gear 232 is accommodated in a gap formed by the adjacent quarter circles in the two upper driven gears 234 and 234 arranged on the left and right sides with the upper drive gear 232 interposed therebetween, and the upper base member 202 The vertical space required for installing the upper drive gear 232 and the upper driven gear 234 can be reduced, and the vertical dimension of the upper drive mechanism can be made compact.

図39または図40に示すように、前記スライドベース238は、上部ベース部材202の前側にスライド可能に設けられる細長い板状部材であって、長手に沿う方向に離間して3ヶ所の上部取付孔部206に対応する上部取付軸(取付軸)242が3つ設けられている。各上部取付軸242は、スライドベース238の後面に後側に向けて突出形成され、上部取付軸242は、スライドベース238の左右の側部に夫々配置されると共に、中央部下部に配置されている。なお、各上部取付軸242の外径は、上部取付孔部206の短手寸法と略同一寸法に設定される。また上部可動体220には、左右側部に離間配置した上部取付軸242,242の間に位置して該取付軸242,242の離間方向である左右に離間して、一対の上部連繋孔部240,240が開設されている。各上部連繋孔部240は、左右方向に長手が延在する長孔形状に形成されいる。スライドベース238は、上部取付軸242を上部ベース部材202の前側から対応する上部取付孔部206に挿入し、後端を上部可動体220の上部取付軸受部222に収容して位置決めして、上部取付軸242を介して上部可動体220に連結される。   As shown in FIG. 39 or FIG. 40, the slide base 238 is an elongated plate-like member that is slidably provided on the front side of the upper base member 202, and is spaced apart in the direction along the longitudinal direction at three upper mounting holes. Three upper mounting shafts (mounting shafts) 242 corresponding to the portion 206 are provided. Each upper mounting shaft 242 is formed to protrude rearward on the rear surface of the slide base 238, and the upper mounting shaft 242 is disposed on each of the left and right sides of the slide base 238 and disposed at the lower portion of the center portion. Yes. The outer diameter of each upper mounting shaft 242 is set to be approximately the same as the short dimension of the upper mounting hole 206. The upper movable body 220 is positioned between the upper mounting shafts 242 and 242 that are spaced apart on the left and right sides, and is spaced apart in the left and right directions in the direction in which the mounting shafts 242 and 242 are separated. 240,240 are established. Each upper connecting hole portion 240 is formed in a long hole shape whose length extends in the left-right direction. The slide base 238 has the upper mounting shaft 242 inserted into the corresponding upper mounting hole 206 from the front side of the upper base member 202, the rear end is received and positioned in the upper mounting bearing portion 222 of the upper movable body 220, It is connected to the upper movable body 220 via the mounting shaft 242.

スライドベース238は、各上部取付軸242が対応の上部取付孔部206に保持されて、上部ベース部材202の長手辺に合わせて長手辺を左右方向に延在して、上部ベース部材202の前側に上部取付孔部206の長手に沿う方向である上下にスライド可能に取り付けられる。また、スライドベース238は、左右の上部連繋孔部240,240に上部連繋軸236を夫々挿入した状態で取り付けられ、対をなす上部連繋軸236,236が対応の上部連繋孔部240,240の長手辺に当接しつつ同期して回転変位することで、水平状態が維持されたまま上下方向に直線的に往復動するようになっている(図39または図40参照)。そして、上部可動体220は、スライドベース238によって上部ベース部材202の後側で保持されて、スライドベース238のスライド変位につれて上下に往復動するようになっている。なお、各上部連繋軸236の外径は、上部連繋孔部240の短手寸法とが略同一寸法に設定される。なお、実施例では、左右の上部連繋軸236,236の位相を合わせる構成であるが、左右の上部連繋軸236,236の位相をずらすように構成することで、上部可動体220を一方の側部と他方の側部とでずらして変位させることができ、上部可動体220の各側部が交互に上下するような動作態様とすることも可能である。   In the slide base 238, each upper mounting shaft 242 is held in the corresponding upper mounting hole 206, and the longitudinal side extends in the left-right direction in accordance with the longitudinal side of the upper base member 202. The upper mounting hole 206 is attached to be slidable up and down, which is the direction along the length of the upper mounting hole 206. The slide base 238 is attached to the left and right upper connecting holes 240 and 240 with the upper connecting shafts 236 inserted, and the upper connecting shafts 236 and 236 forming a pair of the upper connecting holes 240 and 240 correspond to the corresponding upper connecting holes 240 and 240. By rotating and displacing synchronously while abutting on the long sides, the linearly reciprocating motion is maintained while maintaining the horizontal state (see FIG. 39 or FIG. 40). The upper movable body 220 is held on the rear side of the upper base member 202 by the slide base 238 and reciprocates up and down as the slide base 238 slides. The outer diameter of each upper connecting shaft 236 is set to be approximately the same as the short dimension of the upper connecting hole 240. In the embodiment, the phases of the left and right upper connecting shafts 236 and 236 are matched. However, the upper movable body 220 is arranged on one side by shifting the phases of the left and right upper connecting shafts 236 and 236. It is also possible to adopt an operation mode in which each side portion of the upper movable body 220 moves up and down alternately.

前記上部連繋孔部240は、短手寸法(短手に沿う方向の寸法)が上部連繋軸236の外径と一致すると共に、長手寸法(長手に沿う方向の寸法)が上部従動歯車234の回転に伴う上部連繋軸236の回転変位経路の直径以上に形成される(図39参照)。実施例では、上部連繋軸236の直径分以下の余裕寸法をとって上部連繋孔部240の長手寸法が設定されている。また、上部取付孔部206は、長手寸法が上部従動歯車234の回転に伴う上部連繋軸236の回転変位経路の直径以上に形成されている(図39(b)参照)。すなわち、上部取付孔部206の長手寸法により規定される上部可動体220(上部取付軸242)の変位許容範囲は、上部連繋軸236の回転変位経路の直径以上になるよう設定される。実施例では、上部可動体220の変位許容範囲を上部連繋軸236の回転変位経路の直径と同一に設定して、上部連繋軸236の最上点で上部取付軸242が上部取付孔部206の開口縁上縁に当接し(図39(a)参照)、上部連繋軸236の最下点で上部取付軸242が上部取付孔部206の開口縁下縁に当接するようになっている(図39(b)参照)。   The upper connecting hole 240 has a short dimension (a dimension in the direction along the short side) that matches the outer diameter of the upper connecting shaft 236, and a long dimension (a dimension in the direction along the long side) of the upper driven gear 234. It is formed to be larger than the diameter of the rotational displacement path of the upper connecting shaft 236 (see FIG. 39). In the embodiment, the longitudinal dimension of the upper connecting hole 240 is set with a margin dimension equal to or smaller than the diameter of the upper connecting shaft 236. The upper mounting hole 206 has a longitudinal dimension equal to or larger than the diameter of the rotational displacement path of the upper connecting shaft 236 accompanying the rotation of the upper driven gear 234 (see FIG. 39B). That is, the allowable displacement range of the upper movable body 220 (upper mounting shaft 242) defined by the longitudinal dimension of the upper mounting hole 206 is set to be equal to or larger than the diameter of the rotational displacement path of the upper connecting shaft 236. In the embodiment, the allowable displacement range of the upper movable body 220 is set to be the same as the diameter of the rotational displacement path of the upper connecting shaft 236, and the upper mounting shaft 242 opens the upper mounting hole 206 at the uppermost point of the upper connecting shaft 236. The upper mounting shaft 242 contacts the upper edge of the upper mounting hole 206 at the lowest point of the upper connecting shaft 236 (see FIG. 39A). (See (b)).

なお実施例では、上部従動歯車234を2つ組み合わせる構成であるが、2つ以上であれば例えば3つ以上でもよい。また複数の上部従動歯車234を、上部駆動歯車232を挟んで対称な位置関係で配置するのが好ましいが、上部駆動歯車232を基準として何れかの側部のみに上部従動歯車234を配置しても、各側部の配置数を変えてもよい。この場合、上部連繋軸236は、左右方向に最も離間した外側に位置する上部従動歯車234,234に夫々設けるとよい。   In the embodiment, the two upper driven gears 234 are combined. However, if the number is two or more, for example, three or more may be used. In addition, it is preferable to arrange a plurality of upper driven gears 234 in a symmetrical positional relationship with the upper drive gear 232 interposed therebetween. Alternatively, the number of each side portion may be changed. In this case, the upper connecting shaft 236 may be provided on each of the upper driven gears 234 and 234 located on the outermost side that is the most separated in the left-right direction.

前記上部駆動機構による上部可動体220の動作について説明する。上部可動体220が上位置で待機している場合に、左右の上部連繋軸236,236は、上部従動歯車234の最上点に位置すると共に、対応の上部連繋孔部240の中央部に位置している(図39(a)、図40(a)参照)。前記上部モータ230が駆動すると、上部駆動歯車232が回転し、これにつれて上部従動歯車234が回転し、左右の上部連繋軸236,236が、同じ方向に同期して回転変位する。この際、上部連繋軸236は、左右方向に延在する上部連繋孔部240の長手辺に沿って左右方向の変位が許容される一方、上部連繋孔部240の下側開口縁に係合することで、左右の上部連繋軸236,236の下方変位につれてスライドベース238を介して上部可動体220の左右方向の姿勢を維持したまま押し下げる。左右の上部連繋軸236,236が、上部従動歯車234において右端または左端にあって対応の上部連繋孔部240の何れか一方の側端部に位置した際に、上部可動体220が上位置と下突出位置との中間に位置している。   The operation of the upper movable body 220 by the upper drive mechanism will be described. When the upper movable body 220 stands by at the upper position, the left and right upper connecting shafts 236 and 236 are positioned at the uppermost point of the upper driven gear 234 and at the center of the corresponding upper connecting hole 240. (See FIGS. 39 (a) and 40 (a)). When the upper motor 230 is driven, the upper drive gear 232 is rotated, and the upper driven gear 234 is rotated accordingly, and the left and right upper connecting shafts 236 and 236 are rotationally displaced in synchronization with the same direction. At this time, the upper connecting shaft 236 is allowed to be displaced in the left-right direction along the longitudinal side of the upper connecting hole 240 extending in the left-right direction, and engages with the lower opening edge of the upper connecting hole 240. Thus, as the left and right upper connecting shafts 236 and 236 are displaced downward, the upper movable body 220 is pushed down through the slide base 238 while maintaining the horizontal posture. When the left and right upper connecting shafts 236, 236 are positioned at either one of the right end or the left end of the upper driven gear 234 and at the side end of the corresponding upper connecting hole 240, the upper movable body 220 is positioned at the upper position. Located in the middle of the lower protruding position.

左右の上部連繋軸236,236が上部従動歯車234の最下点に位置すると、上部可動体220が上部ベース部材202の下縁から最も突出した下突出位置に至る(図39(b)、図40(b)、図41(b)、図42(b)参照)。なお、上部連繋軸236の最下点において、該上部連繋軸236が上部連繋孔部240の中央部に位置している。そして、上部連繋軸236が最下点から更に回転すると、上部連繋軸236が左右方向に延在する上部連繋孔部240の長手辺に沿って左右方向の変位が許容される一方、上部連繋孔部240の上側開口縁に係合することで、左右の上部連繋軸236,236の下方変位につれてスライドベース238を介して上部可動体220の左右方向の姿勢を維持したまま押し上げる。上部駆動機構は、上部可動体220を例えば所定回数だけ上下に往復動した後、上部検出手段(原位置検出手段)226による上部検出片(検出片)227の検出によって、上部可動体220を上位置で停止する(図39(a)、図40(a)、図41(a)、図42(a)参照)。   When the left and right upper connecting shafts 236, 236 are positioned at the lowest point of the upper driven gear 234, the upper movable body 220 reaches the lower protruding position where it protrudes most from the lower edge of the upper base member 202 (FIG. 39B). 40 (b), FIG. 41 (b), and FIG. 42 (b)). The upper connecting shaft 236 is located at the center of the upper connecting hole 240 at the lowest point of the upper connecting shaft 236. When the upper connecting shaft 236 further rotates from the lowest point, the upper connecting shaft 236 is allowed to be displaced in the left-right direction along the longitudinal side of the upper connecting hole 240 extending in the left-right direction, while the upper connecting hole 236 By engaging with the upper opening edge of the portion 240, the upper movable body 220 is pushed up through the slide base 238 while maintaining the horizontal posture as the left and right upper connecting shafts 236, 236 are displaced downward. The upper drive mechanism moves the upper movable body 220 up and down by a predetermined number of times, for example, and then moves the upper movable body 220 upward by detecting the upper detection piece (detection piece) 227 by the upper detection means (original position detection means) 226. It stops at the position (see FIGS. 39 (a), 40 (a), 41 (a), and 42 (a)).

実施例では、上部モータ230を一方向に回転する構成であるが、該上部モータ230の制御負荷の増大を考慮しなければ、上部モータ230を正逆回転制御してもよい。   In the embodiment, the upper motor 230 is configured to rotate in one direction. However, if the increase in the control load of the upper motor 230 is not taken into consideration, the upper motor 230 may be controlled to rotate forward and backward.

(発光手段)
前記上部演出装置200は、発光演出を行う上部LED基板(発光体基板)244,244を備えている。図35または図37に示すように、上部ベース部材202には、前面における左右の両側に上部LED基板が設けられている。各上部LED基板244は、前面部202bの前面から上部ベース部材202の側部に設けられた後面部202aの前側を覆うように延在させて該後面部202aから離間して取り付けられ、前面部202bより後側に延在する後面部202aと該上部LED基板244との間に隙間が画成されるようになっている。左右の上部LED基板244,244は、上部内周装飾部50で覆われる領域の外側に配置され(図35または図37参照)、上部内周装飾部50の前面より後側に延在するよう配置されている(図38参照)。左右の上部LED基板244,244の前側には、上部光拡散部材245が該上部LED基板から夫々離間して設置され、この上部光拡散部材245と上部内周装飾部50の前面とが略同一平面上に延在している。なお、上部LED基板244および上部光拡散部材245は、上部内周装飾部50の前面側縁に設けられる別の上部LED基板246と共に、配置側の側部内周装飾部60によって前側が覆われるようになっている。上部LED基板244の後面には、該基板に電力を供給するための配線が接続される上部ソケット(ソケット)244aが、後側に開口するよう設けられている。
(Light emission means)
The upper effect device 200 includes upper LED substrates (light emitter substrates) 244 and 244 that perform a light emission effect. As shown in FIG. 35 or 37, the upper base member 202 is provided with upper LED substrates on both the left and right sides of the front surface. Each upper LED substrate 244 extends from the front surface of the front surface portion 202b so as to cover the front side of the rear surface portion 202a provided on the side portion of the upper base member 202, and is attached separately from the rear surface portion 202a. A gap is defined between the rear surface portion 202a extending to the rear side of 202b and the upper LED substrate 244. The left and right upper LED boards 244 and 244 are arranged outside the region covered with the upper inner periphery decorative portion 50 (see FIG. 35 or 37), and extend to the rear side from the front surface of the upper inner periphery decorative portion 50. (See FIG. 38). On the front side of the left and right upper LED substrates 244, 244, an upper light diffusing member 245 is installed separately from the upper LED substrate, and the upper light diffusing member 245 and the front surface of the upper inner periphery decorative portion 50 are substantially the same. It extends on a plane. The upper LED substrate 244 and the upper light diffusing member 245 are covered with the other inner LED substrate 246 provided on the front side edge of the upper inner periphery decoration portion 50 and the front side is covered by the side inner periphery decoration portion 60 on the arrangement side. It has become. On the rear surface of the upper LED substrate 244, an upper socket (socket) 244a to which wiring for supplying electric power to the substrate is connected is provided so as to open to the rear side.

図36に示すように、上部ベース部材202の両側部に形成された後面部202aは、前側に位置する上部LED基板244の上部ソケット244aに対応して、前後に貫通形成された上部ソケット開口(ソケット開口)210を備えている。上部演出装置200では、上部ソケット開口210を介して後側に臨む上部ソケット244aに配線が接続される。ここで、上部ソケット244aは、上部ソケット開口210に収容されて後面部202aの後面より突出しないようになっており、他の部材との干渉が回避される。これにより、上部演出装置200は、上部LED基板244の後側に放熱スペースを確保でき、上部ソケット開口210を介して上部ソケット244aに配線を容易に挿脱できる。また上部演出装置200は、後側に突出する上部モータ230および上部ソケット244aが、裏ユニット30における図柄表示装置17の設置領域から外れた位置に対応して位置するよう設けられている。   As shown in FIG. 36, the rear surface portions 202a formed on both sides of the upper base member 202 correspond to the upper sockets 244a of the upper LED substrate 244 located on the front side, and upper socket openings (see FIG. Socket opening) 210. In the top effect device 200, the wiring is connected to the upper socket 244a facing the rear side through the upper socket opening 210. Here, the upper socket 244a is accommodated in the upper socket opening 210 so as not to protrude from the rear surface of the rear surface portion 202a, and interference with other members is avoided. Accordingly, the top effect device 200 can secure a heat radiation space on the rear side of the upper LED substrate 244, and can easily insert / remove wiring into the upper socket 244a through the upper socket opening 210. In addition, the upper effect device 200 is provided so that the upper motor 230 and the upper socket 244a that protrude rearward are positioned corresponding to positions that are out of the installation area of the symbol display device 17 in the back unit 30.

そして、裏ユニット30には、上部モータ230および上部ソケット244aの後側に対応して、上部モータ230が挿通可能な上部モータ開口(開口)33と、上部ソケット244aにアクセス可能な上部ソケット開口(開口)34とが設けられている(図5または図8参照)。裏ユニット30には、上部モータ開口33の後側を覆って箱状の上部カバー部材(後面カバー)35が設けられ、上部カバー部材は、配線を保持可能な上部配線保持具(配線保持具)35aを備えている。なお、上部モータ開口33および上部ソケット開口34は、裏ユニット30の上面に形成された上部切欠部(切欠部)36と共に上部モータ230やLEDから発する熱を逃がす通路としても機能する。上部演出装置200は、後側に突出する上部モータ230が図柄表示装置17に干渉せず、裏ユニット30に上部ソケット開口210にアクセスするために開設された上部ソケット開口34を介して、図柄表示装置17に邪魔されずに配線を挿脱することができる。裏ユニット30の後面には、図柄表示装置17の設置領域の上外側で、上部モータ開口33の側方(右側)に中継基板82が設置されている(図8参照)。上部モータ230および上部ソケット244aに接続した配線は、上部配線保持具35aで図柄表示装置17に干渉しないように保持されて、中継基板82に接続されるようになっている。   The rear unit 30 has an upper motor opening (opening) 33 through which the upper motor 230 can be inserted and an upper socket opening (accessible to the upper socket 244a) corresponding to the rear side of the upper motor 230 and the upper socket 244a. An opening) 34 (see FIG. 5 or FIG. 8). The back unit 30 is provided with a box-shaped upper cover member (rear cover) 35 that covers the rear side of the upper motor opening 33, and the upper cover member is an upper wiring holder (wiring holder) that can hold wiring. 35a. The upper motor opening 33 and the upper socket opening 34 also function as a passage for releasing heat generated from the upper motor 230 and the LEDs together with the upper notch (notch) 36 formed on the upper surface of the back unit 30. In the upper effect device 200, the upper motor 230 protruding rearward does not interfere with the symbol display device 17, and the symbol display is performed via the upper socket opening 34 opened to access the upper socket opening 210 in the back unit 30. The wiring can be inserted and removed without being obstructed by the device 17. A relay board 82 is installed on the rear surface of the rear unit 30 on the upper and outer sides of the installation area of the symbol display device 17 and on the side (right side) of the upper motor opening 33 (see FIG. 8). The wiring connected to the upper motor 230 and the upper socket 244a is held by the upper wiring holder 35a so as not to interfere with the symbol display device 17, and is connected to the relay board 82.

前記上部演出装置200では、上部可動体220の位置検出のために上部検出手段(原位置検出手段)226を備えており、上部検出手段226は、左側の上部LED基板244の後面に設置されている(図44参照)。上部検出手段226は、上部LED基板244と後面部202aとの間を利用して設置され、上部ベース部材202に設けられた上部検出片通孔208の上部に形成された拡張部位に後端が収容されるよう構成される(図41(b)参照)。上部検出片通孔208は、上部可動体220の往復動に伴う上部検出片224の移動経路に対応して開設され、この上部検出片通孔208を介して上部検出片224が上部ベース部材202の前側に臨むようになっている。そして、実施例では、上部可動体220の上位置で、上部検出手段226が上部検出片224を検出するようになっている。上部検出手段226は、上部LED基板244から後側に突出するものの、上部ベース部材202における上部検出片通孔208の拡張部位に収容される構成であるので、上部ベース部材202の板厚分のスペースを有効利用して、上部検出手段226を設置するために要する前後のスペースを短縮することができる。   The upper effect device 200 includes an upper detection means (original position detection means) 226 for detecting the position of the upper movable body 220, and the upper detection means 226 is installed on the rear surface of the upper LED board 244 on the left side. (See FIG. 44). The upper detection means 226 is installed between the upper LED board 244 and the rear surface portion 202a, and a rear end is formed at an extended portion formed on the upper detection piece through hole 208 provided in the upper base member 202. It is comprised so that it may be accommodated (refer FIG.41 (b)). The upper detection piece through-hole 208 is opened corresponding to the movement path of the upper detection piece 224 accompanying the reciprocation of the upper movable body 220, and the upper detection piece 224 is connected to the upper base member 202 through the upper detection piece through-hole 208. It comes to face the front side of. In the embodiment, the upper detection unit 226 detects the upper detection piece 224 at the upper position of the upper movable body 220. The upper detection means 226 protrudes rearward from the upper LED board 244, but is configured to be accommodated in an extended portion of the upper detection piece through hole 208 in the upper base member 202. The space before and after required for installing the upper detection means 226 can be shortened using space effectively.

前記上部演出装置200は、上部モータ230を一方向に回転することで、上部従動歯車234の上部連繋軸236の回転変位がスライドベース238を介して上部可動体220の往復動に変換されるので、上部可動体220を往復動させるために上部モータ230を正逆回転する必要がなく、上部モータ230への負荷および制御負荷を軽減することができる。また、上部可動体220は、左右に長手が延在しているが、左右に離間して設けられた対をなす上部連繋軸236,236でスライドベース238を支持すると共に、スライドベース238が3ヶ所の上部取付軸242で上部可動体220を支持する構成であるから、上部可動体220をバランスよく支持でき1上部可動体220を大型化したり、上部可動体220の動作頻度や動作速度を増しても、上部可動体220をがたつきなく安定して動作することができる。また上部演出装置200は、上部LED基板244,246を備えているので、上部可動体220の動作演出と併せて、光による発光演出も行うことができる。そして上部演出装置200は、上部可動体220およびこれを動作させる機構が前後方向にコンパクトで、しかも上部可動体220および上部可動体220に上部モータ230から動力を伝達する伝達手段を上部ベース部材202に設けた空間に収容しているので、全体として前後方向に非常にコンパクトにできる。すなわち、上部演出装置200は、全体として前後方向にコンパクトであって、裏ユニット30の前側の狭いスペースに設置可能であり、上部可動体220を図柄表示装置17の表示面直前で動作することができるので、上部可動体220の動作演出と図柄表示装置17の表示演出との一体感を向上することができる。   Since the upper effect device 200 rotates the upper motor 230 in one direction, the rotational displacement of the upper connecting shaft 236 of the upper driven gear 234 is converted into the reciprocating motion of the upper movable body 220 via the slide base 238. In addition, it is not necessary to rotate the upper motor 230 forward and backward in order to reciprocate the upper movable body 220, and the load on the upper motor 230 and the control load can be reduced. The upper movable body 220 extends longitudinally from side to side, but supports the slide base 238 with a pair of upper connecting shafts 236 and 236 that are spaced apart from each other on the left and right, and the slide base 238 includes three slide bases 238. Since the upper movable body 220 is supported by the upper mounting shafts 242 in one place, the upper movable body 220 can be supported in a balanced manner. 1 The upper movable body 220 can be increased in size, and the operation frequency and the operation speed of the upper movable body 220 can be increased. However, the upper movable body 220 can operate stably without rattling. Further, since the upper effect device 200 includes the upper LED substrates 244 and 246, it is possible to perform a light emission effect by light together with the operation effect of the upper movable body 220. The upper stage production device 200 has a structure in which the upper movable body 220 and a mechanism for operating the upper movable body 220 are compact in the front-rear direction, and the upper base member 202 has transmission means for transmitting power from the upper motor 230 to the upper movable body 220 and the upper movable body 220. Since it is accommodated in the space provided in the main body, it can be made very compact in the front-rear direction as a whole. That is, the upper effect device 200 is compact in the front-rear direction as a whole, can be installed in a narrow space on the front side of the back unit 30, and can operate the upper movable body 220 immediately before the display surface of the symbol display device 17. Therefore, the sense of unity between the operation effect of the upper movable body 220 and the display effect of the symbol display device 17 can be improved.

前記上部演出装置200は、上部駆動歯車232および上部従動歯車234を上部ベース部材202の上部機構収容空間に配置すると共に、前後方向に重ねて配置せずに遊技盤面に沿って並べているので、上部可動体220に上部モータ230から動力を伝達する伝達手段が前後方向に大型化しない。また、上部LED基板244と上部ベース部材202における後面部202aとの間の隙間を利用して上部検出手段226を設けてあるので、上部検出手段226が前または後に突出することを回避できる。   The upper stage production device 200 arranges the upper drive gear 232 and the upper driven gear 234 in the upper mechanism housing space of the upper base member 202 and arranges them along the game board surface without overlapping in the front-rear direction. The transmission means for transmitting power from the upper motor 230 to the movable body 220 does not increase in size in the front-rear direction. Moreover, since the upper detection means 226 is provided using the gap between the upper LED substrate 244 and the rear surface portion 202a of the upper base member 202, it is possible to avoid the upper detection means 226 from protruding forward or backward.

なお、上部演出装置200は、上部ベース部材202に上部駆動機構、上部可動体220および上部内周装飾部50が取り付けられる構成であるので、上部ベース部材202を基準としてユニットとして取り扱い可能である。   In addition, since the upper stage production device 200 has a configuration in which the upper drive mechanism, the upper movable body 220, and the upper inner periphery decoration portion 50 are attached to the upper base member 202, it can be handled as a unit with the upper base member 202 as a reference.

(前部演出装置)
図9,図10,図34,図48〜図55に示すように、前記前部演出装置300は、枠状装飾体70に取り付けられる前部ベース部材(ベース部材)302と、この前部ベース部材302の前側に設けられ、複数の可動部340,342を有する前部可動体(可動体,第2の上部可動体)330と、前部ベース部材302の後側に設けられ、複数の可動部340,342を動作させる前部駆動機構(駆動機構)とから構成される。前部演出装置300は、上部演出装置200の前側に重ね合わせて設けられ、前部可動装置300の下縁後側から上部可動体220が表示部20bに対して出没するようになっている。
(Front production device)
As shown in FIGS. 9, 10, 34, 48 to 55, the front effect device 300 includes a front base member (base member) 302 attached to the frame-shaped decorative body 70, and the front base. A front movable body (movable body, second upper movable body) 330 having a plurality of movable portions 340 and 342 provided on the front side of the member 302 and a rear side of the front base member 302 are provided with a plurality of movable portions. It is comprised from the front part drive mechanism (drive mechanism) which operates the part 340,342. The front effect device 300 is provided so as to overlap the front side of the upper effect device 200, and the upper movable body 220 appears and disappears from the rear side of the lower edge of the front movable device 300 with respect to the display unit 20b.

図9に示すように、前記前部ベース部材302は、透明板22の装着口に合わせて枠状に形成された枠状装飾体70の内周上部から装着口に向けた下方に突出形成された設置部75に取り付けられている。前部ベース部材302の設置部位となる設置部75について簡単に説明すると、設置部75は、装着口に重なると共に上部演出装置200の前側に設けられており、表示部20bの上縁を画成する上辺前側に配置されている。また設置部75は、上側から下側に向かうにつれて後側に変位するよう形成され、該設置部75に設けられる前部演出装置300の前面が斜め下方に指向するようになっている(図34または図50参照)。設置部75は、枠状装飾体70の内周上部から下に向かうにつれて先細りになる略三角形状に形成され、前後に貫通する設置開口75aを備えている。なお、設置開口75aは、両側部を除いて設置部75の外形におおよそ合わせて開口するよう形成されている。   As shown in FIG. 9, the front base member 302 is formed so as to protrude downward from the inner peripheral upper portion of the frame-shaped decorative body 70 formed in a frame shape in accordance with the mounting opening of the transparent plate 22 toward the mounting opening. It is attached to the installation part 75. The installation part 75 that is the installation site of the front base member 302 will be briefly described. The installation part 75 overlaps the mounting opening and is provided on the front side of the upper effect device 200, and defines the upper edge of the display unit 20b. It is arranged on the front side of the upper side. The installation part 75 is formed so as to be displaced rearward from the upper side to the lower side, and the front surface of the front effect device 300 provided in the installation part 75 is directed obliquely downward (FIG. 34). Or refer to FIG. The installation part 75 is formed in a substantially triangular shape that tapers downward from the inner peripheral upper part of the frame-shaped decorative body 70, and includes an installation opening 75a penetrating in the front-rear direction. The installation opening 75a is formed so as to open approximately in accordance with the outer shape of the installation part 75 except for both sides.

(前部ベース部材)
図53または図54に示すように、前部べース部材302は、前部可動体330の後述する前部装飾不動部(装飾部)332が設置される板状部304と、この板状部304の後側に設けられ、前部駆動機構を収容する透明なケース体310とを備えている。板状部304は、設置部75の設置開口75aに整合するよう外形が形成された透明な部材であって、上部中央に前後に貫通形成されたレンズ開口305と、このレンズ開口305の下方における下部中央に位置して、前後に貫通形成された板状体軸開口306とを備えている(図53参照)。また板状部304の後面には、門形(下向きコ字状)の前部LED基板(発光体基板)308が、レンズ開口305の左右側部および上部に延在するよう取り付けられている。なお、板状体軸開口306は、上下に長手が延在する長孔形状である。
(Front base member)
As shown in FIG. 53 or FIG. 54, the front base member 302 includes a plate-like portion 304 on which a front decoration immovable portion (decoration portion) 332, which will be described later, of the front movable body 330 is installed. A transparent case body 310 that is provided on the rear side of the section 304 and accommodates the front drive mechanism. The plate-like portion 304 is a transparent member having an outer shape formed so as to be aligned with the installation opening 75a of the installation portion 75, and has a lens opening 305 penetrating in the front and rear in the center of the upper portion, and below the lens opening 305. It is provided with a plate-like body shaft opening 306 that is formed at the center of the lower part and penetrates the front and rear (see FIG. 53). Further, a gate-shaped (downward U-shaped) front LED substrate (light emitter substrate) 308 is attached to the rear surface of the plate-shaped portion 304 so as to extend to the left and right side portions and the upper portion of the lens opening 305. The plate-like body shaft opening 306 has a long hole shape whose longitudinal length extends vertically.

前記ケース体310は、後側に開口する箱状の前板部312と、この前板部312の周壁(壁)313に合わせて外形が形成され、前板部312の後側を塞ぐように該前板部312に取り付けられる後板部320とから構成される(図53または図54参照)。ケース体310は、板状部304の後面に取り付けられた前部LED基板308を挟んで板状体304の後面に前板部312を取り付けることで、全体として板状部304における左右方向の中央部分に固定される。   The case body 310 has a box-shaped front plate portion 312 that opens to the rear side, and an outer shape that matches the peripheral wall (wall) 313 of the front plate portion 312 so that the rear side of the front plate portion 312 is closed. The rear plate portion 320 is attached to the front plate portion 312 (see FIG. 53 or 54). The case body 310 has a front plate portion 312 attached to the rear surface of the plate-like body 304 with the front LED substrate 308 attached to the rear surface of the plate-like portion 304 interposed therebetween, and thus the center of the plate-like portion 304 in the left-right direction as a whole. Fixed to the part.

図49、図53または図54に示すように、前記前板部312は、前部駆動機構を構成する部材が設置される本体部分の後面外周縁に後側に延出するよう形成された周壁313と、本体部分の前面における上縁および左右側縁上部に前側に延出するよう形成された前出片314とを備えている。また前板部312の中央部には、長手が上下に延在する長孔形状の連結開口315が、上下に離間して2ヶ所に貫通形成されている。更に、前板部312の後面には、連結開口315を挟んで左右両側に前部保持片(保持片)316,316が後側に突出するよう形成されており、この左右平行に並設された2つの前部保持片316,316は、周壁313よりも延出寸法が小さく設定されている。   As shown in FIG. 49, FIG. 53 or FIG. 54, the front plate portion 312 is a peripheral wall formed to extend rearward to the outer peripheral edge of the rear surface of the main body portion on which the members constituting the front drive mechanism are installed. 313, and a leading piece 314 formed to extend forward on the upper edge and the upper left and right side edges on the front surface of the main body portion. Further, in the center portion of the front plate portion 312, a long hole-shaped connecting opening 315 extending vertically is formed so as to penetrate in two places apart from each other in the vertical direction. Further, on the rear surface of the front plate portion 312, front holding pieces (holding pieces) 316 and 316 are formed on both the left and right sides of the connection opening 315 so as to protrude rearward. The two front holding pieces 316 and 316 are set to have a smaller extension dimension than the peripheral wall 313.

前板部312は、前出片314で本体部分と板状部304との間に画成される隙間に、前出片314の内側に上縁および左右側縁を沿わせて前部LED基板308を収容し、この際、前部LED基板308の上部が前板部312の上部に位置し、前部LED基板308の左右の側部が左右に対向する前部保持片316の外側領域の前側に位置するようになっている。前板部312の右上部には、前部LED基板308の後面に開口を後側に向けて設置された複数の前部ソケット(ソケット)309が挿通される前部ソケット開口(ソケット開口)317が開設されている。実施例では、複数の前部ソケット309が前部LED基板308の後面右上部にまとめて設けられ、前部駆動機構の後述する前部ソレノイド346に接続される配線を接続する第1の前部ソケット309が、長手を上下に沿わせて最上部に配置され、前部LED基板308と外部とを接続する配線を接続する2つの第2の前部ソケット309,309が、長手を左右に延在させて第1の前部ソケット309の下側に上下に並べて配置されている(図49参照)。   The front plate portion 312 has a front LED board along the upper edge and the left and right side edges inside the front piece 314 in a gap defined between the main body portion and the plate-like portion 304 by the front piece 314. 308 in this case, the upper part of the front LED board 308 is located on the upper part of the front plate part 312, the left and right sides of the front LED board 308 are located in the outer region of the front holding piece 316 facing left and right. It is located on the front side. In the upper right part of the front plate portion 312, a front socket opening (socket opening) 317 through which a plurality of front sockets (sockets) 309 installed on the rear surface of the front LED board 308 with the openings facing rearward is inserted. Has been established. In the embodiment, a plurality of front sockets 309 are collectively provided on the upper right portion of the rear surface of the front LED board 308, and a first front portion for connecting wiring connected to a front solenoid 346 described later of the front drive mechanism is connected. A socket 309 is arranged at the uppermost part along the vertical direction, and two second front sockets 309 and 309 for connecting wirings for connecting the front LED board 308 and the outside extend in the horizontal direction. The first front socket 309 is arranged below the first front socket 309 (see FIG. 49).

図49に示すように、前記前板部312は、前部ソケット開口317を囲うように該前板部312の後面に設けられた前区画壁(区画壁)318を備えている。前区画壁318は、前部ソケット開口317を介して複数の前部ソケット309が前板部312の後側に臨む領域と、前板部312の後側において前部駆動機構を構成する部材が設置される領域とを区分している。前区画壁318は、本体部分からの延出寸法が周壁313と同じに設定される。実施例の前区画壁318は、上側の周壁313から第1の前部ソケット309に沿って上下に延在した後、右側の前部保持片316に向けて左右方向に延在し、右側の前部保持片316上部から中間部に亘って本体部分からの延出寸法を周壁313と同一とすることで、右側の前部保持片316の一部を前区画壁318の一部として共用している。また、前区画壁318は、右側の周壁313の中間部から右側の前部保持片316の中間部に亘って左右方向に延在するよう設けられている。   As shown in FIG. 49, the front plate portion 312 includes a front partition wall (partition wall) 318 provided on the rear surface of the front plate portion 312 so as to surround the front socket opening 317. The front partition wall 318 includes a region where a plurality of front sockets 309 face the rear side of the front plate portion 312 via the front socket opening 317, and members constituting the front drive mechanism on the rear side of the front plate portion 312. Separated from the area where it is installed. The front partition wall 318 is set to have the same extension dimension as the peripheral wall 313 from the main body portion. The front partition wall 318 of the embodiment extends vertically from the upper peripheral wall 313 along the first front socket 309, and then extends in the left-right direction toward the right front holding piece 316. By making the extension dimension from the main body portion the same as that of the peripheral wall 313 from the upper part to the middle part of the front holding piece 316, a part of the right front holding piece 316 is shared as a part of the front partition wall 318. ing. The front partition wall 318 is provided so as to extend in the left-right direction from the intermediate portion of the right peripheral wall 313 to the intermediate portion of the right front holding piece 316.

図53に示すように、前記後板部320は、本体部分の外周縁から前側に延出する後周壁(壁)321と、前板部の前区画壁318に合わせて設けられた後区画壁(区画壁)322とを備えている。後板部320は、前板部312の周壁313後端に後周壁321の前端を突き合わせると共に、前区画壁318の後端に後区画壁322の前端を突き合わせて前板部312に取り付けられ、前板部312と後板部320との間の空間が前後の区画壁318,322によって前部駆動機構の構成部材が配置される前部機構収容空間(機構収容空間)310aと前部ソケット309が臨むソケット空間310bとに画成される(図49参照)。すなわち、ケース体310では、右上部の領域がソケット空間310bとなる。また後板部320は、前部機構収容空間310aの上部が他の部位と比べて後側に突出するよう形成されて、当該突出部位の上面および下面に前部機構収容空間310aに連通する放熱孔323が左右に離間して複数設けられる(図53および図54参照)。更に、後板部320は、ソケット空間310bに対応する部位に該ソケット空間310bに連通するよう開設された前部配線開口(配線開口)324を有し(図53および図54参照)、この前部配線開口(324)を介して第2の前部ソケット309に接続する配線が外部から挿通される。後板部320は、前板部312の内側に周壁313より延出寸法が大きく設定された前板ボス319に対して、後板部320に凹設された後板受部325を整合して突き合わせて位置決めし、該後板部320の後側からネジ止めすることで互いに固定される。   As shown in FIG. 53, the rear plate portion 320 includes a rear partition wall (wall) 321 extending forward from the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion and a rear partition wall provided in accordance with the front partition wall 318 of the front plate portion. (Partition wall) 322. The rear plate portion 320 is attached to the front plate portion 312 by abutting the front end of the rear peripheral wall 321 with the rear end of the peripheral wall 313 of the front plate portion 312 and abutting the front end of the rear partition wall 322 with the rear end of the front partition wall 318. The space between the front plate portion 312 and the rear plate portion 320 is a front mechanism housing space (mechanism housing space) 310a and a front socket in which the constituent members of the front drive mechanism are arranged by the front and rear partition walls 318 and 322. It is defined in the socket space 310b facing 309 (see FIG. 49). That is, in the case body 310, the upper right region is the socket space 310b. In addition, the rear plate portion 320 is formed so that the upper portion of the front mechanism accommodation space 310a protrudes rearward compared to other portions, and the heat dissipation communicates with the front mechanism accommodation space 310a on the upper and lower surfaces of the protrusion portions. A plurality of holes 323 are provided apart from each other on the left and right (see FIGS. 53 and 54). Further, the rear plate portion 320 has a front wiring opening (wiring opening) 324 opened to communicate with the socket space 310b at a portion corresponding to the socket space 310b (see FIGS. 53 and 54). A wiring connected to the second front socket 309 through the partial wiring opening (324) is inserted from the outside. The rear plate portion 320 aligns the rear plate receiving portion 325 that is recessed in the rear plate portion 320 with respect to the front plate boss 319 whose extension dimension is set larger than the peripheral wall 313 inside the front plate portion 312. They are fixed to each other by being positioned and affixed with screws from the rear side of the rear plate portion 320.

(前部可動体)
図48,図50,図51および図52に示すように、前部可動体330は、板状部304の前面に設けられた固定部分である装飾不動部(装飾部)332と、この装飾不動部332の前側を往復動する第1可動部340と、装飾不動部332から一部が突出するよう設けられて揺動する第2可動部342とから構成され、実施例では全体として仮面の如き意匠形状となっている。実施例の前部可動体330は、1基の第1可動部340と2基の第2可動部342,342とを備えている。
(Front movable body)
As shown in FIGS. 48, 50, 51, and 52, the front movable body 330 includes a decorative non-moving portion (decorating portion) 332 that is a fixed portion provided on the front surface of the plate-like portion 304, and the decorative non-moving portion. The first movable portion 340 that reciprocates on the front side of the portion 332, and the second movable portion 342 that is provided so as to partially protrude from the decorative immovable portion 332 and swings. In the embodiment, as a whole, such as a mask. It has a design shape. The front movable body 330 of the embodiment includes one first movable portion 340 and two second movable portions 342 and 342.

装飾不動部332は、板状部304の前側に該板状部304から間隔をあけて設けられ、前側に延在する前延部334と、この前延部334より後側に延在する後延部336とを備えており、装飾不動部332は前後に段形状になっている(図50参照)。前延部334は、板状部304の下部中央に設置され、板状部304の板状部軸開口306に整合する前延部軸開口335を中央部に備えている。また前延部334の両側部には、板状部304との間に左右方向に開口する間隙が画成され(図51参照)、前延部334の上部には、該前延部334の上側に位置する後延部336との間に上方に開口する間隙が画成されている(図50参照)。なお、実施例の前延部334は、下側が板状部304の前面に一体的に突出形成されて光拡散処理をした半透明な部分で構成されると共に、上側が半透明の有色部材で構成される。また前延部334の上下の中間部分は、所定部分が光拡散処理を施した光透過性の有色部材(特に区別する場合は前延部光透過片334aと云い、前部可動体のなすの仮面において目の部分に該当する。)で構成されるものの、大部分が光を透過しない有色部材で構成される(図48参照)。   The decorative non-moving portion 332 is provided on the front side of the plate-like portion 304 with a space from the plate-like portion 304, and the front extension portion 334 that extends to the front side and the rear extension portion 334 that extends to the rear side. The decorative non-moving portion 332 has a step shape in the front and rear directions (see FIG. 50). The forward extension 334 is installed at the lower center of the plate-like portion 304, and has a forward extension shaft opening 335 aligned with the plate-like portion shaft opening 306 of the plate-like portion 304 at the center. Further, a gap opening in the left-right direction is defined between both sides of the front extension part 334 and the plate-like part 304 (see FIG. 51), and the front extension part 334 has an upper part on the front extension part 334. A gap that opens upward is defined between the rear extension 336 located on the upper side (see FIG. 50). The forward extension 334 of the embodiment is a semi-transparent portion whose lower side is integrally projected and formed on the front surface of the plate-like portion 304 and subjected to light diffusion treatment, and the upper side is a semi-transparent colored member. Composed. In addition, the upper and lower intermediate portions of the front extension 334 are light-transmitting colored members whose predetermined portions have been subjected to light diffusion processing (in particular, the front extension light transmission piece 334a is referred to as the front extension movable body. Most of the masks are made of colored members that do not transmit light (see FIG. 48).

図48に示すように、前記後延部336は、前板部312の上側に位置して板状部304のレンズ開口305を覆うよう板状部304に取り付けられたレンズ部分337と、前板部312の上部側縁から左右方向に延在するよう板状部304の前面に取り付けられた羽根状部分338とを有している。レンズ部分337は、複数の光拡散処理が施された半透明の有色部材を前後に重ね合せて構成され、レンズ部分337の上部および左右側部の後側に位置する前部LED基板308から照射された光を拡散するようになっている。また羽根状部分338は、有色不透明な部材と有色半透明な部材を組み合わせて構成される。このように、前部演出装置300では、透明な板状部304の後側に前部LED基板308が設けられ、またケース体310における透明な前板部312の後側に前部駆動機構が設けられるが、半透明または不透明な部材からなる装飾不動部332で前部LED基板308および前部駆動機構の前側が覆われているので、遊技者から前部LED基板308および前部駆動機構が見えてしまう不都合はない。   As shown in FIG. 48, the rear extension 336 includes a lens portion 337 that is positioned above the front plate portion 312 and is attached to the plate portion 304 so as to cover the lens opening 305 of the plate portion 304, and the front plate. And a blade-like portion 338 attached to the front surface of the plate-like portion 304 so as to extend from the upper side edge of the portion 312 in the left-right direction. The lens portion 337 is configured by overlapping a plurality of light diffusing treatment translucent colored members on the front and back, and is irradiated from the front LED substrate 308 located on the upper portion of the lens portion 337 and on the rear side of the left and right side portions. The diffused light is diffused. The blade-like portion 338 is configured by combining a colored opaque member and a colored translucent member. As described above, in the front effect device 300, the front LED board 308 is provided on the rear side of the transparent plate-shaped portion 304, and the front drive mechanism is provided on the rear side of the transparent front plate portion 312 in the case body 310. Although the front LED board 308 and the front side of the front drive mechanism are covered with a decoration immovable portion 332 made of a translucent or opaque member, the player can obtain the front LED board 308 and the front drive mechanism from the player. There is no inconvenience that you can see.

前記第1可動部340は、不透明な有色部材で形成された左右方向に長手が延在する部材であって、後面中央部に連結棒341が突出形成されている(図54参照)。第1可動部340は、板状部軸開口306および前延部軸開口335に挿通した連結棒341の後端が前部駆動機構に保持されて装飾不動部332における前延部334の前側に配置され、前部駆動機構によって板状部軸開口306および前延部軸開口335の長手辺に沿って下方位置と上方位置との間で上下に往復動するようになっている(図52参照)。ここで、第1可動部340は、待機位置となる下方位置において前延部334の中間部分を覆って前記前延部光透過片334aを隠し、上方位置において前延部334の上側にずれて前延部光透過片334aを露出させる(図48参照)。   The first movable portion 340 is a member formed of an opaque colored member and extending in the left-right direction, and has a connecting rod 341 protruding at the center of the rear surface (see FIG. 54). The first movable part 340 has a rear end of the connecting rod 341 inserted through the plate-like part shaft opening 306 and the front extension part shaft opening 335 and is held by the front part drive mechanism so It is arranged and reciprocates up and down between the lower position and the upper position along the longitudinal sides of the plate-like part shaft opening 306 and the front extension part shaft opening 335 by the front drive mechanism (see FIG. 52). ). Here, the first movable portion 340 covers the intermediate portion of the front extension 334 at the lower position serving as the standby position and hides the front extension light transmitting piece 334a, and is shifted to the upper side of the front extension 334 at the upper position. The front extension light transmitting piece 334a is exposed (see FIG. 48).

前記2基の第2可動部342,342は、互いに左右対称な構成の部材であって、前延部軸開口335を挟んで左右対称に配置されている。各第2可動部342は、有色半透明の略L字状の部材であって、屈曲部分が前延部334の後側に配置されて、この屈曲部分から分岐して遊技盤面に沿って互いに異なる2方向に延出する延出片343が前延部334の上部および配置側の側部から延出するよう構成される(図52参照)。実施例では、右側の第2可動部342であれば、2本の延出片343,343が上方と右側方とに延在するよう配置され、左側の第2可動部342であれば、2本の延出片343,343が上方と左側方に延在するよう配置される。すなわち、右側の第2可動部342であれば、前延部334の上縁と後延部336との間の間隙から上延出片343がレンズ部分337の前側に突出し、前延部334の右縁と板状部304との間の間隙から横延出片343が右側の羽根状部分338の下側に位置して板状部304の前側に突出するようになっている。また左側の第2可動部342であれば、前延部334の上縁と後延部336との間の間隙から上延出片343がレンズ部分337の前側に突出し、前延部334の左縁と板状部304との間の間隙から横延出片343が左側の羽根状部分338の下側に位置して板状部304の前側に突出するようになっている。   The two second movable portions 342 and 342 are members having a symmetrical configuration with respect to each other, and are disposed symmetrically with respect to the front extension shaft opening 335. Each of the second movable portions 342 is a colored translucent substantially L-shaped member, and a bent portion is disposed on the rear side of the front extending portion 334. The second movable portion 342 branches from the bent portion and is mutually along the game board surface. The extending pieces 343 extending in two different directions are configured to extend from the upper part of the front extending part 334 and the side part on the arrangement side (see FIG. 52). In the embodiment, if the second movable portion 342 is on the right side, the two extending pieces 343 and 343 are arranged so as to extend upward and rightward, and if the second movable portion 342 is on the left side, 2 The extending pieces 343 and 343 of the book are arranged so as to extend upward and leftward. That is, in the case of the second movable portion 342 on the right side, the upper extending piece 343 protrudes from the gap between the upper edge of the front extending portion 334 and the rear extending portion 336 to the front side of the lens portion 337, and From the gap between the right edge and the plate-like portion 304, the laterally extending piece 343 is positioned below the right blade-like portion 338 and protrudes to the front side of the plate-like portion 304. In the case of the second movable portion 342 on the left side, the upper extension piece 343 protrudes from the gap between the upper edge of the front extension 334 and the rear extension 336 to the front side of the lens portion 337, and the left of the front extension 334. From the gap between the edge and the plate-like portion 304, the laterally extending piece 343 is positioned below the left blade-like portion 338 and protrudes to the front side of the plate-like portion 304.

各第2可動部342は、屈曲部分が前部駆動機構に接続されて、この屈曲部分を中心として正逆回転することで、2本の延出片343,343が同期して揺動するよう構成される。2基の第2可動部342,342は、第1可動部340が下方位置にあるときに、左右に隣り合う上延出片343,343が互いに近接して略平行な関係で延在すると共に、各横延出片343,343が前延部334の対応する側部に沿って延在している。また2基の第2可動部342,342は、第1可動部340が上方位置にあるときに、左右に隣り合う上延出片343,343が互いに離間して略V字となる関係で延在すると共に、各横延出片343が前延部334の対応する側部から離間して左右方向に延在するようになっている。なお、実施例では、第2可動部342の延出片343を2本とする場合であるが、1本または3本以上であってもよい。   Each second movable portion 342 has a bent portion connected to the front drive mechanism, and rotates forward and backward around the bent portion so that the two extending pieces 343 and 343 swing in synchronization. Composed. When the first movable part 340 is in the lower position, the two second movable parts 342 and 342 extend in a substantially parallel relationship in which the upper extension pieces 343 and 343 adjacent to the left and right are close to each other. The laterally extending pieces 343 and 343 extend along corresponding side portions of the front extending portion 334. Further, the two second movable portions 342 and 342 extend so that when the first movable portion 340 is in the upper position, the upper extending pieces 343 and 343 adjacent to the left and right are separated from each other so as to be substantially V-shaped. In addition, each laterally extending piece 343 is spaced apart from the corresponding side portion of the front extending portion 334 and extends in the left-right direction. In the embodiment, the number of the extending pieces 343 of the second movable portion 342 is two, but may be one or three or more.

(前部駆動機構)
図55に示すように、前記前部駆動機構は、駆動手段としての前部ソレノイド(ソレノイド)346と、この前部ソレノイド346の駆動を第1可動部340および第2可動部342に伝達する複数の連繋部からなる伝達手段とから構成される。伝達手段は、前部ソレノイド346の出力軸346aに前部連結片(連結片)348を介して連結した第1連繋部350と、この第1連繋部350に連繋すると共に第1可動部340に連結する第2連繋部352と、この第2連繋部352に連繋すると共に第2可動部342に連結された前部回転軸(回転軸)355に連繋する第3連繋部356とを備えている(図49参照)。また、伝達手段としては、第2連繋部352と第3連繋部356とを直接連結することも可能であるが、第2連繋部352と第3連繋部356との間に、別の連繋部として第4連繋部358および第5連繋部360を設けて、第2連繋部352に対して第4連繋部358および第5連繋部360を介して第3連繋部356が連動するよう構成される。なお、前部ソレノイド346および伝達手段は、ケース体310における前部機構収容空間310aに設置される。ここで、前部駆動機構では、左右対称な位置関係で配置される2つの第2可動部342,342の夫々に対応して、前部回転軸355、第3連繋部356、この第3連繋部356を第2連繋部352に連繋する第4および第5連繋部358,360の伝達組を2系統備えている。そして、前記伝達組を構成する部材は、前板部312の後面において左右対称な位置関係で配置される(図49参照)。
(Front drive mechanism)
As shown in FIG. 55, the front drive mechanism includes a front solenoid (solenoid) 346 as drive means, and a plurality of transmissions that transmit the drive of the front solenoid 346 to the first movable part 340 and the second movable part 342. It is comprised from the transmission means which consists of a connection part. The transmission means is connected to the output shaft 346a of the front solenoid 346 via a front connection piece (connection piece) 348, and is connected to the first connection part 350 and to the first movable part 340. A second connecting portion 352 to be connected, and a third connecting portion 356 that is connected to the second connecting portion 352 and that is connected to the front rotating shaft (rotating shaft) 355 connected to the second movable portion 342 are provided. (See FIG. 49). In addition, as the transmission means, the second connecting portion 352 and the third connecting portion 356 can be directly connected, but another connecting portion is provided between the second connecting portion 352 and the third connecting portion 356. 4th connection part 358 and 5th connection part 360 are provided, and it is comprised so that the 3rd connection part 356 may link via the 4th connection part 358 and the 5th connection part 360 with respect to the 2nd connection part 352. . The front solenoid 346 and the transmission means are installed in the front mechanism accommodation space 310 a in the case body 310. Here, in the front drive mechanism, the front rotary shaft 355, the third linkage portion 356, and the third linkage are respectively corresponding to the two second movable portions 342 and 342 that are arranged in a symmetric positional relationship. Two transmission sets of the fourth and fifth connecting portions 358 and 360 that connect the portion 356 to the second connecting portion 352 are provided. And the member which comprises the said transmission group is arrange | positioned by the positional relationship symmetrical with respect to the rear surface of the front board part 312 (refer FIG. 49).

前記前部ソレノイド346は、直方体形状の自己保持型のものが採用され、出力軸346aを左右方向に延在させると共に長手辺を左右方向に延在させて、前板部312の後面上部に取り付けられる。前部ソレノイドは346、前板部312の周壁313より後側に突出する後部が、後板部320上部の突出部分に収容されて、ケース体310における前部機構収容空間310aの上部に配置されている。また前部ソレノイド346は、出力軸346aが本体部分の左右の側面から夫々突出しており、出力軸346aの右側に突出する部分と本体部分の右側面との間にばね(図示せず)が介挿されて、このばねによって出力軸346aが右方向へ向けて付勢されている。前部ソレノイド346は、出力軸346aの右側部分が本体部分から突出して左側部分が本体部分に引き込まれた状態が待機位置であり、該前部ソレノイド346の駆動により直線往復動を行う出力軸346aの左側部分が本体部分から接離することで、当該左側部分に前部連結片348を介して連結された伝達手段によって第1可動部340および第2可動部342が動作される。前部連結片348は、一端部に出力軸346aの左側部分先端に設けた円形板部に嵌合する凹部を有し、他端部に第1連繋部350の後述する第1上連結突起350aに嵌合する凹部を有しており、出力軸346aの左右方向の変位につれて左右方向に変位するようになっている。   The front solenoid 346 is a rectangular parallelepiped self-holding type, and is attached to the upper rear surface of the front plate portion 312 with the output shaft 346a extending in the left-right direction and the longitudinal side extending in the left-right direction. It is done. The front solenoid is 346, and the rear portion protruding rearward from the peripheral wall 313 of the front plate portion 312 is accommodated in the protruding portion of the upper portion of the rear plate portion 320, and is disposed above the front mechanism accommodating space 310a in the case body 310. ing. In the front solenoid 346, the output shaft 346a protrudes from the left and right side surfaces of the main body portion, and a spring (not shown) is interposed between the portion protruding to the right side of the output shaft 346a and the right side surface of the main body portion. The output shaft 346a is urged to the right by this spring. The front solenoid 346 is in a standby position in which the right side portion of the output shaft 346 a protrudes from the main body portion and the left side portion is drawn into the main body portion, and the output shaft 346 a that performs linear reciprocation by driving the front solenoid 346. The left and right portions of the first and second movable portions 340 and 342 are operated by the transmission means coupled to the left portion via the front coupling piece 348. The front connecting piece 348 has a concave portion that fits into a circular plate portion provided at the tip of the left side portion of the output shaft 346a at one end portion, and a first upper connecting projection 350a (described later) of the first connecting portion 350 at the other end portion. Is provided so that the output shaft 346a is displaced in the left-right direction as the output shaft 346a is displaced in the left-right direction.

図49に示すように、前記第1連繋部350は、前板部312において左側の周壁313と左側の前部保持片316との間における上部に位置して、出力軸346aの左側部分の下側に前板部312に立設された支軸351に回転自在に保持されている。第1連繋部350は、略L字状に形成された部材であって、屈曲部分が支軸351に回転自在に保持されている。また第1連繋部350は、上方に延在する一方の腕部分先端に後側に突出する第1上連結突起350aが設けられ、ケース体310の中央部に向けて左側の前部保持片316の後側を通って右方向に延在する他方の腕部分先端に、前側に突出する第1下連結突起350bが設けられている。そして、第1連繋部350は、一方の腕部分の第1上連結突起350aが前部連結片348の凹部に左右方向に位置規制された状態で収容されて、前部連結片348の左右方向の移動に伴って凹部と第1上連結突起350aの左右方向の係合下に一方の腕部分が支軸351を中心として左右に揺動されることで、他方の腕部分が支軸351を中心として上下に揺動するようになっている。なお、第1連繋部350は、出力軸346aの左側部分が本体部分側に引き込まれた前部ソレノイド346の待機状態において、一方の腕部分が右側に位置して、他方の腕部分が下側に位置している(図49(a)参照)。   As shown in FIG. 49, the first connecting portion 350 is located in the upper portion of the front plate portion 312 between the left peripheral wall 313 and the left front holding piece 316, and below the left portion of the output shaft 346a. It is rotatably supported by a support shaft 351 erected on the front plate portion 312 on the side. The first connecting portion 350 is a member formed in a substantially L shape, and a bent portion is rotatably held on the support shaft 351. Further, the first connecting portion 350 is provided with a first upper connecting projection 350 a protruding rearward at the tip of one arm portion extending upward, and the left front holding piece 316 toward the central portion of the case body 310. A first lower connecting projection 350b protruding forward is provided at the tip of the other arm portion extending rightward through the rear side. The first connecting portion 350 is accommodated in a state where the first upper connection protrusion 350a of one arm portion is regulated in the left-right direction in the recess of the front connection piece 348, and the left-right direction of the front connection piece 348 is stored. With the movement of the concave portion and the first upper connecting projection 350a in the left-right direction, one arm portion is swung left and right about the support shaft 351, so that the other arm portion moves the support shaft 351. It swings up and down around the center. The first connecting portion 350 has one arm portion on the right side and the other arm portion on the lower side in the standby state of the front solenoid 346 in which the left portion of the output shaft 346a is pulled to the main body portion side. (Refer to FIG. 49 (a)).

図49に示すように、前記第2連繋部352は、前板部312にスライド可能に設けられ、第1連繋部350の揺動に伴って前板部312に沿って上下に往復動するよう構成されている。第2連繋部352は、前板部312の後側に配置された後半体353と、前板部312の前側に配置された前半体354と、前板部312に該第2連繋部352の往復動方向である上下方向に長手が延在する長孔状に開設された連結開口315を介して後半体353および前半体354を連結する複数(実施例では2つ)の連結部354aとを有している。後半体353は、平板状の部材であって、上部に前後に貫通形成された連結突起開口353aが設けられると共に、上下方向の中間部分の両側縁に左右対称な関係で切欠形成された2つの連結突起切欠353bが設けられている。連結突起開口353aは、左右方向に長手が延在する長孔形状に形成され、短手寸法が第1連繋部350の第1下連結突起350bの直径と略同一に設定されて、第1下連結突起350bの上下方向に変位に係合する一方、左右方向の変位を許容するようになっている。   As shown in FIG. 49, the second connecting portion 352 is slidably provided on the front plate portion 312 and reciprocates up and down along the front plate portion 312 as the first connecting portion 350 swings. It is configured. The second connecting portion 352 includes a rear half 353 disposed on the rear side of the front plate portion 312, a front half body 354 disposed on the front side of the front plate portion 312, and the second connecting portion 352 on the front plate portion 312. A plurality of (two in the embodiment) connecting portions 354a that connect the rear half body 353 and the front half body 354 through a connecting opening 315 opened in the shape of a long hole extending in the vertical direction that is the reciprocating direction. Have. The rear half body 353 is a flat plate-like member, provided with a connecting projection opening 353a penetratingly formed in the front and rear at the top, and two notches formed symmetrically on both side edges of the middle portion in the vertical direction. A connecting protrusion notch 353b is provided. The connection protrusion opening 353a is formed in a long hole shape extending in the left-right direction, the short dimension is set to be substantially the same as the diameter of the first lower connection protrusion 350b of the first connection portion 350, and the first lower While engaging the displacement in the vertical direction of the connecting projection 350b, the displacement in the horizontal direction is allowed.

前半体354は、後半体353と略同一外形の平板状部材であって、該前半体354の後面に上下に離間して2つの連結部354a,354aが設けられ、各連結部354aの外径は、連結開口315の短手寸法と略同一に設定されている。第2連繋部352は、左右の前部保持片316,316の間に配置した後半体353と、上下の連結部354a,354aを対応する連結開口315に挿通した前半体354とで前板部312を挟持して、連結部354aと後半体353とがネジ固定される。第2連繋部352は、上下の連結部354a,354aが連結開口315の長手辺両側に摺接することで左右方向の移動が規制される一方、上下の連結部354a,354aが連結開口315の長手辺に沿って移動が許容されるようになっている。そして、第2連繋部352は、連結突起開口353aに挿入された第1連繋部350の第1下連結突起350bの上下変位につれて上下方向(上側に位置する前部ソレノイド346に対する進退方向)に往復動される。なお、第2連繋部352は、前部ソレノイド346の待機状態において、下側に位置する第1下連結突起350bに連動して、連結部354aが連結開口315の下部に位置する下側に位置している(図49(a)参照)。   The front half body 354 is a flat plate member having substantially the same outer shape as the rear half body 353, and two connecting portions 354a and 354a are provided on the rear surface of the front half body 354 so as to be vertically separated from each other, and the outer diameter of each connecting portion 354a. Is set to be substantially the same as the short dimension of the connection opening 315. The second connecting portion 352 includes a front plate portion formed by a rear half 353 disposed between the left and right front holding pieces 316 and 316 and a front half 354 inserted through the upper and lower connecting portions 354a and 354a through the corresponding connecting openings 315. The connecting portion 354a and the rear half 353 are fixed by screws with the 312 interposed therebetween. The second connecting portion 352 is restricted from moving in the left-right direction when the upper and lower connecting portions 354 a and 354 a are in sliding contact with both sides of the long side of the connecting opening 315, while the upper and lower connecting portions 354 a and 354 a are long in the length of the connecting opening 315. Movement along the side is allowed. The second connecting portion 352 reciprocates in the vertical direction (the forward and backward direction with respect to the front solenoid 346 located on the upper side) as the first lower connecting protrusion 350b of the first connecting portion 350 inserted into the connecting protrusion opening 353a moves up and down. Moved. The second connecting portion 352 is positioned on the lower side where the connecting portion 354a is positioned below the connecting opening 315 in conjunction with the first lower connecting protrusion 350b located on the lower side in the standby state of the front solenoid 346. (See FIG. 49A).

前記第2連繋部352には、前延部軸開口335および板状部軸開口306を介して板状部304の後側に臨む第1可動部340の連結棒341の後端が、前半体354の下部中央に連結される。前半体354の下部中央には、連結棒の外形形状に合わせて環状に延在させて突出形成した位置決め片354bが設けられ、この位置決め片354bの内側に連結棒341の後端を嵌め合わせて位置決めするようになっている(図54参照)。これにより、第1可動部340は、第2連繋部352の上下への往復動と共に上下に往復動し、前部ソレノイド346の待機状態において、下側に位置する第2連繋部352に伴って下方位置で待機する。   The rear end of the connecting rod 341 of the first movable part 340 facing the rear side of the plate-like part 304 through the front extension part shaft opening 335 and the plate-like part shaft opening 306 is formed in the second connecting part 352. It is connected to the lower center of 354. A positioning piece 354b is formed in the lower center of the front half 354 so as to project in an annular shape in accordance with the outer shape of the connecting rod. The rear end of the connecting rod 341 is fitted inside the positioning piece 354b. Positioning is performed (see FIG. 54). As a result, the first movable portion 340 reciprocates up and down along with the up and down reciprocation of the second linkage portion 352, and with the second linkage portion 352 positioned on the lower side in the standby state of the front solenoid 346. Wait in the down position.

実施例では、上下の連結開口315,315のうち下側の連結開口315が、連結部354aの上下変位範囲の下限より下側に長く延在させて前板部312に開設されて、余剰部分を備えており、この余剰部分の前側に整合する位置で前半体354に連結棒341がネジ固定されている。そして、後半体353の下部中央における余剰部分に整合する位置にネジ開口353cが設けられ、後半体353の後側からネジ開口353cおよび下側の連結開口315の余剰部分を介して連結棒341を前半体354に固定するネジを挿脱することが可能になっている。   In the embodiment, the lower connection opening 315 of the upper and lower connection openings 315 and 315 is extended to the lower side of the lower limit of the vertical displacement range of the connection portion 354a and is opened in the front plate portion 312 to provide an excess portion. The connecting rod 341 is screwed to the front half 354 at a position aligned with the front side of the surplus portion. A screw opening 353c is provided at a position aligned with the surplus portion in the lower center of the second half 353, and the connecting rod 341 is inserted from the rear side of the second half 353 through the surplus portion of the screw opening 353c and the lower connection opening 315. It is possible to insert and remove a screw that is fixed to the front half 354.

前記前板部312には、左右の前部保持片316,316を挟んで左右に離間して軸保持部312aが2ヶ所設けられ、各軸保持部312aに回転可能に保持された前部回転軸355の前板部312の後側に臨む後端に、第3連繋部356が固定される(図55参照)。すなわち、前板部312の後側には、第2連繋部352を該第2連繋部352の往復動方向と交差する左右方向に挟んで両側に、第3連繋部356が夫々設けられる。なお、軸保持部312aに保持された前部回転軸355は、前端が装飾不動部332の前延部334と板状部304との間に画成される空間に臨んで、当該空間において第2可動部342の屈曲部分に固定される。そして、第3連繋部356は、第2連繋部352の往復動に伴って回転することで前部回転軸355を回転するよう構成される。なお、2つの第3連繋部356,356は、左右対称な形状である。各第3連繋部356は、前部回転軸355の後端に固定される支持部位から半径方向外側に延出する延出部356aを備えたレバー状の部材であって、支持部位における延出部356aの延出側と反対側の周面に複数の第3回転歯(歯)356bが設けられると共に、延出部の延出端の周面に複数の連繋歯(歯)356cが設けられている。2つの第3連繋部356,356は、第3回転歯356bを外側に向けると共に延出部356aを前部保持片316の後側を通して左右方向に延在させて、第2連繋部352の後側において互いの連繋歯356c,356cをかみ合わせてある。すなわち、2つの第3連繋部356,356は、互いの連繋歯356c,356cの噛合下に連動して回転するよう構成され、これにより左右の第2可動部342,342が同期して揺動するようになっている。   The front plate portion 312 is provided with two shaft holding portions 312a spaced apart from each other with the left and right front holding pieces 316 and 316 interposed therebetween, and the front rotation that is rotatably held by each shaft holding portion 312a. A third connecting portion 356 is fixed to the rear end of the shaft 355 facing the rear side of the front plate portion 312 (see FIG. 55). That is, on the rear side of the front plate portion 312, the third linking portions 356 are respectively provided on both sides of the second linking portion 352 in the left-right direction intersecting the reciprocating direction of the second linking portion 352. The front rotating shaft 355 held by the shaft holding portion 312a faces a space where the front end is defined between the front extending portion 334 of the decorative immovable portion 332 and the plate-like portion 304, and the 2 It is fixed to the bent part of the movable part 342. And the 3rd connection part 356 is comprised so that the front part rotating shaft 355 may be rotated by rotating with the reciprocation of the 2nd connection part 352. FIG. The two third connecting portions 356 and 356 have a symmetrical shape. Each third linkage portion 356 is a lever-like member having an extension portion 356a extending radially outward from a support portion fixed to the rear end of the front rotation shaft 355, and extending at the support portion. A plurality of third rotating teeth (teeth) 356b are provided on the peripheral surface of the portion 356a opposite to the extending side, and a plurality of connecting teeth (teeth) 356c are provided on the peripheral surface of the extending end of the extending portion. ing. The two third linking portions 356 and 356 have the third rotating tooth 356b facing outward and the extending portion 356a extending in the left-right direction through the rear side of the front holding piece 316, so that the rear of the second linking portion 352 The teeth 356c, 356c are engaged with each other on the side. That is, the two third connecting portions 356 and 356 are configured to rotate in conjunction with the engagement of the connecting teeth 356c and 356c with each other, whereby the left and right second movable portions 342 and 342 swing in synchronization. It is supposed to be.

図49に示すように、前記各第4連繋部358は、前板部312における前部保持片316外側の各側部において第3連繋部356を固定する前部回転軸355の上側に立設された支軸351に回転可能に保持され、2つの第4連繋部358,358が、前板部312の後側の上下方向中間部に第2連繋部352を挟んで左右に離間配置されている。各第4連繋部358は、支軸351に回転可能に保持された支持部位(一端部)から半径方向外側に延出するアーム部を有するレバー状の部材であって、アーム部の延出端前面に第4連結突起(連結突起)358aが設けられている。第4連結突起358aは、第2連繋部352の連結突起切欠353bの上下寸法と略同一寸法で形成され、第4連結突起358aを対応する側縁部の連結突起切欠353bに収容することで、第4連繋部358が第2連繋部352に連結される。また各第4連繋部358には、支持部位の周面(実施例では、主に周面における下側部分)に複数の第4回転歯(歯)358bが設けられている。そして、第4連繋部358は、第2連繋部352の上下への往復動につれて、第4連結突起358aと連結突起切欠353bとの上下方向の係合下にアーム部が支軸351を中心として上下方向に揺動し、これに伴って支持部位が回転するようになっている。前部駆動機構では、第2連繋部352の左右両側に設置された2つの第4連繋部358,358の第4連結突起358a,358aが対応の連結突起切欠353bに収容されて、左右の連結突起358a,358aが対応の連結突起切欠353bの側縁に係合するので、第2連繋部352の左右方向の移動が規制される。すなわち、第2連繋部352は、連結部354aと連結開口315との摺接関係だけでなく、左右の第4連繋部358,358によっても上下の往復動方向と交差する左右方向にぶれたりすることを抑制でき、第2連繋部352に連結された第1可動部340を安定して往復動させることができる。   As shown in FIG. 49, each of the fourth linking portions 358 is erected on the upper side of the front rotating shaft 355 that fixes the third linking portion 356 at each side portion outside the front holding piece 316 in the front plate portion 312. The four fourth connecting portions 358 and 358 are rotatably held by the support shaft 351, and are spaced apart from each other on the right and left sides of the front plate portion 312 with the second connecting portion 352 interposed therebetween. Yes. Each of the fourth connecting portions 358 is a lever-like member having an arm portion that extends radially outward from a support portion (one end portion) that is rotatably held by the support shaft 351, and is an extended end of the arm portion. A fourth connection protrusion (connection protrusion) 358a is provided on the front surface. The fourth connection protrusion 358a is formed to have substantially the same vertical dimension as the connection protrusion notch 353b of the second connection part 352, and the fourth connection protrusion 358a is accommodated in the connection protrusion notch 353b of the corresponding side edge. The fourth connecting portion 358 is connected to the second connecting portion 352. Each of the fourth connecting portions 358 is provided with a plurality of fourth rotating teeth (teeth) 358b on the peripheral surface (in the embodiment, mainly the lower portion of the peripheral surface) of the support portion. As the fourth connecting portion 358 reciprocates up and down the second connecting portion 352, the arm portion is centered on the support shaft 351 under the vertical engagement between the fourth connecting protrusion 358a and the connecting protrusion notch 353b. It swings in the vertical direction, and the support part rotates accordingly. In the front drive mechanism, the fourth connection protrusions 358a and 358a of the two fourth connection portions 358 and 358 installed on the left and right sides of the second connection portion 352 are accommodated in the corresponding connection protrusion notches 353b, and the left and right connection Since the protrusions 358a and 358a engage with the side edges of the corresponding connecting protrusion notch 353b, the movement of the second connecting portion 352 in the left-right direction is restricted. That is, the second connecting portion 352 is not only slidably contacted with the connecting portion 354a and the connecting opening 315, but is also shaken by the left and right fourth connecting portions 358 and 358 in the left-right direction intersecting the vertical reciprocating direction. This can be suppressed, and the first movable portion 340 connected to the second connecting portion 352 can be stably reciprocated.

図49に示すように、前記各第5連繋部360は、前板部312における前部保持片316外側の各側部において第3連繋軸356を固定する前部回転軸355と第4連繋部358の支軸351との間に立設された支軸351に回転可能に保持されている。すなわち、2つの第5連繋部360,360が、前板部312の後側の上下方向中間部であって第3連繋部356と第4連繋部358との間に位置して、第2連繋部352を挟んで左右に離間配置されている。なお、第5連繋部360の支軸351は、前部回転軸355と第4連繋部358の支軸351とを結んだラインより外側に配置されている。各第5連繋部360は、支軸351に回転可能に保持された歯車状の部材であって、第3連繋部356の第3回転歯356bに対応して周面側部に複数設けられた第5横回転歯(歯)と、第4連繋部358の第4回転歯358bに対応して周面上部に複数設けられた第5上回転歯(歯)360bとを備えている。   As shown in FIG. 49, each of the fifth linking portions 360 includes a front rotating shaft 355 and a fourth linking portion for fixing the third linking shaft 356 at each side portion outside the front holding piece 316 in the front plate portion 312. 358 is rotatably supported by a support shaft 351 provided upright between the support shaft 351. That is, the two fifth connecting portions 360 and 360 are located in the middle portion between the third connecting portion 356 and the fourth connecting portion 358 on the rear side of the front plate portion 312 in the vertical direction. They are spaced apart from each other across the part 352. The support shaft 351 of the fifth connecting portion 360 is disposed outside the line connecting the front rotating shaft 355 and the support shaft 351 of the fourth connecting portion 358. Each of the fifth connecting portions 360 is a gear-like member that is rotatably held by the support shaft 351, and a plurality of fifth connecting portions 360 are provided on the peripheral surface side portions corresponding to the third rotating teeth 356b of the third connecting portion 356. A fifth horizontal rotating tooth (teeth) and a plurality of fifth upper rotating teeth (teeth) 360b provided on the upper peripheral surface corresponding to the fourth rotating teeth 358b of the fourth connecting portion 358 are provided.

各第5連繋部360は、第3連繋部356の第3回転歯356bに第5横回転歯360aをかみ合わせると共に、第4連繋部358の第4回転歯358bに第5上回転歯360bをかみ合わせて設置され、第4連繋部358の支持部位の回転につれて回転して、第3連繋部356を回転するよう構成される。すなわち、前部駆動機構では、第2連繋部352の上下変位量が第4連繋部358および第5連繋部360を介して第3連繋部356に対して調節して伝達されるようになっている。これにより、前部駆動機構は、第2連繋部352と共に往復動する第1可動部340と、第3連繋部356と共に揺動する第2可動部342との間で変位態様をより変化を付けることができる。なお、第3連繋部356、第4連繋部358および第5連繋部360の歯には、対応する歯同士のかみ合わせに際して、互いのかみ合わせ位置が判る目印が付されている。また第1連繋部350、第4連繋部358および第5連繋部360の支軸351は、前板部312に設けた孔に対して圧入して固定されている。   Each fifth connecting portion 360 meshes the fifth lateral rotating tooth 360a with the third rotating tooth 356b of the third connecting portion 356, and the fifth upper rotating tooth 360b with the fourth rotating tooth 358b of the fourth connecting portion 358. It is installed in mesh, and is configured to rotate with the rotation of the support portion of the fourth linkage portion 358 to rotate the third linkage portion 356. That is, in the front drive mechanism, the amount of vertical displacement of the second linkage portion 352 is adjusted and transmitted to the third linkage portion 356 via the fourth linkage portion 358 and the fifth linkage portion 360. Yes. Accordingly, the front drive mechanism further changes the displacement mode between the first movable part 340 that reciprocates together with the second linkage part 352 and the second movable part 342 that swings together with the third linkage part 356. be able to. The teeth of the third linkage portion 356, the fourth linkage portion 358, and the fifth linkage portion 360 are provided with marks that indicate the meshing positions of the teeth when the corresponding teeth are meshed with each other. Further, the support shafts 351 of the first connecting portion 350, the fourth connecting portion 358, and the fifth connecting portion 360 are press-fitted into and fixed to the holes provided in the front plate portion 312.

前記ケース体310の後板部320には、前部回転軸355、第4連繋部358の支軸351および第5連繋部360の支軸351の後端に対応して軸開口326が開設されている(図55参照)。前部回転軸355に対応する軸開口326は、前部回転軸355の後端より大径に形成されて、前部回転軸355の後端と後板部320との干渉を回避している。これに対して、第4連繋部358の支軸351および第5連繋部360の支軸351に対応する軸開口326は、支軸351の後端と略同一寸法で形成されて、当該軸開口326によって支軸351の後端を保持するようになっている。このように、後板部320の軸開口326に前部回転軸355および支軸351を受け入れることで、前部回転軸355および支軸351を受け入れた分だけケース体310を前後方向にコンパクトにできる。   A shaft opening 326 is formed in the rear plate portion 320 of the case body 310 corresponding to the rear end of the front rotating shaft 355, the support shaft 351 of the fourth connecting portion 358 and the support shaft 351 of the fifth connecting portion 360. (See FIG. 55). The shaft opening 326 corresponding to the front rotation shaft 355 is formed to have a larger diameter than the rear end of the front rotation shaft 355, thereby avoiding interference between the rear end of the front rotation shaft 355 and the rear plate portion 320. . On the other hand, the shaft opening 326 corresponding to the support shaft 351 of the fourth connecting portion 358 and the support shaft 351 of the fifth connecting portion 360 is formed with substantially the same size as the rear end of the support shaft 351, and the shaft opening 326 holds the rear end of the support shaft 351. In this way, by receiving the front rotary shaft 355 and the support shaft 351 in the shaft opening 326 of the rear plate portion 320, the case body 310 is made compact in the front-rear direction by the amount that the front rotary shaft 355 and the support shaft 351 are received. it can.

前記前部駆動機構による第1および第2可動部340,342の動作について説明する。前部演出装置300は、前部ソレノイド346が待機状態にある場合、第1可動部340が下方位置にあって装飾不動部332における中間部位に位置し、左右の第2可動部342,342の上延出片343,343が互いに近接すると共に横延出片343が装飾不動部332の側部に沿って延在している(図48(a)参照)。前部ソレノイド346が駆動されて、出力軸346aの左側部分が本体部分から離間するよう左方向に突出して前部連結片348が左側に変位するにつれて、第1連繋部350が揺動して第2連繋部352を押し上げる(図49(b)参照)。これにより、第2連繋部352に連結された第1可動部340が下方位置から上方位置に向けて上方変位して前延部334の上側にずれて、前延部光透過片334aを露出させる。この際、前部LED基板308から光を照射して前延部光透過片334aを発光させることで、第1可動部340の動作と相まって、遊技者の注意をより惹きつけるので演出効果を向上することができる。また第2連繋部352の上方変位と同時に、左右の第4連繋部358,358が揺動して第5連繋部360を介して対応の第3連繋部356が回転され、これに伴って第3連繋部356に固定された前部回転軸355が回転することで、左右の第2可動部342,342が上延出片343,343が互いに離間すると共に横延出片343が装飾不動部332の対応する側部から離間して左右方向に延在するように揺動する(図48(b)参照)。   The operation of the first and second movable parts 340 and 342 by the front drive mechanism will be described. When the front solenoid 346 is in a standby state, the front effect device 300 has the first movable part 340 in a lower position and is positioned at an intermediate position in the decoration immovable part 332, and the left and right second movable parts 342 and 342 The upper extension pieces 343 and 343 are close to each other, and the lateral extension piece 343 extends along the side portion of the decorative immovable portion 332 (see FIG. 48A). As the front solenoid 346 is driven and the left portion of the output shaft 346a protrudes in the left direction so as to be separated from the main body portion, and the front connecting piece 348 is displaced to the left, the first connecting portion 350 is swung and the first connecting portion 350 is swung. The two connecting portions 352 are pushed up (see FIG. 49B). As a result, the first movable portion 340 connected to the second connecting portion 352 is displaced upward from the lower position toward the upper position and is shifted to the upper side of the front extension portion 334 to expose the front extension light transmitting piece 334a. . At this time, by irradiating light from the front LED board 308 and causing the front light transmitting piece 334a to emit light, coupled with the operation of the first movable part 340, the player's attention is further attracted, so the effect of the presentation is improved. can do. Simultaneously with the upward displacement of the second linking part 352, the left and right fourth linking parts 358, 358 are swung to rotate the corresponding third linking part 356 via the fifth linking part 360. By rotating the front rotation shaft 355 fixed to the three linkage portions 356, the left and right second movable portions 342 and 342 are separated from each other by the upper extension pieces 343 and 343, and the lateral extension piece 343 is a decoration non-moving portion. It swings away from the corresponding side of 332 and extends in the left-right direction (see FIG. 48B).

前部ソレノイド346が逆駆動されて、出力軸346aの左側部分が本体部分に近接するよう右方向に引き込まれて前部連結片348が右側に変位するにつれて、第1連繋部350が揺動して第2連繋部352を押し下げる(図49(a)参照)。これにより、第2連繋部352に連結された第1可動部340が上方位置から下方位置に向けて下方変位して前延部334の上側から前延部光透過片334aを覆うように中間部分に位置する(図48(a)参照)。また第2連繋部352の下方変位と同時に、左右の第4連繋部358,358が揺動して第5連繋部360を介して対応の第3連繋部356が回転され、これに伴って第3連繋部356に固定された前部回転軸355が回転することで、左右の第2可動部342,342が上延出片343,343が互いに近接すると共に横延出片343が装飾不動部332の対応する側部に沿って延在するように揺動する。このように、前部演出装置300は、1つの前部ソレノイド346によって、第1可動部340および左右の第2可動部342,342が同期して動作される。すなわち、前部演出装置300は、複数の可動部340,342,342を一つの前部ソレノイド346で動作させることができるので、複数の可動部340,342,342を駆動するための機構全体をコンパクトにし得る。また、往復動する第1可動部340と揺動する第2可動部342とが設けられるので、異なる動作を同期して行う複数の可動部340,342,342によって、演出効果を向上することができる。   As the front solenoid 346 is reversely driven and the left portion of the output shaft 346a is pulled in the right direction so as to be close to the main body portion and the front connecting piece 348 is displaced to the right, the first connecting portion 350 swings. Then, the second connecting portion 352 is pushed down (see FIG. 49A). As a result, the first movable portion 340 connected to the second linking portion 352 is displaced downward from the upper position toward the lower position, and the intermediate portion so as to cover the front extension light transmitting piece 334a from the upper side of the front extension 334. (See FIG. 48 (a)). Simultaneously with the downward displacement of the second linking part 352, the left and right fourth linking parts 358 and 358 are swung to rotate the corresponding third linking part 356 via the fifth linking part 360. By rotating the front rotation shaft 355 fixed to the three linkage portions 356, the left and right second movable portions 342 and 342 are close to each other with the upper extending pieces 343 and 343 and the laterally extending piece 343 is the decorative immovable portion. Swing so that it extends along the corresponding side of 332. Thus, in the front effect device 300, the first movable part 340 and the left and right second movable parts 342 and 342 are operated in synchronization by the single front solenoid 346. That is, since the front stage production device 300 can operate the plurality of movable parts 340, 342, 342 with one front solenoid 346, the entire mechanism for driving the plurality of movable parts 340, 342, 342 is provided. Can be compact. In addition, since the first movable part 340 that reciprocates and the second movable part 342 that swings are provided, it is possible to improve the production effect by the plurality of movable parts 340, 342, and 342 that perform different operations in synchronization. it can.

しかも、前部演出装置300は、装飾不動部332の前側に設けた第1可動部340および装飾不動部332から遊技盤面に沿う方向に延出する第2可動部342により前部可動体330を構成してあるので、全体として立体感があり、各可動部340,342の動作による演出効果を相乗して向上し得る。前部演出装置300は、装飾不動部332の後延部336における発光演出が行われるレンズ部分337と第2可動部342の上延出片343とが前後の関係で配置されるので、前部可動体330全体として立体感を増すことができ、またレンズ部分337の発光により上延出片の動作を強調することができる。更に、前部演出装置300は、第2可動部342の異なる方向に延在する延出片343,343が装飾不動部332の異なる縁辺から延出し、遊技者から異なる複数の可動部分があると見えるので、部材点数を増やすことなく演出効果を向上し得る。そして、前部LED基板308からの光の照射によって前部可動体330における可動部340,342の動作演出と相まって演出効果を更に向上することができる。   In addition, the front stage production device 300 has the first movable unit 340 provided on the front side of the decoration immovable part 332 and the second movable part 342 extending from the decoration immovable part 332 in a direction along the game board surface. Since it is configured, there is a three-dimensional effect as a whole, and the effect of the operations of the movable parts 340 and 342 can be synergistically improved. In the front effect device 300, the lens portion 337 where the light emission effect is performed in the rear extension 336 of the decoration immovable portion 332 and the upper extending piece 343 of the second movable portion 342 are arranged in a front-rear relationship, so The three-dimensional effect can be increased as the entire movable body 330, and the operation of the upper extension piece can be emphasized by the light emission of the lens portion 337. Further, in the front effect device 300, when the extended pieces 343 and 343 extending in different directions of the second movable portion 342 extend from different edges of the decorative immovable portion 332, there are a plurality of different movable portions from the player. Since it can be seen, the production effect can be improved without increasing the number of members. Further, the effect of the effect can be further improved by irradiating the light from the front LED substrate 308 with the operation effect of the movable parts 340 and 342 in the front movable body 330.

前記前部ソレノイド346は、配線が接続対象である第1の前部ソケット309と反対側となる本体部分の左側(第1連繋部350側)から延出しており、ケース体310の前板部312に設けられた配線通路310cを介して第1の前部ソケット309に接続される(図49および図53参照)。配線通路310cは、前板部312の前側に位置して前部ソレノイド346と第2連繋部352との間に設けられ、前部機構収容空間310aにおける第1連繋部350側に開口するように左側の前部保持片316に配線通路310cに連通する配線開口部が開設されると共に、ソケット空間310bに開口するよう右側の前部保持片316(区画壁318)に配線通路310cに連通する配線開口部が開設される。また、前板部312の前面には、第2連繋部352に位置して前半体354の上側に左右方向に延在させて配線通路壁354cが設けられ、前板部312の前側に位置して板状部304の後面に取り付けられる前部LED基板308の後面と前板部312の前面との間に画成される配線通路310cを通る配線が、配線通路壁354cによって後半体と干渉しないように区画している。   The front solenoid 346 extends from the left side (the first connecting portion 350 side) of the main body portion opposite to the first front socket 309 to which the wiring is to be connected. The first front socket 309 is connected to the first front socket 309 through a wiring passage 310c provided in the 312 (see FIGS. 49 and 53). The wiring passage 310c is located on the front side of the front plate portion 312 and is provided between the front solenoid 346 and the second connecting portion 352, and opens to the first connecting portion 350 side in the front mechanism housing space 310a. A wiring opening communicating with the wiring passage 310c is opened in the left front holding piece 316, and a wiring communicating with the wiring passage 310c in the right front holding piece 316 (partition wall 318) so as to open into the socket space 310b. An opening is established. Further, on the front surface of the front plate portion 312, a wiring passage wall 354 c is provided in the second connecting portion 352 so as to extend in the left-right direction above the front half body 354, and is located on the front side of the front plate portion 312. The wiring passing through the wiring passage 310c defined between the rear surface of the front LED board 308 attached to the rear surface of the plate-like portion 304 and the front surface of the front plate portion 312 does not interfere with the latter half by the wiring passage wall 354c. It is divided like this.

前部演出装置300は、前部ソケット309が臨むソケット空間310bと可動部340,342を動作させるための前部ソレノイド346や連繋部350,352,356,358,360等の伝達手段が配置される前部機構収容空間310aとが区画壁318,322で分けられているので、前部ソレノイド346や伝達手段との配線の干渉を確実に回避できる。また前部ソレノイド346においてソケット空間310bと離間する側から延出する配線を、配線通路310cを介して伝達手段と干渉させることなくソケット空間310bに導入することができる。また前部ソレノイド346の配線は、ソケット空間310bの前部ソケット309に接続するまでに長さを確保できるので、配線の取り回しを行い易く、前部ソケット309への挿脱作業が容易になる。しかも、ソケット空間310bと前部機構収容空間310aとが区画壁318,322で分けられて前部機構収容空間310aに放熱孔323が設けてあるので、ソケット空間310b側に前部ソレノイド346からの熱が侵入することを抑制できる。そして、裏ユニット30には、前部演出装置300のケース体310と上部演出装置200の上部内周装飾部50との間に連通して、上面に上部切欠部36が設けられ、前部演出装置300の放熱孔323から排出された熱は、上部切欠部36を介して遊技盤20の後側に逃がされる。   The front effect device 300 is provided with transmission means such as a front solenoid 346 for operating the socket space 310b facing the front socket 309 and the movable portions 340 and 342, and connecting portions 350, 352, 356, 358, and 360. Since the front mechanism housing space 310a is divided by the partition walls 318 and 322, it is possible to reliably avoid interference of wiring with the front solenoid 346 and the transmission means. Further, the wiring extending from the side away from the socket space 310b in the front solenoid 346 can be introduced into the socket space 310b via the wiring passage 310c without interfering with the transmission means. In addition, since the length of the wiring of the front solenoid 346 can be secured before it is connected to the front socket 309 of the socket space 310b, the wiring can be easily routed, and the insertion and removal of the front socket 309 is facilitated. Moreover, since the socket space 310b and the front mechanism housing space 310a are divided by the partition walls 318 and 322 and the heat radiation holes 323 are provided in the front mechanism housing space 310a, the socket space 310b side is provided with the heat from the front solenoid 346. Intrusion of heat can be suppressed. The back unit 30 communicates between the case body 310 of the front effect device 300 and the upper inner periphery decoration portion 50 of the upper effect device 200, and is provided with an upper notch 36 on the upper surface. The heat discharged from the heat radiation hole 323 of the device 300 is released to the rear side of the game board 20 through the upper notch 36.

前部演出装置300は、枠状装飾体70の内側に設けられた設置部75に設置されて、枠状装飾体70で囲われているので、遊技盤20の前面に臨んでいるものの遊技領域20aを流下するパチンコ球に影響を与えることはない。また前部演出装置300の前部可動体330は、複数の可動部340,342を有しているが、前部ソレノイド346およびこの前部ソレノイド346の駆動を各可動部340,342に伝達する連繋部350,352,356,358,360が前後の関係でなく、前板部(遊技盤面)312後面に沿って並べて配置してあるので、前後方向にコンパクトにすることができる。このように、前部演出装置300および上部演出装置200は、何れも前後方向にコンパクトであるので、裏ユニット30の前側の狭いスペースに前後に重ね合わせて設置することが可能となる。また、前部演出装置300および上部演出装置200は、遊技盤20の前面で動作する可動部340,342を有する前部演出装置300の後側に前部駆動機構を設け、表示部20bの直前で出没する上部可動体220を有する上部演出装置200の前側に上部駆動機構を設け、前側と後側にバランスよく2つの可動体220,330の駆動機構を設けることで、前後の関係で2つの可動体220,330を設けても全体としてコンパクトにできる。更に、前部演出装置300および上部演出装置200は、前後の関係で設置しても間隔をあけることができるので、例えば前部演出装置300の後側に位置する上部内周装飾部50の意匠形状が前部演出装置300により制限されることを少なくし得る。しかも、前部演出装置300は、透明板22の装着口に重ねて設けられた設置部75に設置されて、透明板22の装着口に収容されているので、透明板22の板厚分を設置スペースとして有効利用している。なお、上部演出装置200の上部モータ230と前部演出装置300の前部ソレノイド346とは、前後の関係で並んでいる。   Since the front effect device 300 is installed in the installation unit 75 provided inside the frame-shaped decorative body 70 and is surrounded by the frame-shaped decorative body 70, the game area of the one facing the front of the game board 20 It does not affect pachinko spheres flowing down 20a. The front movable body 330 of the front effect device 300 has a plurality of movable parts 340 and 342, and transmits the front solenoid 346 and the drive of the front solenoid 346 to the movable parts 340 and 342. Since the connecting portions 350, 352, 356, 358, and 360 are arranged side by side along the rear surface of the front plate portion (game board surface) 312 rather than the front-rear relationship, it is possible to reduce the size in the front-rear direction. As described above, since the front effect device 300 and the upper effect device 200 are both compact in the front-rear direction, they can be installed in the front-rear narrow space on the back unit 30 so as to overlap each other. Further, the front effect device 300 and the upper effect device 200 are provided with a front drive mechanism on the rear side of the front effect device 300 having movable parts 340 and 342 that operate on the front surface of the game board 20, and immediately before the display unit 20b. By providing an upper drive mechanism on the front side of the upper rendering device 200 having the upper movable body 220 that appears and disappears at the front, and providing a drive mechanism for the two movable bodies 220 and 330 in a balanced manner on the front side and the rear side, Even if the movable bodies 220 and 330 are provided, the entire body can be made compact. Further, since the front effect device 300 and the upper effect device 200 can be spaced apart from each other even if installed in the front-rear relationship, for example, the design of the upper inner periphery decoration portion 50 located on the rear side of the front effect device 300 It is possible to reduce the shape of the front effect device 300 from being limited. Moreover, since the front stage production device 300 is installed in the installation section 75 provided so as to overlap the mounting opening of the transparent plate 22 and is accommodated in the mounting opening of the transparent plate 22, the thickness of the transparent plate 22 is reduced. It is effectively used as an installation space. Note that the upper motor 230 of the upper effect device 200 and the front solenoid 346 of the front effect device 300 are arranged in a front-rear relationship.

(側部演出装置)
図4に示すように、前記遊技盤20には、2基の側部演出装置400,400が表示部20bを挟んで裏ユニット30における左右の側部に設けられるが、これら側部演出装置400,400は左右対称な構成であるので、左側の側部演出装置400を例に挙げて説明する。
(Side production device)
As shown in FIG. 4, the game board 20 is provided with two side effect devices 400, 400 on the left and right sides of the back unit 30 with the display unit 20b interposed therebetween. , 400 have a symmetrical configuration, the left side effect device 400 will be described as an example.

図56〜図68に示すように、側部演出装置400は、側部ベース部材(ベース部材)402と、この側部ベース部材402の前側を覆う側部内周装飾部(カバー部材)60の前側に設けられた側部可動体(可動体)420,424,428と、この側部可動体420,424,428を動作させる側部駆動機構(駆動機構)とから構成される。側部演出装置400は、単数または複数の側部可動体420,424,428を備えており、実施例では3つの側部可動体420,424,428を設ける場合である(図56参照)。実施例の側部演出装置400は、側部内周装飾部60の中央部に位置する第1側部可動体420と、この第1側部可動体420の上側に位置する第2側部可動体424とが上側部駆動機構で動作され、第1側部可動体420の下側に位置する第3側部可動体428が、上側部駆動機構とは別の下側部駆動機構で動作される。ここで、側部演出装置400では、透明板22の外周縁を装飾する外周装飾部28、および外周装飾部28の後側に組み付けられて、外周装飾部28の内側に臨む部位が該外周装飾部28より後側に段差を付けて延在すると共に外周装飾部28と共通する意匠形状で形成された側部内周装飾部60に対して、側部可動体420,424,428を共通する意匠形状で形成している(図4参照)。   As shown in FIGS. 56 to 68, the side effect device 400 includes a side base member (base member) 402 and a front side of a side inner peripheral decorative portion (cover member) 60 that covers the front side of the side base member 402. The side movable body (movable body) 420, 424, 428 provided on the side and a side drive mechanism (drive mechanism) for operating the side movable body 420, 424, 428 are configured. The side effect device 400 includes one or a plurality of side movable bodies 420, 424, and 428. In the embodiment, three side movable bodies 420, 424, and 428 are provided (see FIG. 56). The side effect device 400 according to the embodiment includes a first side movable body 420 located at the center of the side inner periphery decorative portion 60 and a second side movable body located above the first side movable body 420. 424 is operated by the upper side drive mechanism, and the third side movable body 428 located below the first side movable body 420 is operated by the lower side drive mechanism different from the upper side drive mechanism. . Here, in the side effect device 400, the outer peripheral decoration portion 28 that decorates the outer peripheral edge of the transparent plate 22, and the portion that is assembled to the rear side of the outer peripheral decoration portion 28 and faces the inner side of the outer peripheral decoration portion 28 is the outer peripheral decoration. A design in which the side movable bodies 420, 424, and 428 are shared with respect to the side inner peripheral decorative portion 60 that extends with a step on the rear side from the portion 28 and is formed in a design shape common to the outer peripheral decorative portion 28. It is formed in a shape (see FIG. 4).

(側部ベース部材)
図61および図64に示すように、前記側部ベース部材402は、遊技盤20において表示部20bの左側縁部を画成する裏ユニット30の左側辺に沿って設けられた長尺な透明部材であって、長手辺を上下に延在させて裏ユニット30の左側辺前側に取り付けられる。側部ベース部材402は、表示部20bから離間する左縁辺後側に突出形成され、該側部ベース部材402の長手辺に沿う上下方向(後述するスライド部材438,458の往復動方向)に延在する外壁403と、この外壁403より表示部20b側(右側)に離間して、該側部ベース部材402の後面に上下方向に延在するよう突出形成された内壁404とを備えている。また側部ベース部材402は、内壁404より表示部20b側(右側)に離間して、該側部ベース部材402の後面に上下方向に延在するよう突出形成された中壁405を備えており、中壁405と内壁404との間に側部駆動機構の構成部材が設置される(図61参照)。側部ベース部材402の後面には、上下に離間して丸棒状のスライド保持片406が複数(実施例では4つ)設けられ、4つのスライド保持片406は、内壁404と中壁405との間における中壁405側に偏倚した部位に、上下に一直線状に並べて設けられている(図64参照)。側部演出装置400では、側部ベース部材402の上側領域に配置された2つのスライド保持片406,406が組をなして上側部駆動機構の後述する上スライド部材(スライド部材)438を保持し、側部ベース部材402の下側領域に配置された2つのスライド保持片406,406が組をなして下側部駆動機構の後述する下スライド部材(スライド部材)458を保持するようになっている。側部ベース部材402の後面には、上下のスライド保持片406,406を挟んで左右両側に、筋状に突出形成されたラック保持リブ(保持リブ)407が設けられ、これら2条のラック保持リブ407,407は、平行な関係で上下に延在している。
(Side base member)
As shown in FIGS. 61 and 64, the side base member 402 is a long transparent member provided along the left side of the back unit 30 that defines the left side edge of the display unit 20b in the game board 20. And it is attached to the front side of the left side of the back unit 30 with its longitudinal side extending vertically. The side base member 402 is formed to protrude to the rear side of the left edge separated from the display portion 20b, and extends in the vertical direction along the longitudinal side of the side base member 402 (the reciprocating direction of slide members 438 and 458 described later). An outer wall 403 is provided, and an inner wall 404 is formed so as to protrude from the outer wall 403 toward the display unit 20b (right side) and extend in the vertical direction on the rear surface of the side base member 402. The side base member 402 includes an inner wall 405 that is spaced apart from the inner wall 404 toward the display unit 20b (right side) and protrudes from the rear surface of the side base member 402 so as to extend in the vertical direction. The constituent members of the side drive mechanism are installed between the middle wall 405 and the inner wall 404 (see FIG. 61). The rear surface of the side base member 402 is provided with a plurality of (four in the embodiment) round bar-like slide holding pieces 406 spaced apart from each other in the vertical direction, and the four slide holding pieces 406 are formed between the inner wall 404 and the middle wall 405. They are arranged in a straight line up and down at a portion biased toward the middle wall 405 (see FIG. 64). In the side effect device 400, two slide holding pieces 406, 406 arranged in the upper region of the side base member 402 form a pair to hold an upper slide member (slide member) 438, which will be described later, of the upper side drive mechanism. The two slide holding pieces 406 and 406 arranged in the lower region of the side base member 402 form a set to hold a lower slide member (slide member) 458 described later of the lower side drive mechanism. Yes. On the rear surface of the side base member 402, rack holding ribs (holding ribs) 407 are provided on both the left and right sides of the upper and lower slide holding pieces 406, 406 so as to project in a straight line. The ribs 407 and 407 extend vertically in a parallel relationship.

図57に示すように、前記側部ベース部材402の後側には、該側部ベース部材402との間に側部駆動機構の構成部材の設置スペースをあけて透明な背面カバー410が組み付けられている。背面カバー410は、側部ベース部材402に対してネジ止めされて、側部内部装飾部60や側部駆動機構や側部可動体に関係なく、側部ベース部材402に対して着脱可能になっている。背面カバー410は、側部ベース部材402における内壁404より表示部20b側の後面を覆うよう形成されると共に、内壁404に対向する左側縁に亘って側部区画壁(区画壁)411が前側に向けて突出形成されている(図59参照)。背面カバー410は、該背面カバー410の側部区画壁411を内壁404に突き合わせて、背面カバー410の後側から側部ベース部材402のスライド保持片406にネジ止めして側部ベース部材402に取り付けられ、側部駆動機構の構成部材を収容する側部機構収容空間(機構収容空間)414を側部ベース部材402との間に画成している(図58参照)。すなわち、側部機構収容空間414の外壁403側の側面は、側部区画壁411と内壁404とにより塞がれている。   As shown in FIG. 57, on the rear side of the side base member 402, a transparent back cover 410 is assembled with a space for installing the components of the side drive mechanism between the side base member 402 and the side base member 402. ing. The back cover 410 is screwed to the side base member 402 so that the back cover 410 can be attached to and detached from the side base member 402 regardless of the side internal decoration 60, the side drive mechanism, and the side movable body. ing. The back cover 410 is formed so as to cover the rear surface of the display unit 20b side from the inner wall 404 of the side base member 402, and the side partition wall (partition wall) 411 extends to the front side across the left edge facing the inner wall 404. It protrudes toward the surface (see FIG. 59). The back cover 410 has the side partition wall 411 of the back cover 410 abutted against the inner wall 404, and is screwed to the slide holding piece 406 of the side base member 402 from the rear side of the back cover 410 to the side base member 402. A side mechanism accommodation space (mechanism accommodation space) 414 that is attached and accommodates the constituent members of the side drive mechanism is defined between the side base member 402 (see FIG. 58). That is, the side surface on the outer wall 403 side of the side mechanism housing space 414 is closed by the side partition wall 411 and the inner wall 404.

背面カバー410の前面には、側部ベース部材402における2条のラック保持リブ407,407に対向して筋状に突出形成されたラック保持リブ(保持リブ)412が設けられ、これら2条のラック保持リブ412,412は、平行な関係で上下に延在している(図58、図59、図60参照)。背面カバー410の表示部20b側の側縁には、側部装飾片416がネジ止めされており(図57参照)、この側部装飾片416のネジ固定部が側部ベース部材402の表示部側の側縁に設けられた凹所408に嵌り込んで位置決めされるようになっている(図61参照)。   The front surface of the back cover 410 is provided with rack holding ribs (holding ribs) 412 that are formed to protrude in a streak pattern so as to face the two rack holding ribs 407 and 407 of the side base member 402. The rack holding ribs 412 and 412 extend vertically in a parallel relationship (see FIGS. 58, 59, and 60). A side decoration piece 416 is screwed to a side edge of the back cover 410 on the display section 20b side (see FIG. 57), and a screw fixing portion of the side decoration piece 416 is a display section of the side base member 402. It is positioned by fitting into a recess 408 provided on the side edge (see FIG. 61).

前記側部可動体420,424,428は、前述の如く外周装飾部28および側部内周装飾部60に施された意匠形状と共通する意匠形状で形成され、実施例では、カットされた平面を凹凸に組み合わせた氷の如き立体的形状とされる。また、側部可動体420,424,428は、光拡散処理が施された有色半透明の部材から構成される。第1側部可動体420および第3側部可動体428は、後面に後側に向けて突出形成された複数(実施例では3ヶ所)の接続軸422,430を備え、これらの接続軸422,430を介して対応の側部駆動機構で動作されることで、側部内周装飾部60の前側に重なる位置(図56(a)および図66(a)参照)とこの重なる位置から表示部20b側に突出する位置(図56(b)および図66(b))との間で往復動するよう構成される。一方、第2側部可動体424は、後面に後側に向けて突出形成された側部回転軸(回転軸)425、側部連結軸(連結軸)426および側部補助軸(補助軸)427とを備え、側部連結軸426を介して上側部駆動機構で動作されることで、側部回転軸425を中心として揺動するよう構成される(図66参照)。第2側部可動体424は、側部回転軸425を挟んで左右に離間して側部連結軸426および側部補助軸427が配置され、側部回転軸425と側部連結軸426との距離が、側部回転軸425と側部補助軸427との距離よりも長く設定されており、第2側部可動体424における駆動側の寸法が長く従動側の寸法が短くなっているので、上側部駆動機構への駆動負荷を低減できる。   The side movable bodies 420, 424, and 428 are formed in a design shape that is the same as the design shape applied to the outer peripheral decorative portion 28 and the side inner peripheral decorative portion 60 as described above, and in the embodiment, a cut plane is used. It is a three-dimensional shape like ice combined with unevenness. Further, the side movable bodies 420, 424, and 428 are made of colored translucent members that have been subjected to a light diffusion process. The first side movable body 420 and the third side movable body 428 are provided with a plurality (three in the embodiment) of connection shafts 422 and 430 formed on the rear surface so as to protrude rearward, and these connection shafts 422 are provided. , 430 and the corresponding side portion driving mechanism, the position overlapping the front side of the side inner periphery decorative portion 60 (see FIGS. 56 (a) and 66 (a)) and the display portion from this overlapping position It is configured to reciprocate between positions protruding to the 20b side (FIGS. 56 (b) and 66 (b)). On the other hand, the second side movable body 424 includes a side rotation shaft (rotation shaft) 425, a side connection shaft (connection shaft) 426, and a side auxiliary shaft (auxiliary shaft) that are formed to protrude rearward on the rear surface. 427, and is configured to swing about the side rotation shaft 425 by being operated by the upper side drive mechanism via the side connection shaft 426 (see FIG. 66). The second side movable body 424 is arranged with a side connection shaft 426 and a side auxiliary shaft 427 spaced apart from each other across the side rotation shaft 425, and the side rotation shaft 425 and the side connection shaft 426. The distance is set to be longer than the distance between the side rotating shaft 425 and the side auxiliary shaft 427, and the driving side dimension of the second side movable body 424 is long, and the driven side dimension is short. The driving load on the upper side driving mechanism can be reduced.

前記側部可動体420,424,428の保持部分となる側部内周装飾部60は、図65に示すように、全体として略L字状に形成されており、該略L字の短尺部分が表示部20bの上縁を画成する上辺の一部を構成すると共に、該略L字の長尺部分が表示部20bの側縁を画成する側辺を構成している。また側部内周装飾部60は、光拡散処理が施された有色半透明を基本とした後側に開口する箱状部材であって、左右の後縁部内側に側部ベース部材402を嵌め合わせて該側部ベース部材402の前側を覆うように取り付けられる。なお、側部内周装飾部60は、透明板22の後面に沿う前面部分が側部ベース部材402の前面から空間をあけて該側部ベース部材402を覆っている。側部内周装飾部60は、後面に複数の側部取付ボス(図示せず)が突出形成され、複数の側部取付ボスを後述する光拡散部材472および第1側部LED基板468の開口を介して、側部ベース部材402の前面に凹設されたボス受部(第1の通孔)402aに収容して位置決めされる(図63参照)。ボス受部402aは、側部ベース部材402における背面カバー410で覆われる部位(側部機構収容空間414に対応する部分)に設けられており、側部ベース部材402の後側からネジを螺合することで、側部内周装飾部60と側部ベース部材402が取り付けられる。また、側部ベース部材402は、背面カバー410の外縁部より突出した取付片409を有し(図64参照)、この取付片409に設けたネジ通孔(第2の通孔)409aを介して側部内周装飾部60に対して側部ベース部材402の後側からネジ止めされる。ここで、背面カバー410には、ボス受部402aに整合して、該ボス受部402aに対してネジを着脱可能な挿脱孔410cが設けられている(図57参照)。これにより、背面カバー410を取り外すことなく、側部内周装飾部60を側部ベース部材402に対して着脱することができる。   As shown in FIG. 65, the side inner periphery decorative portion 60 that serves as a holding portion for the side movable bodies 420, 424, and 428 is formed in an approximately L shape as a whole, and the substantially L-shaped short portion is formed. A part of the upper side that defines the upper edge of the display unit 20b is configured, and the substantially L-shaped long portion configures a side side that defines the side edge of the display unit 20b. Further, the side inner peripheral decoration portion 60 is a box-shaped member that opens to the rear side based on colored translucent that has been subjected to light diffusion processing, and the side base member 402 is fitted inside the left and right rear edge portions. And attached so as to cover the front side of the side base member 402. Note that the side inner peripheral decorative portion 60 covers the side base member 402 with a front surface portion along the rear surface of the transparent plate 22 leaving a space from the front surface of the side base member 402. The side inner peripheral decorative portion 60 has a plurality of side mounting bosses (not shown) protruding from the rear surface, and the plurality of side mounting bosses are provided with openings for a light diffusion member 472 and a first side LED board 468, which will be described later. Accordingly, the boss receiving portion (first through hole) 402a recessed in the front surface of the side base member 402 is accommodated and positioned (see FIG. 63). The boss receiving portion 402 a is provided at a portion (a portion corresponding to the side mechanism accommodating space 414) covered with the back cover 410 in the side base member 402, and a screw is screwed from the rear side of the side base member 402. By doing so, the side inner periphery decorative portion 60 and the side base member 402 are attached. Further, the side base member 402 has a mounting piece 409 protruding from the outer edge of the back cover 410 (see FIG. 64), and a screw through hole (second through hole) 409a provided in the mounting piece 409. The side inner peripheral decorative portion 60 is screwed from the rear side of the side base member 402. Here, the back cover 410 is provided with an insertion / removal hole 410c that can be attached to and removed from the boss receiving portion 402a in alignment with the boss receiving portion 402a (see FIG. 57). Thereby, the side inner periphery decorative portion 60 can be attached to and detached from the side base member 402 without removing the back cover 410.

図65に示すように、前記側部内周装飾部60は、第1側部可動体420の3本の接続軸422に対応して3つの上スライド孔部(スライド孔部)61を、上下方向の中間部位に備えており、第3側部可動体428の3本の接続軸430に対応して3つの下スライド孔部(下スライド孔部)62を下部に備えている。各スライド孔部61,62は、長孔形状で前後に貫通形成されている。各スライド孔部61,62は、長手辺が斜め横方向(スライド部材の往復動方向と交差する方向)に延在するよう形成されている。各上スライド孔部61は、長手辺が上から下に向かうにつれて表示部20b側に傾くよう開設される。これに対し、各下スライド孔部62は、長手辺が上から下に向かうにつれて表示部20b側から離間する外側に傾くよう開設される。なお、3本の上スライド孔部61は、互いに平行な関係で延在し、3本の下スライド孔部62は、互いに平行な関係で延在している。   As shown in FIG. 65, the side inner periphery decorative portion 60 has three upper slide hole portions (slide hole portions) 61 corresponding to the three connection shafts 422 of the first side movable body 420 in the vertical direction. And three lower slide hole portions (lower slide hole portions) 62 corresponding to the three connection shafts 430 of the third side movable body 428 are provided at the lower portion. Each of the slide hole portions 61 and 62 has a long hole shape and is formed through the front and rear. Each of the slide hole portions 61 and 62 is formed so that the long side extends in an oblique lateral direction (a direction intersecting the reciprocating direction of the slide member). Each upper slide hole part 61 is opened so that the longitudinal side may incline toward the display part 20b as it goes from top to bottom. On the other hand, each lower slide hole part 62 is opened so that it may incline to the outer side spaced apart from the display part 20b side as a long side goes to the bottom from the top. The three upper slide hole portions 61 extend in a parallel relationship with each other, and the three lower slide hole portions 62 extend in a parallel relationship with each other.

図65に示すように、前記側部内周装飾部60の上部には、第2側部可動体424の側部回転軸425を回転可能に保持する側部支持孔部63と、この側部支持孔部63の左側に位置して第2側部可動体424の側部連結軸426に対応して開口する側部連結軸通孔64と、側部支持孔部63を挟んで側部連結軸通孔64と反対側に位置して第2側部可動体424の側部補助軸427に対応して開口する側部補助軸通孔65とが設けられている。なお、側部連結軸通孔64は、側部内周装飾部60の左上角部に配置されている。側部支持孔部63は、側部回転軸425に整合する丸孔状に開設される一方、側部連結軸通孔64および側部補助軸通孔65は、第2側部可動体424の側部支持孔部63を中心とする揺動に伴う対応する軸426,427の移動経路に対応した長孔形状に開設されている。なお、側部連結軸通孔64および側部補助軸通孔65は、短手寸法が対応の軸426,427の外径と略同一寸法で設定されている。ここで、第2側部可動体424は、各軸425,426,427を対応の孔63,64,65に挿入して、側部内周装飾部60の後側に突出した側部回転軸425および側部補助軸427の間に架設された側部補助リンク(補助片)432によって抜けないように、また安定して保持される(図66参照)。そして、第2側部可動体424は、待機状態で右下部が表示部20bの上部を画成する側部内周装飾部60の短尺部分下縁から表示部20b側に突出するように位置し、この位置(図56(a)および図66(a)参照)と、側部内周装飾部60に重なるように表示部20b側から退避した位置(図56(b)および図66(b)参照)との間で揺動するよう構成される。   As shown in FIG. 65, on the upper part of the side inner periphery decorative portion 60, a side support hole 63 that rotatably holds the side rotation shaft 425 of the second side movable body 424, and this side support A side connecting shaft through hole 64 located on the left side of the hole 63 and opening corresponding to the side connecting shaft 426 of the second side movable body 424, and a side connecting shaft sandwiching the side support hole 63 therebetween. A side auxiliary shaft through hole 65 is provided which is located on the opposite side of the through hole 64 and opens corresponding to the side auxiliary shaft 427 of the second side movable body 424. The side connecting shaft through hole 64 is disposed at the upper left corner of the side inner periphery decorative portion 60. The side support hole 63 is formed in a round hole shape that is aligned with the side rotation shaft 425, while the side connection shaft through hole 64 and the side auxiliary shaft through hole 65 are provided on the second side movable body 424. It is formed in a long hole shape corresponding to the movement path of the corresponding shafts 426 and 427 accompanying the swinging around the side support hole 63. The side connecting shaft through-hole 64 and the side auxiliary shaft through-hole 65 are set to have a short dimension that is substantially the same as the outer diameter of the corresponding shafts 426 and 427. Here, the second side movable body 424 is inserted into the corresponding holes 63, 64, and 65 with the respective shafts 425, 426, and 427, and the side rotation shaft 425 that protrudes to the rear side of the side inner peripheral decoration portion 60. And the side auxiliary link (auxiliary piece) 432 installed between the side auxiliary shafts 427 is stably held so as not to come off (see FIG. 66). And the second side movable body 424 is positioned so that the lower right portion protrudes toward the display portion 20b from the lower edge of the short portion of the side inner periphery decorative portion 60 that defines the upper portion of the display portion 20b in the standby state. This position (see FIGS. 56 (a) and 66 (a)) and a position retracted from the display unit 20b so as to overlap the side inner periphery decoration portion 60 (see FIGS. 56 (b) and 66 (b)). And is configured to swing between.

(上側部駆動機構)
先ず、第1側部可動体420と第2側部可動体424とを動作させる上側部駆動機構について説明する。図66に示すように、上部駆動機構は、駆動手段としての上側部モータ434と、この上側部モータ434の出力軸に固定された上側部ピニオン436と、この上側部ピンオン436にかみ合うラックとしての上スライド部材438と、この上スライド部材438の変位に連動するスライドベースとから基本的に構成される。上側部モータ434は、出力軸を後側に向けて側部ベース部材402の前面上部に設置されている。ここで、側部内周装飾部60は、上側部モータ434の前側に対応する部位が開口しており、この開口部位の前側が第2側部可動体424で該第2側部可動体424の揺動範囲全体に亘って覆われるようになっている。上側部ピニオン436は、側部ベース部材402の後側に突出する上側部モータ434の出力軸に固定された板状の平歯車であって、出力軸が圧入される中央部後面が突出形成されている。上側部ピニオン436の突出部位は、背面カバー410に該突出部位に合わせて形成されたボス開口410aに回転可能に収容される。また、上側部ピニオン436における表示部20bから離間する側である外側(左側)には、側部ベース部材402の内壁404が延在している。
(Upper part drive mechanism)
First, an upper side drive mechanism that operates the first side movable body 420 and the second side movable body 424 will be described. As shown in FIG. 66, the upper drive mechanism includes an upper motor 434 as drive means, an upper pinion 436 fixed to the output shaft of the upper motor 434, and a rack that meshes with the upper pin on 436. The upper slide member 438 and a slide base that interlocks with the displacement of the upper slide member 438 are basically configured. The upper part motor 434 is installed in the upper part of the front surface of the side part base member 402 with the output shaft facing rearward. Here, the side inner periphery decorative portion 60 has an opening corresponding to the front side of the upper motor 434, and the front side of the opening portion is the second side movable body 424, and the second side movable body 424. The entire swing range is covered. The upper part pinion 436 is a plate-like spur gear fixed to the output shaft of the upper part motor 434 projecting to the rear side of the side base member 402, and the rear surface of the central part into which the output shaft is press-fitted is formed to project. ing. The protruding portion of the upper pinion 436 is rotatably accommodated in a boss opening 410a formed on the back cover 410 according to the protruding portion. Further, an inner wall 404 of the side base member 402 extends on the outer side (left side) which is the side away from the display unit 20 b in the upper side pinion 436.

図66に示すように、前記上スライド部材438は、略L字形に形成された細長い板状部材であって、側部ベース部材402の後側にスライド可能に設けられている。上スライド部材438は、略L字形状の長尺部分である第1片部438aが上下方向に延在すると共に、略L字形状の短尺部分である第2片部438bが第1片部438aの上端から左側(表示部から離間する方向)に向けて左右方向に延在するよう配置されている(図61参照)。また上スライド部材438には、第1片部438aの上下に離間して2つの保持孔部439,439が開設され、上スライド部材438は、側部ベース部材402の後面上側に立設された上下2つのスライド保持片406,406を上下の保持孔部439,439に夫々受け入れて設置される。各保持孔部439は、長手が上下方向に延在する長孔形状に形成され、短辺寸法が上スライド保持片406の外径と略同一寸法に設定される。   As shown in FIG. 66, the upper slide member 438 is an elongated plate-like member formed in a substantially L shape, and is slidably provided on the rear side of the side base member 402. The upper slide member 438 has a first piece 438a, which is a substantially L-shaped long portion, extending in the vertical direction, and a second piece 438b, which is a substantially L-shaped short portion, is a first piece 438a. Is arranged so as to extend in the left-right direction from the upper end to the left side (direction away from the display unit) (see FIG. 61). The upper slide member 438 has two holding holes 439 and 439 that are spaced apart from each other above and below the first piece 438a, and the upper slide member 438 is erected on the upper rear surface of the side base member 402. The two upper and lower slide holding pieces 406, 406 are installed in the upper and lower holding holes 439, 439, respectively. Each holding hole portion 439 is formed in a long hole shape whose length extends in the vertical direction, and the short side dimension is set to be substantially the same as the outer diameter of the upper slide holding piece 406.

上スライド部材438は、第1片部438aの前面が側部ベース部材の左右のラック保持リブ407に当接すると共に、第1片部438aの後面が背面カバー410の左右のラック保持リブ412,412に当接して、側部ベース部材402と背面カバー410との間で挟持される(図59参照)。このように、上スライド部材438は、側部ベース部材402および背面カバー410に対して面で接触するのではなく、ラック保持リブ407,412と線接触する構成であるから摺接負荷を低減して円滑にスライド変位できる。更に、上スライド部材438は、上側部ピニオン436の右側(表示部20b側)に第1片部438aが配置されると共に、第1片部438aの左上部に上側部ピニオン436にかみ合う複数の歯が設けられており、上側部モータ434の正逆回転に伴う上側部ピニオン436の正逆回転につれて上下方向に往復動するよう構成される(図61参照)。   In the upper slide member 438, the front surface of the first piece 438a contacts the left and right rack holding ribs 407 of the side base member, and the rear surface of the first piece 438a is the left and right rack holding ribs 412 and 412 of the back cover 410. And is sandwiched between the side base member 402 and the back cover 410 (see FIG. 59). As described above, the upper slide member 438 is configured not to contact the side base member 402 and the back cover 410 by a surface but to make a line contact with the rack holding ribs 407 and 412, thereby reducing a sliding contact load. Can be displaced smoothly. Further, the upper slide member 438 has a first piece 438a disposed on the right side (the display unit 20b side) of the upper part pinion 436, and a plurality of teeth engaging with the upper part pinion 436 at the upper left part of the first piece part 438a. And is configured to reciprocate in the vertical direction as the upper pinion 436 rotates in the forward / reverse direction according to the forward / reverse rotation of the upper motor 434 (see FIG. 61).

図61および図66に示すように、前記上スライド部材438は、第1片部438aの下部に左側(表示部20bと離間する外側)に突出形成された第3片部438cを有し、この第3片部438cに上スライド部材438全体の往復動方向と直交する左右方向(横方向)に長手が延在する長孔形状の接続孔部440が開設されている。また、上スライド部材438は、第1片部438aの上端前面に前側に向けて突出形成された上側部検出片(検出片)441を有している(図67参照)。上側部検出片441は、側部ベース部材402の上部に上スライド部材438の往復動に伴う上側部検出片441の移動経路に合わせて開設された上側部検出通孔を介して側部ベース部材の前側に臨むようになっている(図58および図64参照)。   As shown in FIGS. 61 and 66, the upper slide member 438 has a third piece portion 438c formed to protrude to the left side (outside away from the display portion 20b) at the lower portion of the first piece portion 438a. The third piece 438c is provided with a long hole-shaped connection hole 440 extending in the left-right direction (lateral direction) perpendicular to the reciprocating direction of the entire upper slide member 438. Further, the upper slide member 438 has an upper portion detection piece (detection piece) 441 that is formed to protrude toward the front side on the front surface of the upper end of the first piece portion 438a (see FIG. 67). The upper side detection piece 441 is arranged on the upper side of the side base member 402 through the upper side detection through hole formed in accordance with the movement path of the upper side detection piece 441 as the upper slide member 438 reciprocates. (Refer to FIG. 58 and FIG. 64).

前記上スライド部材438は、第2片部438bの左端前面に前側に向けて突出形成された連結突部442を有し、この連結突部442が側部ベース部材402の左上部と側部内周装飾部60の左側縁との間に位置して、側部内周装飾部60に開設された側部連結軸通孔64に後側に臨むようになっている(図58および図61参照)。連結突部442の前端には、側部連結軸通孔64を介して側部内周装飾部60の後側に突き出た第2側部可動体424の側部連結軸426に上下方向に係合可能な連結凹部442aが設けられている。なお連結凹部442aは、側部連結軸426の外径と上下寸法が略同一に設定される。すなわち、上スライド部材438は、連結凹部442aに側部連結軸426を収容することで側部連結軸426と接続される。そして、上側部駆動機構は、上スライド部材438の往復動につれて側部連結軸426を上下に往復動することで、側部回転軸425を中心として第2側部可動体424を揺動することができる。   The upper slide member 438 has a connecting protrusion 442 formed to protrude toward the front side on the left end front surface of the second piece 438b, and the connecting protrusion 442 includes the upper left portion of the side base member 402 and the inner periphery of the side portion. It is located between the left side edge of the decorative portion 60 and faces the rear side connecting shaft through hole 64 provided in the side inner peripheral decorative portion 60 (see FIGS. 58 and 61). The front end of the connection protrusion 442 is vertically engaged with the side connection shaft 426 of the second side movable body 424 protruding to the rear side of the side inner periphery decoration portion 60 through the side connection shaft through hole 64. A possible connection recess 442a is provided. The connecting recess 442a is set so that the outer diameter and the vertical dimension of the side connecting shaft 426 are substantially the same. That is, the upper slide member 438 is connected to the side connection shaft 426 by accommodating the side connection shaft 426 in the connection recess 442a. The upper side drive mechanism swings the second side movable body 424 about the side rotation shaft 425 by reciprocating the side connection shaft 426 up and down as the upper slide member 438 reciprocates. Can do.

図62および図66に示すように、前記上スライドベース444は、側部ベース部材402と側部内周装飾部60との間に設けられ、上スライド部材438と第1側部可動体420とを連結する部材である。上スライドベース444は、略三角形状の板状体をベース本体(本体)444aとし、このベース本体444aの後面に突出して1本の後軸部445が設けられると共に、ベース本体444aの前面に突出して第1側部可動体420の接続軸422に対応する数(実施例では3本)の前軸部446が設けられている(図62参照)。また、上スライドベース444では、略三角形状のベース本体444aにおける3つの頂部に前軸部446が夫々配置されると共に、略三角形状のベース本体444aの重心に後軸部445が配置される。このように、上スライドベース444の軸部445,446を配置することで、上スライド部材438から上スライドベース444に対して力を適切に伝達し得ると共に、第1側部可動体420を安定して保持し得る。上スライドベース444は、後軸部445が側部ベース部材402(および後述する側部LED基板および側部光拡散部材)に上スライド孔部61と同一方向に長手を沿わせて貫通形成された上後軸部通孔402cを介して側部ベース部材402の後側に突出し(図64参照)、後軸部445の後端が上後軸部通孔402cの後側に重なるように配置された上スライド部材438の接続孔部440に挿入される。なお、後軸部445の外径は、接続孔部440の短辺寸法と略同一に設定される。   As shown in FIGS. 62 and 66, the upper slide base 444 is provided between the side base member 402 and the side inner periphery decorative portion 60, and the upper slide member 438 and the first side movable body 420 are connected to each other. It is a member to connect. The upper slide base 444 has a substantially triangular plate-like body as a base main body (main body) 444a. The upper slide base 444 protrudes from the rear surface of the base main body 444a and is provided with one rear shaft portion 445, and protrudes from the front surface of the base main body 444a. The number of front shaft portions 446 corresponding to the connection shaft 422 of the first side movable body 420 (three in the embodiment) is provided (see FIG. 62). In the upper slide base 444, a front shaft portion 446 is disposed at each of three top portions of the substantially triangular base body 444a, and a rear shaft portion 445 is disposed at the center of gravity of the substantially triangular base body 444a. Thus, by arranging the shaft portions 445 and 446 of the upper slide base 444, the force can be properly transmitted from the upper slide member 438 to the upper slide base 444, and the first side movable body 420 is stabilized. And hold. In the upper slide base 444, the rear shaft portion 445 is formed so as to penetrate the side base member 402 (and a side LED substrate and a side light diffusion member described later) along the longitudinal direction in the same direction as the upper slide hole portion 61. It protrudes to the rear side of the side base member 402 through the upper rear shaft portion through hole 402c (see FIG. 64), and is arranged so that the rear end of the rear shaft portion 445 overlaps the rear side of the upper rear shaft portion through hole 402c. In addition, it is inserted into the connection hole 440 of the upper slide member 438. The outer diameter of the rear shaft portion 445 is set to be substantially the same as the short side dimension of the connection hole portion 440.

前記上側部駆動機構の後軸部445は、接続孔部440において該接続孔部440の長手辺に沿って左右方向の変位が許容されるものの、接続孔部440の上下縁に係合するようになっている。また、上スライドベース444は、各前軸部446が上スライド孔部61を介して側部内周装飾部60の後側に臨んでいる第1側部可動体420の対応する接続軸422に夫々接続される。そして、上スライドベース444は、上スライド部材438の上下方向への往復動につれて後軸部445と接続孔部440とが上下に係合したもとに上下に変位するが、後軸部445が接続孔部440において左右方向の変位が許容されているので、上スライド孔部61の延在方向に沿って第1側部可動体420を斜め横方向に往復動するようになっている。   The rear shaft portion 445 of the upper side drive mechanism engages with the upper and lower edges of the connection hole 440, although displacement in the left-right direction is allowed along the longitudinal side of the connection hole 440 in the connection hole 440. It has become. Further, the upper slide base 444 is respectively connected to the corresponding connecting shaft 422 of the first side movable body 420 in which each front shaft portion 446 faces the rear side of the side inner peripheral decorative portion 60 through the upper slide hole portion 61. Connected. The upper slide base 444 is displaced up and down while the rear shaft portion 445 and the connection hole portion 440 are vertically engaged as the upper slide member 438 reciprocates in the vertical direction. Since displacement in the left-right direction is allowed in the connection hole portion 440, the first side movable body 420 is reciprocated in the oblique lateral direction along the extending direction of the upper slide hole portion 61.

前記上スライドベース444は、第1側部可動体420の待機位置からの変位方向前側にベース本体444aの底辺が位置して2本の前軸部446が変位方向前側に配置され、第1側部可動体420の表示部20b側に突出した位置から待機位置に戻る側にベース本体444aの頂角が位置して1本の前軸部446が配置されている(図66参照)。ここで、上スライド孔部61の寸法は、上スライド部材438の往復動距離および接続孔部440における後軸部445の変位許容距離を辺とする仮想直角三角形を構成する斜辺の寸法以上に設定される。すなわち、上スライド部材438の往復動距離と第1側部可動体420の上下方向の変位幅とが同一になり、接続孔部440における後軸部445の変位許容距離と第1側部可動体420の左右方向の変位幅とが同一になっている。これにより、側部演出装置400では、上スライド部材438の上下方向への往復動が接続孔部440から後軸部445に伝達される過程で上スライド孔部61に沿う斜め横方向への変位に適切に変換され、第1側部可動体420が斜め横方向に往復動される。また、上スライドベース444を上下の何れの位置に取り付けても、上スライド部材438を上スライドベース444の後軸部445に合わせて取り付けることができ、取り付け作業性がよい。   In the upper slide base 444, the bottom side of the base body 444a is positioned on the front side in the displacement direction from the standby position of the first side movable body 420, and the two front shaft portions 446 are disposed on the front side in the displacement direction. One front shaft portion 446 is arranged with the apex angle of the base main body 444a positioned on the side returning from the position protruding from the display unit 20b side of the movable part 420 to the standby position (see FIG. 66). Here, the size of the upper slide hole portion 61 is set to be equal to or larger than the size of the hypotenuse forming the virtual right triangle having the reciprocating distance of the upper slide member 438 and the allowable displacement distance of the rear shaft portion 445 in the connection hole portion 440 as sides. Is done. That is, the reciprocating distance of the upper slide member 438 and the vertical displacement width of the first side movable body 420 are the same, and the allowable displacement distance of the rear shaft portion 445 in the connection hole 440 and the first side movable body. The displacement width of 420 in the left-right direction is the same. Thereby, in the side effect device 400, the displacement in the oblique lateral direction along the upper slide hole 61 in the process in which the reciprocating motion of the upper slide member 438 in the vertical direction is transmitted from the connection hole 440 to the rear shaft 445. Thus, the first side movable body 420 is reciprocated in an oblique lateral direction. Moreover, even if the upper slide base 444 is attached to any position in the upper and lower directions, the upper slide member 438 can be attached to the rear shaft portion 445 of the upper slide base 444, and the attachment workability is good.

(下側部駆動機構)
次に、第3側部可動体428を動作させる下側部駆動機構について説明する。なお、下側部駆動機構は、上側部駆動機構から第2側部可動体424を動作させるための構成を除いた構成とおおよそ同一構成となっている。図61および図66に示すように、下側部駆動機構は、駆動手段としての下側部モータ454と、この下側部モータ454の出力軸に固定された下側部ピニオン456と、この下側部ピンオン456にかみ合うラックとしての下スライド部材458と、この下スライド部材458の変位に連動する下スライドベース464とから基本的に構成される。下側部モータ454は、出力軸を後側に向けて側部ベース部材402の前面下部に設置されている。ここで、側部内周装飾部60は、下側部モータ454の前側に対応する部位が前側に膨出形成されており、下側部モータ454の前側を覆う膨出部位前面にスリット状の放熱孔66が開設されている(図56参照)。下側部ピニオン456は、側部ベース部材402の後側に突出する下側部モータ454の出力軸に固定された板状の平歯車であって、出力軸が圧入される中央部後面が突出形成されている。下側部ピニオン456の突出部位は、背面カバー410に該突出部位に合わせて形成されたボス開口410aに回転可能に収容される(図57参照)。また、下側部ピニオン456における表示部20bから離間する側である外側(左側)には、側部ベース部材402の内壁404が延在している(図61参照)。
(Lower side drive mechanism)
Next, a lower side drive mechanism that operates the third side movable body 428 will be described. The lower side drive mechanism has substantially the same configuration as the configuration obtained by removing the configuration for operating the second side movable body 424 from the upper side drive mechanism. As shown in FIGS. 61 and 66, the lower side drive mechanism includes a lower side motor 454 as a driving means, a lower side pinion 456 fixed to the output shaft of the lower side motor 454, It is basically composed of a lower slide member 458 as a rack that meshes with the side pin-on 456 and a lower slide base 464 that interlocks with the displacement of the lower slide member 458. The lower side motor 454 is installed in the lower part of the front surface of the side base member 402 with the output shaft facing rearward. Here, the side inner peripheral decorative portion 60 has a portion corresponding to the front side of the lower side motor 454 bulging forward, and a slit-like heat radiation on the front side of the bulging portion covering the front side of the lower side motor 454. A hole 66 is opened (see FIG. 56). The lower side pinion 456 is a plate-like spur gear that is fixed to the output shaft of the lower side motor 454 that protrudes to the rear side of the side base member 402, and the rear surface of the center portion into which the output shaft is press-fitted protrudes. Is formed. The protruding portion of the lower side pinion 456 is rotatably accommodated in a boss opening 410a formed in the back cover 410 according to the protruding portion (see FIG. 57). Further, the inner wall 404 of the side base member 402 extends on the outer side (left side) which is the side away from the display unit 20b in the lower side pinion 456 (see FIG. 61).

図61および図66に示すように、前記下スライド部材458は、細長い板状部材であって、側部ベース部材402の後側に上スライド部材438の下側に位置してスライド可能に設けられている。下スライド部材458は、長手が上下方向に延在するよう配置されている。また下スライド部材458には、上下に離間して2つの保持孔部459が開設され、下スライド部材458は、側部ベース部材402の後面下側に立設された上下2つのスライド保持片406,406を上下の保持孔部459,459に夫々受け入れて設置される。各保持孔部459は、長手が上下方向に延在する長孔形状に形成され、短辺寸法がスライド保持片406の外径と略同一寸法に設定される。そして、下スライド部材458は、前面が側部ベース部材402の左右の側部保持リブ407,407に当接すると共に、後面が背面カバー410の左右の保持保持リブ412,412に当接して、側部ベース部材402と背面カバー410との間で挟持される(図60参照)。このように、下スライド部材458は、側部ベース部材402および背面カバー410に対して面で接触すするのではなく、側部保持リブ407,412と線接触する構成であるから摺接負荷を低減して円滑にスライド変位できる。更に、下スライド部材458は、下側部ピニオン456の右側(表示部側)に配置されると共に、下部左側面に下側部ピニオン456にかみ合う複数の歯が設けられており、下側部モータ454の正逆回転に伴う下側部ピニオン456の正逆回転につれて上下方向に往復動するよう構成される。   As shown in FIGS. 61 and 66, the lower slide member 458 is an elongated plate-like member, and is provided on the rear side of the side base member 402 so as to be slidable below the upper slide member 438. ing. The lower slide member 458 is disposed so that its longitudinal length extends in the vertical direction. Further, the lower slide member 458 is provided with two holding hole portions 459 spaced apart from each other in the vertical direction, and the lower slide member 458 has two upper and lower slide holding pieces 406 erected on the lower side of the rear surface of the side base member 402. , 406 are received in the upper and lower holding holes 459, 459, respectively. Each holding hole portion 459 is formed in a long hole shape whose length extends in the vertical direction, and the short side dimension is set to be approximately the same as the outer diameter of the slide holding piece 406. The lower slide member 458 has a front surface in contact with the left and right side holding ribs 407 and 407 of the side base member 402, and a rear surface in contact with the left and right holding and holding ribs 412 and 412 of the back cover 410. It is clamped between the part base member 402 and the back cover 410 (see FIG. 60). In this way, the lower slide member 458 is not in contact with the side base member 402 and the back cover 410 on the surface, but is in line contact with the side holding ribs 407 and 412, so that the sliding load is applied. Reduce and smooth slide displacement. Further, the lower slide member 458 is disposed on the right side (display side) of the lower side pinion 456, and a plurality of teeth that engage with the lower side pinion 456 are provided on the lower left side surface. The lower pinion 456 is configured to reciprocate in the vertical direction as the forward and backward rotation of the lower side pinion 456 accompanying the forward and backward rotation of 454.

図61および図66に示すように、前記下スライド部材458は、下部に左側(表示部20bと離間する外側)に突出形成された接続片部458aを有し、この接続片部458aに下スライド部材458全体の往復動方向と直交する左右方向(横方向)に長手が延在する長孔形状の接続孔部460が開設されている。また、下スライド部材458は、下端前面に前側に向けて突出形成された下側部検出片(検出片)461を有している(図68参照)。下側部検出片461は、側部ベース部材402の下部に下スライド部材458の往復動に伴う下側部検出片461の移動経路に合わせて開設された下側部検出通孔402dを介して側部ベース部材402の前側に臨むようになっている(図60参照)。   As shown in FIGS. 61 and 66, the lower slide member 458 has a connection piece portion 458a formed on the left side (outside away from the display portion 20b) at the lower portion, and slides down to the connection piece portion 458a. A long hole-shaped connection hole portion 460 having a length extending in the left-right direction (lateral direction) orthogonal to the reciprocating direction of the entire member 458 is provided. Further, the lower slide member 458 has a lower side detection piece (detection piece) 461 formed to protrude toward the front side on the front surface at the lower end (see FIG. 68). The lower side detection piece 461 is located below the side base member 402 via a lower side detection through hole 402d that is set in accordance with the movement path of the lower side detection piece 461 accompanying the reciprocating movement of the lower slide member 458. It faces the front side of the side base member 402 (see FIG. 60).

図62および図66に示すように、前記下スライドベース464は、側部ベース部材402と側部内周装飾部60との間に設けられ、下スライド部材458と第3側部可動体428とを連結する部材である。下スライドベース464は、略三角形状の板状体をベース本体(本体)464aとし、このベース本体464aの後面に突出して1本の後軸部465が設けられると共に、ベース本体464aの前面に突出して第3側部可動体428の接続軸430に対応する数(実施例では3本)の前軸部466が設けられている。また、下スライドベース464では、略三角形状のベース本体464aにおける3つの頂部に前軸部466が夫々配置されると共に、略三角形状のベース本体464aの重心に後軸部465が配置される。このように、下スライドベース464の軸部465,466を配置することで、下スライド部材458から下スライドベース464に対して力を適切に伝達し得ると共に、第3側部可動体428を安定して保持し得る。下スライドベース464は、後軸部465が側部ベース部材(後述する側部LED基板および側部光拡散部材)402に下スライド孔部62と同一方向に長手を沿わせて貫通形成された下後軸部通孔402aを介して側部ベース部材402の後側に突出し、後軸部465の後端が下後軸部通孔402aの後側に重なるように配置された下スライド部材458の接続孔部460に挿入される(図61および図64参照)。なお、後軸部465の外径は、接続孔部460の短辺寸法と略同一に設定される。   As shown in FIGS. 62 and 66, the lower slide base 464 is provided between the side base member 402 and the side inner peripheral decorative portion 60, and the lower slide member 458 and the third side movable body 428 are connected to each other. It is a member to connect. The lower slide base 464 has a substantially triangular plate-like body as a base main body (main body) 464a, and protrudes from the rear surface of the base main body 464a to be provided with one rear shaft portion 465, and protrudes from the front surface of the base main body 464a. The number of front shaft portions 466 corresponding to the connection shaft 430 of the third side movable body 428 (three in the embodiment) is provided. In the lower slide base 464, a front shaft portion 466 is disposed at each of three top portions of the substantially triangular base body 464a, and a rear shaft portion 465 is disposed at the center of gravity of the substantially triangular base body 464a. As described above, by arranging the shaft portions 465 and 466 of the lower slide base 464, the force can be appropriately transmitted from the lower slide member 458 to the lower slide base 464, and the third side movable body 428 is stabilized. And hold. The lower slide base 464 has a rear shaft portion 465 formed in a side base member (a side LED substrate and a side light diffusing member to be described later) 402 so as to penetrate the longitudinal direction in the same direction as the lower slide hole portion 62. The lower slide member 458 is arranged so as to protrude rearward of the side base member 402 through the rear shaft portion through-hole 402a and to be arranged so that the rear end of the rear shaft portion 465 overlaps the rear side of the lower rear shaft portion through-hole 402a. It is inserted into the connection hole 460 (see FIGS. 61 and 64). The outer diameter of the rear shaft portion 465 is set to be substantially the same as the short side dimension of the connection hole portion 460.

前記下側部駆動機構の後軸部465は、接続孔部460において該接続孔部460の長手辺に沿って左右方向の変位が許容されるものの、接続孔部460の上下縁に係合するようになっている。また、下スライドベース464は、各前軸部466が下スライド孔部62を介して側部内周装飾部60の後側に臨んでいる第3側部可動体428の対応する接続軸430に夫々接続される。そして、下スライドベース464は、下スライド部材458の上下方向への往復動につれて後軸部465と接続孔部460とが上下に係合したもとで上下に変位するが、後軸部465が接続孔部460において左右方向の変位が許容されているので、下スライド孔部62の延在方向に沿って第3側部可動体428を斜め横方向に往復動するようになっている。   The rear shaft portion 465 of the lower side drive mechanism engages with the upper and lower edges of the connection hole portion 460 although the connection hole portion 460 is allowed to be displaced in the left-right direction along the longitudinal side of the connection hole portion 460. It is like that. Further, the lower slide base 464 is respectively connected to the corresponding connecting shaft 430 of the third side movable body 428 in which each front shaft portion 466 faces the rear side of the side inner peripheral decorative portion 60 through the lower slide hole portion 62. Connected. The lower slide base 464 is displaced up and down while the rear shaft portion 465 and the connection hole portion 460 are vertically engaged as the lower slide member 458 is reciprocated in the vertical direction. Since the displacement in the left-right direction is allowed in the connection hole 460, the third side movable body 428 is reciprocated in the oblique lateral direction along the extending direction of the lower slide hole 62.

前記下スライドベース464は、第3側部可動体428の待機位置からの変位方向前側にベース本体464aの底辺が位置して2本の前軸部466が変位方向前側に配置され、第3側部可動体428の表示部20b側に突出した位置から待機位置に戻る側にベース本体464aの頂角が位置して1本の前軸部466が配置されている。ここで、下スライド孔部62の寸法は、下スライド部材458の往復動距離および接続孔部460における後軸部466の変位許容距離を辺とする仮想直角三角形を構成する斜辺の寸法以上に設定される。すなわち、下スライド部材458の往復動距離と第3側部可動体428の上下方向の変位幅とが同一になり、接続孔部460における後軸部466の変位許容距離と第3側部可動体428の左右方向の変位幅とが同一になっている。これにより、側部演出装置400では、第1側部可動体420と同様に、下スライド部材458の上下方向への往復動が接続孔部460から後軸部466に伝達される過程で下スライド孔部62に沿う斜め横方向への変位に適切に変換され、第3側部可動体428が斜め横方向に往復動される。また、下スライドベース464を上下の何れの位置に取り付けても、下スライド部材458を下スライドベース464の後軸部に合わせて取り付けることができ、取り付け作業性がよい。   The lower slide base 464 has a bottom side of the base body 464a located on the front side in the displacement direction from the standby position of the third side movable body 428, and the two front shaft portions 466 are disposed on the front side in the displacement direction. One front shaft portion 466 is arranged with the apex angle of the base main body 464a positioned on the side of the movable body 428 protruding from the position protruding toward the display portion 20b to the standby position. Here, the size of the lower slide hole 62 is set to be equal to or larger than the size of the hypotenuse constituting the virtual right triangle having the reciprocating distance of the lower slide member 458 and the allowable displacement distance of the rear shaft portion 466 in the connection hole 460 as sides. Is done. That is, the reciprocating distance of the lower slide member 458 and the vertical displacement width of the third side movable body 428 are the same, and the allowable displacement distance of the rear shaft portion 466 in the connection hole 460 and the third side movable body. The displacement width of 428 in the left-right direction is the same. Thereby, in the side effect device 400, similarly to the first side movable body 420, the bottom slide is performed in the process in which the reciprocating motion of the bottom slide member 458 in the vertical direction is transmitted from the connection hole portion 460 to the rear shaft portion 466. The third side movable body 428 is reciprocated in the oblique lateral direction by appropriately converting the displacement in the oblique lateral direction along the hole 62. Moreover, even if the lower slide base 464 is attached at any position in the upper and lower directions, the lower slide member 458 can be attached to the rear shaft portion of the lower slide base 464, and the attachment workability is good.

(発光手段)
図62に示すように、前記側部演出装置400は、側部ベース部材402と側部内周装飾部60との間に配置された複数の側部LED基板(発光体基板)468,470を備え、側部可動体420,424,428の動作に合わせてまたは単独で発光演出を行うことができる。側部演出装置400は、図63に示すように、側部ベース部材402の前面に取り付けられた第1側部LED基板(第1の発光体基板)468と、この第1側部LED基板468より前側に配置して側部ベース部材402の前側に取り付けられた第2側部LED基板(第2の発光体基板)470とを備えている実施例の側部演出装置400では、側部ベース部材402の中間部分に第1側部LED基板468が設置され、側部ベース部材402の上端部および下端部に第2側部LED基板470が夫々設置される。なお、第1側部LED基板468は、側部ベース部材402において上下の側部モータ434,454に挟まれる中間部分前面を覆う形状に形成されている。
(Light emission means)
As shown in FIG. 62, the side effect device 400 includes a plurality of side LED boards (light emitter boards) 468 and 470 arranged between the side base member 402 and the side inner periphery decoration part 60. A light emission effect can be performed in accordance with the operation of the side movable bodies 420, 424, and 428 or independently. As shown in FIG. 63, the side effect device 400 includes a first side LED board (first light emitter board) 468 attached to the front surface of the side base member 402, and the first side LED board 468. In the side effect device 400 of the embodiment including the second side LED substrate (second light emitter substrate) 470 disposed on the front side and attached to the front side of the side base member 402, the side base The first side LED board 468 is installed in the middle part of the member 402, and the second side LED board 470 is installed in the upper end part and the lower end part of the side base member 402, respectively. The first side LED board 468 is formed in a shape that covers the front surface of the intermediate portion sandwiched between the upper and lower side motors 434 and 454 in the side base member 402.

図62に示すように、前記側部演出装置400は、第1側部LED基板468の前面に設けたLED(発光体)468aおよび側部内周装飾部60の後面から離間させて側部光拡散部材(光拡散部材)472が、側部ベース部材402の前面に突出形成された突出ピンの前端に取り付けられている。ここで、実施例では、第1側部LED基板468、側部光拡散部材472および側部内周装飾部60が等間隔で配置されているので(図59参照)、側部光拡散部材472による光拡散効果を向上し得る。更に、側部演出装置400では、側部内周装飾部60と第1側部LED基板468との間に配置した側部光拡散部材472と、側部ベース部材402の前面に突出形成された突出ピンにより側部ベース部材402の前面から離間配置した第2側部LED基板470とが、同一垂直平面上に配置されており(図62参照)、側部ベース部材402と側部内周装飾部60との間のスペースを有効利用している。第1側部LED基板468および側部光拡散部材472には、上スライドベース444の後軸部445の変位経路および下スライドベース464の後軸部465の変位経路の夫々に合わせて後軸部開口474が開設され(図63参照)、この後軸部開口474および側部ベース部材402の後軸部通孔402c,402eを介して挿通された後軸部445,465が対応の接続孔部440,460に挿入される。なお、後軸部開口474は、挿通される後軸部445,465より一回り大きく形成される。   As shown in FIG. 62, the side effect device 400 has a side light diffusion that is separated from the rear surface of the LED (light emitting body) 468 a and the side inner peripheral decoration part 60 provided on the front surface of the first side LED board 468. A member (light diffusing member) 472 is attached to the front end of a projecting pin that projects from the front surface of the side base member 402. Here, in the embodiment, since the first side LED board 468, the side light diffusing member 472, and the side inner peripheral decorative portion 60 are arranged at equal intervals (see FIG. 59), the side light diffusing member 472 The light diffusion effect can be improved. Further, in the side effect device 400, the side light diffusing member 472 disposed between the side inner periphery decorative portion 60 and the first side LED board 468, and the protrusion formed on the front surface of the side base member 402 are formed. The second side LED board 470 that is spaced from the front surface of the side base member 402 by the pins is arranged on the same vertical plane (see FIG. 62), and the side base member 402 and the side inner peripheral decorative portion 60 are arranged. The space between and is effectively used. The first side LED board 468 and the side light diffusing member 472 include a rear shaft portion corresponding to the displacement path of the rear shaft portion 445 of the upper slide base 444 and the displacement path of the rear shaft portion 465 of the lower slide base 464. An opening 474 is formed (see FIG. 63), and the rear shaft portion 445 and 465 inserted through the rear shaft portion opening 474 and the rear shaft portion through holes 402c and 402e of the side base member 402 are the corresponding connection hole portions. 440 and 460 are inserted. The rear shaft opening 474 is formed to be slightly larger than the rear shaft portions 445 and 465 to be inserted.

前記側部内周装飾部60の前面には、第1側部LED基板468の前側に対応する所要部位にカバー開口67が前後に貫通形成され、このカバー開口67に光拡散カバー68が取り付けられている(図65参照)。すなわち、側部内周装飾部60は、カバー開口67を覆う光拡散カバー68によって前面の一部が構成されている。なお、光拡散カバー68は、カバー開口67に整合する外形形状に形成された側縁に設けた図示しない爪を、カバー開口67の開口縁に引っ掛けて取り付けられる。側部内周装飾部60は、ラメ入りの樹脂からなる有色半透明であるのに対して、光拡散カバー68は、後面に筋状の凹凸を並べた無色問透明な樹脂部材であり、側部内周装飾部60と光拡散カバー68との光拡散処理が相違するよう構成される。ここで、側部内周装飾部60では、側部内周装飾部60に重なる待機位置にある側部可動体420,424,428で隠れる領域の外側にカバー開口67が設けられることによって、待機位置の側部可動体420,424,428から外れた部位光拡散カバー68が配置されている(図56(a)参照)。側部可動体420,424,428は、待機位置から表示部20bに向けて変位すると光拡散カバー68の少なくとも一部の前側を覆うようになっている(図56(b)参照)。すなわち、側部可動体420,424,428は、光拡散カバー68の前側から外れる位置と、光拡散カバー68の前側の少なくとも一部を覆う位置との間で変位される構成である。   A cover opening 67 is formed through the front of the side inner periphery decorative portion 60 at a required portion corresponding to the front side of the first side LED board 468, and a light diffusion cover 68 is attached to the cover opening 67. (See FIG. 65). That is, a part of the front surface of the side inner periphery decorative portion 60 is configured by the light diffusion cover 68 that covers the cover opening 67. The light diffusion cover 68 is attached by hooking a claw (not shown) provided on a side edge formed in an outer shape matching the cover opening 67 to the opening edge of the cover opening 67. The side inner peripheral decorative portion 60 is a colored translucent made of a resin containing lamé, whereas the light diffusion cover 68 is a colorless transparent resin member in which streaks are arranged on the rear surface. The light diffusing process is different between the peripheral decoration portion 60 and the light diffusing cover 68. Here, in the side inner periphery decorative portion 60, the cover opening 67 is provided outside the region hidden by the side movable bodies 420, 424, and 428 in the standby position overlapping the side inner periphery decorative portion 60, thereby A partial light diffusing cover 68 that is detached from the side movable bodies 420, 424, and 428 is disposed (see FIG. 56A). The side movable bodies 420, 424, and 428 cover at least a part of the front side of the light diffusion cover 68 when displaced from the standby position toward the display unit 20b (see FIG. 56B). That is, the side movable bodies 420, 424, and 428 are configured to be displaced between a position that is removed from the front side of the light diffusion cover 68 and a position that covers at least a part of the front side of the light diffusion cover 68.

側部内周装飾部60の後側に設置される側部光拡散部材472は、側部内周装飾部に重なる待機位置にある第1および第3側部可動体420,428の後側の領域に配置されている。換言すると、光拡散カバー68は、側部内周装飾部60における側部光拡散部材472の前側から外れた位置に設けられ、側部光拡散部材472は、カバー開口67の後側から外れた部位に設けられる。側部光拡散部材472は、無色透明な樹脂部材の後面に半円形の小突起を並べた光拡散処理が施されており、側部内周装飾部60に施された光拡散処理と相違している。第1側部LED基板468は、前側が側部光拡散部材472で覆われる部位に配置される第1LED(第1の発光体)468aとしてフルカラーで発光可能なものが用いられ、前側が光拡散カバー68で覆われる部位に配置される第2LED(第2の発光体)468bとして単色(実施例では白色)発光のものが用いられる(図63参照)。すなわち、第1側部LED基板468では、前側に位置する相違する光拡散処理の施された部材に合わせて、設置するLEDの発光態様を変える構成であって、第2LED468bでは、第1LED468aと相違する発光色で発光されるようになっている。   The side light diffusing member 472 installed on the rear side of the side inner peripheral decorative portion 60 is located in the rear region of the first and third side movable bodies 420 and 428 at the standby position overlapping the side inner peripheral decorative portion. Has been placed. In other words, the light diffusing cover 68 is provided at a position outside the front side of the side light diffusing member 472 in the side inner periphery decorative portion 60, and the side light diffusing member 472 is a portion that is removed from the rear side of the cover opening 67. Is provided. The side light diffusing member 472 is subjected to a light diffusing process in which semicircular small protrusions are arranged on the rear surface of the colorless and transparent resin member, and is different from the light diffusing process applied to the side inner periphery decorative part 60. Yes. In the first side LED board 468, a first LED (first light emitter) 468a disposed at a portion where the front side is covered with the side light diffusing member 472 is used so as to emit light in full color, and the front side is light diffusing. As the second LED (second light emitter) 468b disposed at the portion covered with the cover 68, one emitting a single color (white in the embodiment) is used (see FIG. 63). That is, the first side LED board 468 has a configuration in which the light emission mode of the LED to be installed is changed in accordance with a different light diffusion member positioned on the front side, and the second LED 468b is different from the first LED 468a. It emits light with the emitted color.

前記側部演出装置400は、前面の大部分を構成する側部内周装飾部60の本体部分と光拡散カバー68とで光拡散態様が異なり、夫々の部位に対応して設けられたLED468a,468bの発光態様も異なるので、側部内周装飾部60の部位によって異なる発光演出を行うことができる。しかも、側部可動体420,424,428の動作につれて該可動体420,424,428により覆われる側部内周装飾部60の本体部分および光拡散カバー68の領域が変化するので、発光態様に変化を与えることができる。そして、側部演出装置400は、強く光を照射したい部分を無色透明な光拡散カバー68で構成すると共に、光拡散カバー68に対応して強い光を照射し得る白色の第2LED468bを用い、これに対して側部内周装飾部60の大部分を有色半透明として側部光拡散部材472を後側に設置すると共に、側部光拡散部材472に対応してフルカラーの第1LED468aを用いており、側部内周装飾部60と光拡散カバー68とで夫々の光拡散処理に合わせ適切な種類のLED468a,468bを対応して配置してあるので、発光態様の変化を大きくすることができる。なお、側部内周装飾部60の光拡散カバー68を用いた発光態様を変化させる構成は、他の演出装置100,200,300でも採用可能である。   The side effect device 400 differs in the light diffusion mode between the main body portion of the side inner periphery decoration portion 60 that constitutes most of the front surface and the light diffusion cover 68, and LEDs 468 a and 468 b provided corresponding to the respective portions. Since the light emission modes are different, different light emission effects can be performed depending on the part of the side inner periphery decorative portion 60. In addition, as the side movable bodies 420, 424, and 428 operate, the main body portion of the side inner peripheral decorative portion 60 and the region of the light diffusion cover 68 that are covered by the movable bodies 420, 424, and 428 change, so that the light emission mode changes. Can be given. Then, the side effect device 400 is configured with a colorless and transparent light diffusion cover 68 where the light is strongly irradiated, and uses the white second LED 468b that can emit strong light corresponding to the light diffusion cover 68. On the other hand, most of the side inner periphery decoration portion 60 is colored and translucent, and the side light diffusing member 472 is installed on the rear side, and the first LED 468a full color corresponding to the side light diffusing member 472 is used. Since the side inner peripheral decoration portion 60 and the light diffusion cover 68 are arranged corresponding to the appropriate types of LEDs 468a and 468b in accordance with the respective light diffusion processes, the change in the light emission mode can be increased. In addition, the structure which changes the light emission mode using the light-diffusion cover 68 of the side part inner periphery decoration part 60 is employable also with other effect apparatuses 100,200,300.

前記上側に位置する第2側部LED基板470の後面には、該第2側部LED基板470と側部ベース部材402との間に画成されたスペースに、上側部検出手段(原位置検出手段)417が設けられている(図67参照)。上側部検出手段417は、上側部駆動機構の上スライド部材438に設けられた上側部検出片441を検出するものであって、往復動作方向の何れか一方の動作限界位置にある上スライド部材438の上側部検出片441を検出するよう配置されている。実施例の上側部検出手段417は、上スライド部材438が最下限にある場合(第1側部可動体420の突出位置)に上側部検出片441を検出するよう構成され、上側部検出片通孔402bの下端部に対応する位置に配置される。すなわち、上側部検出片441が上側部検出手段417を通過して往復動することがないので、上側部検出手段417による上側部検出片441の誤検出を防止できる。   On the rear surface of the second side LED board 470 located on the upper side, there is an upper part detection means (original position detection) in a space defined between the second side LED board 470 and the side base member 402. Means) 417 is provided (see FIG. 67). The upper part detection means 417 detects the upper part detection piece 441 provided on the upper slide member 438 of the upper part drive mechanism, and is an upper slide member 438 at one of the operation limit positions in the reciprocating direction. It arrange | positions so that the upper part detection piece 441 may be detected. The upper side detection means 417 of the embodiment is configured to detect the upper side detection piece 441 when the upper slide member 438 is at the lowest limit (the protruding position of the first side movable body 420). It arrange | positions in the position corresponding to the lower end part of the hole 402b. That is, since the upper part detection piece 441 does not reciprocate through the upper part detection means 417, erroneous detection of the upper part detection piece 441 by the upper part detection means 417 can be prevented.

下側に位置する第2側部LED基板470の後面には、該第2側部LED基板470と側部ベース部材402との間に画成されたスペースに、下側部検出手段(原位置検出手段)418が設けられている(図68参照)。下側部検出手段418は、下側部駆動機構の下スライド部材458に設けられた下側部検出片461を検出するものであって、往復動作方向の何れか一方の動作限界位置にある下スライド部材458の下側部検出片461を検出するよう配置されている。すなわち、下側部検出片461が上側部検出手段418を通過して往復動することがないので、下側部検出手段418による下側部検出片461の誤検出を防止できる。実施例の下側部検出手段418は、下スライド部材458が最上限にある場合(第3側部可動体428の突出位置)に下側部検出片461を検出するよう構成され、下側部検出片通孔402dの上端部に対応する位置に配置される。   On the rear surface of the second side LED board 470 located on the lower side, a lower side detection means (original position) is formed in a space defined between the second side LED board 470 and the side base member 402. Detection means) 418 is provided (see FIG. 68). The lower side detection means 418 detects the lower side detection piece 461 provided on the lower slide member 458 of the lower side drive mechanism, and is at the lower limit position in either one of the reciprocating motion directions. The slide member 458 is disposed so as to detect the lower side detection piece 461. That is, since the lower side detection piece 461 does not reciprocate through the upper side detection means 418, erroneous detection of the lower side detection piece 461 by the lower side detection means 418 can be prevented. The lower side detection means 418 of the embodiment is configured to detect the lower side detection piece 461 when the lower slide member 458 is at the upper limit (the protruding position of the third side movable body 428). It arrange | positions in the position corresponding to the upper end part of the detection piece through-hole 402d.

(配線通路)
前記側部演出装置400では、側部ベース部材402の後側に、該側部ベース部材402、背面カバー410、内壁404および側部区画壁411によって画成される側部機構収容空間414に、上側部駆動機構の上スライド部材438および上側部ピニオン436と下側部駆動機構の下スライド部材458および下側部ピニオン456とが収容されている。また側部ベース部材402には、該側部ベース部材402における外壁403と内壁404との間に、第1側部LED基板468の後面に設けられた側部ソケット469が臨む側部ソケット開口402fが開設されている(図64参照)。更に、側部ベース部材402は、上下の側部モータ434,454の外側部分が切り欠かれて、側部モータ434,454および第2側部LED基板470への配線の通路になっている。側部ベース部材402の後側には、外壁403と内壁404との間に側部配線通路(配線通路)415が設けられ、この側部配線通路415に側部ソケット469に接続される配線が収容されるようになっている。
(Wiring path)
In the side effect device 400, on the rear side of the side base member 402, a side mechanism housing space 414 defined by the side base member 402, the back cover 410, the inner wall 404 and the side partition wall 411 is provided. The upper slide member 438 and the upper part pinion 436 of the upper part drive mechanism, and the lower slide member 458 and the lower part pinion 456 of the lower part drive mechanism are accommodated. Further, the side base member 402 has a side socket opening 402f facing a side socket 469 provided on the rear surface of the first side LED board 468 between the outer wall 403 and the inner wall 404 of the side base member 402. Has been established (see FIG. 64). Further, the side base member 402 is cut out at the outer portions of the upper and lower side motors 434 and 454 to provide a wiring path to the side motors 434 and 454 and the second side LED board 470. On the rear side of the side base member 402, a side wiring passage (wiring passage) 415 is provided between the outer wall 403 and the inner wall 404, and wiring connected to the side socket 469 is connected to the side wiring passage 415. It is to be accommodated.

第1側部LED基板468には、上側の第2側部LED基板470の配線が接続される側部ソケット469、上側部モータ434の配線が接続される側部ソケット469、第1側部LED基板468から外部に接続する配線の側部ソケット469、下側部モータ454の配線が接続される側部ソケット469および下側の第2側部LED基板470の配線が接続される側部ソケット469が上から順に並設されており(図61参照)、これらの配線が側部配線通路415に収容される。更に外壁403の後端には、内壁404に向けて突出して側部配線通路415の後側に延在する第1配線保持片(配線保持片)403aが設けられ、背面カバー410の側部配線通路415側の縁部には、外壁403に向けて突出して側部配線通路415の後側に延在する第2配線保持片(配線保持片)410bが設けられる(図57参照)。実施例では、外部に接続される配線が引き出される側部配線通路415の下部に、第1配線保持片403aを挟んで上下に2つの第2配線保持片410b,410bが設けられ、側部配線通路415の上部に第1配線保持片403aが1つ設けられている。なお、上側に位置する第1配線保持片403aの先端は、上から下に向かうにつれて表示部20b側に突出するように傾斜形成され、上側部ピニオン436の外形に合わせて延在する内壁404の延在形状に合わせてある。   The first side LED board 468 has a side socket 469 to which the wiring of the upper second side LED board 470 is connected, a side socket 469 to which the wiring of the upper motor 434 is connected, and a first side LED. Side socket 469 for wiring to be connected from board 468 to the outside, side socket 469 to which wiring for lower side motor 454 is connected, and side socket 469 to which wiring for lower second side LED board 470 is connected. Are arranged in order from the top (see FIG. 61), and these wirings are accommodated in the side wiring passages 415. Further, a first wiring holding piece (wiring holding piece) 403 a that protrudes toward the inner wall 404 and extends to the rear side of the side wiring passage 415 is provided at the rear end of the outer wall 403, and the side wiring of the back cover 410 is provided. A second wiring holding piece (wiring holding piece) 410b that protrudes toward the outer wall 403 and extends to the rear side of the side wiring path 415 is provided at the edge on the side of the path 415 (see FIG. 57). In the embodiment, two second wiring holding pieces 410b and 410b are provided above and below the side wiring passage 415 from which the wiring connected to the outside is drawn, with the first wiring holding piece 403a interposed therebetween. One first wiring holding piece 403a is provided above the passage 415. The tip of the first wiring holding piece 403a located on the upper side is inclined so as to protrude toward the display unit 20b from the top to the bottom, and the inner wall 404 extending in accordance with the outer shape of the upper side pinion 436 is formed. It is adapted to the extended shape.

このように、側部ソケット469が側部ソケット開口402fを介して臨む側部配線通路415と側部可動体420,424,428を動作させるための上下のスライド部材438,458および上下の側部ピニオン436,456が配置される側部機構収容空間414とが内壁404、側部区画壁411および背面カバー410で隔てられているので、スライド部材438,458等の駆動部材と配線との干渉を確実に回避できる。しかも、第1および第2配線保持片403a,410bによって配線が外側にはみ出ないように側部配線通路415に保持できる。従って、側部演出装置400(側部ベース部材402)を裏ユニット30に取り付ける際にも、側部演出装置400の配線が裏ユニット30との間に噛み込むことを回避でき、側部演出装置400の裏ユニット30に対する取り付け作業を容易にし得る。   Thus, the upper and lower slide members 438 and 458 and the upper and lower side portions for operating the side wiring passage 415 and the side movable bodies 420, 424, and 428 that the side socket 469 faces through the side socket opening 402f. Since the side mechanism housing space 414 in which the pinions 436 and 456 are disposed is separated by the inner wall 404, the side partition wall 411, and the back cover 410, interference between the driving members such as the slide members 438 and 458 and the wiring is prevented. It can be avoided reliably. In addition, the first and second wiring holding pieces 403a and 410b can hold the wiring in the side wiring passage 415 so that the wiring does not protrude outward. Therefore, even when the side effect device 400 (side base member 402) is attached to the back unit 30, it is possible to avoid the wiring of the side effect device 400 between the back unit 30 and the side effect device 400. The attachment operation to the 400 back units 30 can be facilitated.

ここで、上側および下側の第2側部LED基板470,470の後面には、前述した検出手段417,418と同様に第2側部LED基板470と側部ベース部材402との間のスペースに、該第2側部LED基板470用の側部ソケット(ソケット)471が設けられている。第2側部LED基板470用の側部ソケット471は、表示部20bと反対側に向けて側部配線通路415側に開口するように設けられている。すなわち、 第2側部LED基板470と側部ベース部材402との隙間を有効利用して側部ソケット471を設け、この側部ソケット471を側部配線通路415側に開口させることで、当該ソケット471に対する配線の挿脱が行い易く、また配線を迂回することなく側部配線通路415に取り出すことができ、配線の取り回しも容易になる。   Here, the space between the second side LED board 470 and the side base member 402 is provided on the rear surfaces of the upper and lower second side LED boards 470 and 470 in the same manner as the detection means 417 and 418 described above. Further, a side socket (socket) 471 for the second side LED board 470 is provided. The side socket 471 for the second side LED board 470 is provided so as to open toward the side wiring passage 415 toward the side opposite to the display unit 20b. That is, the side socket 471 is provided by effectively using the gap between the second side LED board 470 and the side base member 402, and the side socket 471 is opened to the side wiring passage 415 side, so that the socket Wiring can be easily inserted into and removed from 471, and the wiring can be taken out to the side wiring passage 415 without detouring the wiring.

前記側部演出装置400は、側部ベース部材402が遊技盤20における表示部20bの周縁部の一辺に長手を沿わせて設置されているので、当該周縁部の長手スペースを合理的に利用して、スライド部材438,458の大きさやこのスライド部材438,458の往復動の範囲を大きくとることができ、側部可動体420,424,428の動作を大きくすることが可能となる。また、スライド部材438,458が表示部20bの周縁部の一辺に沿って往復動するものの、第1側部可動体420および第3側部可動体428が該周縁部で囲われる表示部20bに対して進退するように変換されて動作するので、表示部20bでの図柄表示装置17の表示演出と第1側部可動体420および第3側部可動体428の動作との関連性が増して、第1側部可動体420および第3側部可動体428による演出効果を向上し得る。しかも、第1側部可動体420および第3側部可動体428は、表示部20bに突出した位置において、第1側部可動体420の下部に第3側部可動体428の上部が潜り込む構成であるから(図56(b)および図66(b)参照)、両側部可動体420,428の変位距離を確保し得ると共に、両側部可動体420,428の動作の関連性を増すことができる。また側部演出装置400は、表示部20bに向けて進退するよう往復動する第1側部可動体420と同期して揺動する第2側部可動体424を設け、また1つの上側部モータ434でこれらの側部可動体420,424を異なる動作をさせることができ、大型化を招くことなくこれらの側部可動体420,424によって演出効果を向上することができる。    In the side effect device 400, the side base member 402 is installed along one side of the peripheral part of the display part 20b in the game board 20, so that the longitudinal space of the peripheral part is rationally used. Thus, the size of the slide members 438 and 458 and the range of reciprocation of the slide members 438 and 458 can be increased, and the operation of the side movable bodies 420, 424 and 428 can be increased. Further, although the slide members 438 and 458 reciprocate along one side of the peripheral portion of the display portion 20b, the first side movable body 420 and the third side movable body 428 are moved to the display portion 20b surrounded by the peripheral portion. On the other hand, since it is converted so as to advance and retreat, the relevance between the display effect of the symbol display device 17 on the display unit 20b and the operation of the first side movable body 420 and the third side movable body 428 increases. The effect of the first side movable body 420 and the third side movable body 428 can be improved. In addition, the first side movable body 420 and the third side movable body 428 are configured such that the upper part of the third side movable body 428 enters the lower part of the first side movable body 420 at a position protruding from the display unit 20b. Therefore (see FIGS. 56 (b) and 66 (b)), it is possible to secure the displacement distance of the movable parts 420 and 428 on both sides and increase the relevance of the operations of the movable parts 420 and 428 on both sides. it can. In addition, the side effect device 400 includes a second side movable body 424 that swings in synchronization with the first side movable body 420 that reciprocates so as to advance and retreat toward the display section 20b, and one upper side motor. These side movable bodies 420 and 424 can be operated differently at 434, and the effect of rendering can be improved by these side movable bodies 420 and 424 without causing an increase in size.

前記側部演出装置400は、半透明で光拡散処理が施された側部内周装飾部60の後側に設けた側部LED基板468,470から光を照射することで、側部内周装飾部60および該側部内周装飾部60を介して光が照射された半透明の側部可動体420,424,428を発光させることができる。また、側部可動体420,424,428の動作につれて該可動体420,424,428により覆われる側部内周装飾部60の領域が変化するので、発光態様に変化を与えることができる。従って、側部演出装置400では、側部可動体420,424,428の動作と相まって効果的に発光演出することができる。更に、側部演出装置400では、外周装飾部28、側部可動体420,424,428および側部内周装飾部60が共通の意匠形状で形成されると共に、外側から内側に向かうにつれて段階的に下がるように段差を形成するよう配置してあるので、表示部20bに臨む図柄表示装置17に向けて奥行きがあって立体感を向上でき、側部可動体420,424,428の動作による演出効果も向上し得る。   The side effect device 400 irradiates light from the side LED boards 468 and 470 provided on the rear side of the side inner periphery decoration portion 60 that is translucent and has been subjected to the light diffusion process. 60 and the translucent side movable bodies 420, 424, and 428 irradiated with light through the side inner peripheral decorative portion 60 can emit light. Moreover, since the area | region of the side inner periphery decoration part 60 covered with this movable body 420,424,428 changes with operation | movement of the side part movable body 420,424,428, a change can be given to a light emission mode. Therefore, the side effect device 400 can effectively produce a light emission effect in combination with the operation of the side movable bodies 420, 424, and 428. Further, in the side effect device 400, the outer periphery decorative portion 28, the side movable bodies 420, 424, 428, and the side inner periphery decorative portion 60 are formed in a common design shape and stepwise from the outside toward the inside. Since it is arranged so as to form a step so as to be lowered, there is a depth toward the symbol display device 17 facing the display unit 20b, so that a three-dimensional effect can be improved, and an effect effect by the operation of the side movable bodies 420, 424, 428 Can also improve.

このように、実施例に係るパチンコ機10の遊技盤20は、表示部20bの下辺を画成する下部内周装飾部40の後側に設けられて、該表示部20bに対して出没する第1下部可動体110と、第1下部可動体110の前側に位置して下部内周装飾部40の前側に設けられて揺動する第2下部可動体130と、表示部20bの上辺を画成する上部内周装飾部50の後側に設けられて、表示部20bに対して出没する上部可動体220と、枠状装飾体70で囲われる領域内側に、上部可動体220の前側に位置して設けられ、複数の可動部340,342を有する前部可動体330と、表示部20bの側辺を画成する側部内周装飾部60の前側に夫々設けられ、表示部20bへ向けて進退動する側部可動体420,424,428とを備えている。すなわち遊技盤20は、、注目度が高い図柄表示装置17が臨む表示部20bの四辺を画成する内周装飾部40,50,60,60の夫々の辺に対応して可動体110,130,220,330,420,424,428を配設したので、複数の可動体110,130,220,330,420,424,428が遊技者に注視され易く、複数の可動体110,130,220,330,420,424,428による演出効果が向上される。しかも、外周装飾部28と内周装飾部40,50,60,60との段差と、可動体110,130,220,330,420,424,428の立体形状と、前後に配置された可動体110,130,220,330の関係とが相まって全体として立体感も向上される。   As described above, the gaming board 20 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the embodiment is provided on the rear side of the lower inner periphery decoration portion 40 that defines the lower side of the display portion 20b, and the game board 20 appears and disappears with respect to the display portion 20b. 1 lower movable body 110, 2nd lower movable body 130 which is located in front of the 1st lower movable body 110, is provided in the front of the lower inner periphery decoration part 40, and rocks, and the upper side of the display part 20b is defined. The upper movable body 220 is provided on the rear side of the upper inner peripheral decorative portion 50 and is located on the front side of the upper movable body 220 inside the region surrounded by the upper decorative body 70 and the frame-shaped decorative body 70. Are provided on the front side of the front movable body 330 having a plurality of movable parts 340 and 342 and the side inner peripheral decoration part 60 that defines the side of the display part 20b, and advances and retreats toward the display part 20b. Side movable bodies 420, 424, and 428 that move are provided. In other words, the game board 20 includes the movable bodies 110, 130 corresponding to the respective sides of the inner peripheral decoration portions 40, 50, 60, 60 that define the four sides of the display portion 20b facing the symbol display device 17 having a high degree of attention. , 220, 330, 420, 424, 428, the plurality of movable bodies 110, 130, 220, 330, 420, 424, 428 are easily watched by the player, and the plurality of movable bodies 110, 130, 220 are arranged. , 330, 420, 424, 428 is improved. And the level | step difference of the outer periphery decoration part 28 and the inner periphery decoration part 40,50,60,60, the three-dimensional shape of the movable body 110,130,220,330,420,424,428, and the movable body arrange | positioned back and forth Combined with the relationship of 110, 130, 220, and 330, the overall stereoscopic effect is improved.

実施例に係る演出装置100,200,300,400では、軸を孔に挿入して部材を変位可能に保持した軸と孔との係合構造について、部材に固定された芯に回転可能に嵌め合わされた自己潤滑性樹脂からなるスリーブを設ける構成を採用し得る。部材は、変位に際して軸のスリーブが孔の開口縁に摺接させて摺接負荷を低減するようになっており、またスリーブが摩耗した場合に部材体全体ではなく当該スリーブを交換するだけでよい。なお、実施例では、下部演出装置100の下部取付軸112、下部連繋軸122、下部支持軸132、下部連結軸134、下部補助軸136および下部ピニオン保持片163や、上部演出装置200の上部取付軸242および上部連繋軸236や、側部演出装置400における第1側部可動体420の接続軸422、 第3側部可動体428の接続軸430、側部回転軸425、側部連結軸426、側部補助軸427等にスリーブが採用されている。なお、軸に設けるスリーブは、自己潤滑性樹脂からなるものに限定されず、例えば金属製であってもよい。   In the production apparatus 100, 200, 300, 400 according to the embodiment, the shaft-hole engaging structure in which the shaft is inserted into the hole and the member is displaceably held is rotatably fitted to the core fixed to the member. A configuration in which a sleeve made of a combined self-lubricating resin is provided may be employed. When the member is displaced, the shaft sleeve slides against the opening edge of the hole to reduce the sliding contact load. When the sleeve is worn, it is only necessary to replace the sleeve instead of the entire member body. . In the embodiment, the lower mounting shaft 112, the lower connecting shaft 122, the lower support shaft 132, the lower connecting shaft 134, the lower auxiliary shaft 136, the lower pinion holding piece 163 of the lower effect device 100, and the upper mounting of the upper effect device 200 are mounted. The shaft 242 and the upper connecting shaft 236, the connecting shaft 422 of the first side movable body 420 in the side effect device 400, the connecting shaft 430 of the third side movable body 428, the side rotating shaft 425, and the side connecting shaft 426. A sleeve is employed for the side auxiliary shaft 427 and the like. The sleeve provided on the shaft is not limited to one made of self-lubricating resin, and may be made of metal, for example.

実施例で説明した孔の長孔形状とは、挿通する軸等の部材の外形に合わせて端部を半円形に形成してもよい。   In the long hole shape of the hole described in the embodiment, the end portion may be formed in a semicircular shape in accordance with the outer shape of a member such as a shaft to be inserted.

実施例では、可動体110,130,220,420,424,428の位置を確認する原位置検出手段124,126,226,417,418としては、対向配置した発光部と受光部との間で対応の検出片の有無を検出するフォトセンサが用いられ、前述した実施例の演出装置では、検出片が発光部と受光部との間に位置した際に、可動体の原位置(待機する位置)となるように構成される。   In the embodiment, as the original position detecting means 124, 126, 226, 417, 418 for confirming the position of the movable bodies 110, 130, 220, 420, 424, 428, between the light emitting section and the light receiving section arranged opposite to each other, A photosensor that detects the presence or absence of a corresponding detection piece is used, and in the staging device of the above-described embodiment, when the detection piece is positioned between the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit, the original position of the movable body (the standby position) ).

(変更例)
なお、遊技機の構成としては、実施例のものに限らず、種々の変更が可能である。例えば、実施例では、遊技盤を透明板と裏ユニットとを積層して構成したが、所定厚のベニヤ板や合成樹脂板の単体から構成してもよく、また3つ以上の部材を積層して遊技盤20を構成するようにしてもよい。
(Example of change)
The configuration of the gaming machine is not limited to that of the embodiment, and various changes can be made. For example, in the embodiment, the game board is configured by laminating a transparent plate and a back unit. However, the game board may be composed of a single unit of a plywood or a synthetic resin plate having a predetermined thickness, or by laminating three or more members. The game board 20 may be configured.

遊技盤に設けた演出装置の配置は、入れ替えることが可能である。例えば下部演出装置を表示部の側部に設置することができる。この際、可動体が表示部に対して変位するように、演出装置の構成部材が配置される。   The arrangement of the effect devices provided on the game board can be changed. For example, the lower effect device can be installed on the side of the display unit. At this time, the constituent members of the effect device are arranged so that the movable body is displaced with respect to the display unit.

実施例では、遊技機としてパチンコ機を例示して説明したが、これに限られるものではなく、アレンジボール機やピンボール機等の従来公知の各種遊技機を採用し得る。   In the embodiment, a pachinko machine has been described as an example of the gaming machine. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and various conventionally known gaming machines such as an arrangement ball machine and a pinball machine can be adopted.

本発明の好適な実施例に係るパチンコ機を示す正面図である。1 is a front view showing a pachinko machine according to a preferred embodiment of the present invention. 実施例の遊技盤を示す正面図である。It is a front view which shows the game board of an Example. 図2のX1−X1線断面図である。FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view taken along line X1-X1 of FIG. 実施例の裏ユニットを示す正面図である。It is a front view which shows the back unit of an Example. 実施例の裏ユニットを示す背面図である。It is a rear view which shows the back unit of an Example. 実施例の裏ユニットを示す左側面図である。It is a left view which shows the back unit of an Example. 実施例の裏ユニットを示す前面斜視図である。It is a front perspective view which shows the back unit of an Example. 実施例の裏ユニットを示す後面斜視図である。It is a rear surface perspective view which shows the back unit of an Example. 実施例の枠状装飾体を示す正面図である。It is a front view which shows the frame-shaped decoration body of an Example. 実施例の枠状装飾体を示す背面図である。It is a rear view which shows the frame-shaped decoration body of an Example. 実施例の枠状装飾体を示す左側面図である。It is a left view which shows the frame-shaped decoration body of an Example. 実施例の遊技盤の下部を拡大して示す側断面図である。It is side sectional drawing which expands and shows the lower part of the game board of an Example. 実施例の下部演出装置を示す正面図である。It is a front view which shows the lower stage production apparatus of an Example. 実施例の下部演出装置を示す平断面図である。It is a plane sectional view showing the lower production device of an example. 実施例の下部演出装置を下部内部装飾部を一部破断して示す前面斜視図である。It is a front perspective view which shows a lower production | presentation apparatus of an Example partially fractured | ruptured a lower internal decoration part. 実施例の下部ベース部材を示す背面図である。It is a rear view which shows the lower base member of an Example. 実施例の下部内部装飾部を示す正面図である。It is a front view which shows the lower internal decoration part of an Example. 実施例の下部内部装飾部を示す背面図である。It is a rear view which shows the lower internal decoration part of an Example. 実施例の下部内部装飾部を示す前面斜視図である。It is a front perspective view which shows the lower internal decoration part of an Example. 実施例の第1下部可動体を示す前面斜視図である。It is a front perspective view which shows the 1st lower movable body of an Example. 実施例の第1下部駆動機構の伝達手段を示す背面図である。It is a rear view which shows the transmission means of the 1st lower drive mechanism of an Example. 実施例の第1下部駆動機構の伝達手段を示す後面斜視図である。It is a rear surface perspective view which shows the transmission means of the 1st lower drive mechanism of an Example. 実施例の下部ベース部材を示す正面図であって、(a)は第1下部可動体が下位置にあり、(b)は第1下部可動体が上突出位置にある。It is a front view which shows the lower base member of an Example, (a) is a 1st lower movable body in a lower position, (b) has a 1st lower movable body in an upper protrusion position. 実施例の下部ベース部材を示す背面図であって、(a)は第1下部可動体が下位置にあり、(b)は第1下部可動体が上突出位置にある。It is a rear view which shows the lower base member of an Example, (a) is a 1st lower movable body in a lower position, (b) has a 1st lower movable body in an upper protrusion position. 実施例の下部ベース部材を示す前面斜視図であって、(a)は第1下部可動体が下位置にあり、(b)は第1下部可動体が上突出位置にある。It is a front perspective view which shows the lower base member of an Example, (a) is a 1st lower movable body in a lower position, (b) has a 1st lower movable body in an upper protrusion position. 実施例の下部ベース部材を示す平断面図である。It is a plane sectional view showing the lower base member of an example. 実施例の下部駆動機構を後側から示す概略斜視図である。It is a schematic perspective view which shows the lower drive mechanism of an Example from the rear side. 実施例の第2下部可動体を分解して示す前面斜視図である。It is a front perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the 2nd lower movable body of an Example. 実施例の第2下部可動体を分解して示す後面斜視図である。It is a rear surface perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the 2nd lower movable body of an Example. 実施例の下部演出装置を示す背面図であって、(a)は第1下部可動体が下位置にあり、(b)は第1下部可動体が中間位置にあり、(c)は第1下部可動体が上突出位置にある。It is a rear view which shows the lower production | presentation apparatus of an Example, (a) is a 1st lower movable body in a lower position, (b) is a 1st lower movable body in an intermediate position, (c) is a 1st The lower movable body is in the upper protruding position. 実施例の下部演出装置を示す後面斜視図であって、(a)は第1下部可動体が下位置にあり、(b)は第1下部可動体が中間位置にあり、(c)は第1下部可動体が上突出位置にある。It is the rear perspective view which shows the lower production | presentation apparatus of an Example, (a) is a 1st lower movable body in a lower position, (b) is a 1st lower movable body in an intermediate position, (c) is a 1st lower movable body. 1 The lower movable body is in the upper protruding position. 実施例の下部演出装置の正面図であって、第2下部可動体の揺動状態を示す。It is a front view of the lower production | presentation apparatus of an Example, Comprising: The rocking | fluctuation state of a 2nd lower movable body is shown. 実施例の下部ベース部材の背面図であって、第2下部可動体の揺動状態に伴う下部リンクの状態を示す。It is a rear view of the lower base member of an Example, Comprising: The state of the lower link accompanying the rocking | fluctuation state of a 2nd lower movable body is shown. 実施例の遊技盤の上部を拡大して示す側断面図である。It is side sectional drawing which expands and shows the upper part of the game board of an Example. 実施例の上部演出装置を示す正面図である。It is a front view which shows the upper stage production apparatus of an Example. 実施例の上部ベース部材を示す背面図である。It is a rear view which shows the upper base member of an Example. 実施例の上部演出装置を示す前面斜視図である。It is a front perspective view which shows the upper stage production apparatus of an Example. 実施例の上部演出装置を示す右側面図である。なお、上部可動体を省略してある。It is a right view which shows the upper stage production apparatus of an Example. Note that the upper movable body is omitted. 実施例の上部ベース部材を示す正面図であって、(a)は上部可動体が上位置にあり、(b)は上部可動体が下突出位置にある。It is a front view which shows the upper base member of an Example, (a) has an upper movable body in an upper position, (b) has an upper movable body in a downward protrusion position. 実施例の上部ベース部材を示す前面斜視図であって、(a)は上部可動体が上位置にあり、(b)は上部可動体が下突出位置にある。It is a front perspective view which shows the upper base member of an Example, (a) is an upper movable body in an upper position, (b) has an upper movable body in a lower protrusion position. 実施例の上部ベース部材を示す背面図であって、(a)は上部可動体が上位置にあり、(b)は上部可動体が下突出位置にある。It is a rear view which shows the upper base member of an Example, (a) is an upper movable body in an upper position, (b) is an upper movable body in a downward protrusion position. 実施例の上部ベース部材を示す後面斜視図であって、(a)は上部可動体が上位置にあり、(b)は上部可動体が下突出位置にある。It is a rear perspective view showing an upper base member of an example, and (a) shows the upper movable body in the upper position, and (b) shows the upper movable body in the lower protruding position. 実施例の上部ベース部材を示す平面図である。It is a top view which shows the upper base member of an Example. 実施例の上部ベース部材を示す底面図である。It is a bottom view which shows the upper base member of an Example. 実施例の上部ベース部材を上部可動体を取り外した状態で示す前面斜視図である。It is a front perspective view which shows the upper base member of an Example in the state which removed the upper movable body. 実施例の上部ベース部材を上部可動体を取り外した状態で示す後面斜視図である。It is a rear surface perspective view which shows the upper base member of an Example in the state which removed the upper movable body. 実施例の上部可動体を示す前面斜視図である。It is a front perspective view which shows the upper movable body of an Example. 実施例の前部演出装置を示す正面図である。It is a front view which shows the front part production apparatus of an Example. 実施例の前部演出装置を後板部を取り外した状態で示す背面図である。It is a rear view which shows the front direction production apparatus of an Example in the state which removed the backplate part. 実施例の前部演出装置を示す左側面図である。It is a left view which shows the front part production apparatus of an Example. 実施例の前部演出装置を示す底面図である。It is a bottom view which shows the front part production apparatus of an Example. 実施例の前部可動体を示す背面図である。It is a rear view which shows the front part movable body of an Example. 実施例の前部演出装置を分解して示す前面斜視図である。It is a front perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the front direction production apparatus of an Example. 実施例の前部演出装置を分解して示す後面斜視図である。It is a rear surface perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the front direction production apparatus of an Example. 実施例の前部駆動機構を分解して示す後面斜視図である。It is a rear surface perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the front drive mechanism of an Example. 実施例の側部演出装置を示す正面図である。It is a front view which shows the side part production apparatus of an Example. 実施例の側部演出装置を示す背面図である。It is a rear view which shows the side part production | presentation apparatus of an Example. 図57のX2−X2線断面図である。FIG. 58 is a cross-sectional view taken along line X2-X2 of FIG. 57. 図57のX3−X3線断面図である。It is the X3-X3 sectional view taken on the line of FIG. 図57のX4−X4線断面図である。FIG. 58 is a cross-sectional view taken along line X4-X4 of FIG. 57. 実施例の側部演出装置を背面カバーを取り外した状態で示す背面図である。It is a rear view which shows the side part production apparatus of an Example in the state which removed the back cover. 図61のX5−X5線断面図である。FIG. 62 is a cross-sectional view taken along line X5-X5 of FIG. 61. 実施例の側部ベース部材を示す正面図である。It is a front view which shows the side part base member of an Example. 実施例の側部ベース部材を示す背面図である。It is a rear view which shows the side part base member of an Example. 実施例の側部内周装飾部を示す正面図である。It is a front view which shows the side part inner periphery decoration part of an Example. 実施例の側部駆動機構を示す後面斜視図である。It is a rear surface perspective view which shows the side part drive mechanism of an Example. 実施例の上側部駆動機構を示す右側面図である。It is a right view which shows the upper part drive mechanism of an Example. 実施例の下側部駆動機構を示す右側面図である。It is a right view which shows the lower part drive mechanism of an Example.

符号の説明Explanation of symbols

17 図柄表示装置
20 遊技盤
20a 遊技領域
20b 表示部
60 側部内周装飾部(カバー部材)
61 上スライド孔部(スライド孔部)
62 下スライド孔部(スライド孔部)
65 側部補助軸通孔(補助孔部)
402 側部ベース部材(ベース部材)
402a ボス受部(第1の通孔)
407,412 保持リブ
409 取付片
409a ネジ通孔(第2の通孔)
410 背面カバー
410c 挿脱孔
420 第1側部可動体(可動体)
424 第2側部可動体(第2の可動体)
425 側部回転軸(回転軸)
426 側部連結軸(連結軸)
427 側部補助軸(補助軸)
428 第3側部可動体(可動体)
432 側部補助リンク(補助片)
434 上側部モータ(駆動手段)
438 上スライド部材(スライド部材)
440,460 接続孔部
444 上スライドベース(スライドベース)
444a,464a ベース本体(本体)
445,465 後軸部
446,466 前軸部
454 下側部モータ(駆動手段)
458 下スライド部材(スライド部材)
464 下スライドベース(スライドベース)
17 design display device 20 game board 20a game area 20b display part 60 side inner periphery decoration part (cover member)
61 Upper slide hole (slide hole)
62 Lower slide hole (slide hole)
65 Side auxiliary shaft hole (auxiliary hole)
402 Side base member (base member)
402a Boss receiving part (first through hole)
407, 412 Holding rib 409 Mounting piece 409a Screw through hole (second through hole)
410 back cover 410c insertion / removal hole 420 first side movable body (movable body)
424 second side movable body (second movable body)
425 Side rotation axis (rotation axis)
426 Side connection shaft (connection shaft)
427 Side auxiliary shaft (auxiliary shaft)
428 Third side movable body (movable body)
432 Side auxiliary link (auxiliary piece)
434 Upper side motor (drive means)
438 Upper slide member (slide member)
440,460 Connection hole 444 Upper slide base (slide base)
444a, 464a Base body (main body)
445,465 Rear shaft portion 446,466 Front shaft portion 454 Lower side motor (drive means)
458 Lower slide member (slide member)
464 Lower slide base (slide base)

Claims (6)

遊技球が流下する遊技領域を有する遊技盤と、この遊技盤の後側に取り付けられ、該遊技盤に設けられた表示部を介して前側に臨む図柄表示装置とを有する遊技機において、
前記遊技盤において前記表示部の四辺を画成する周縁部の一辺に沿わせて設けられたベース部材と、
前記ベース部材に対して前記周縁部の一辺に沿ってスライド可能に設けられ、該ベース部材に設けられた駆動手段の正逆回転により直線的に往復動するスライド部材と、
前記スライド部材に開設され、該スライド部材の往復動方向と直交する横方向に長手が延在する長孔形状の接続孔部と、
前記ベース部材の前側を覆うように該ベース部材に組み付けられ、前記遊技盤の前面に臨むカバー部材と、
前記ベース部材と前記カバー部材との間に設けられ、後面に突出する後軸部が前記接続孔部に挿入されると共に、前面に突出する前軸部が前記カバー部材に前記スライド部材の往復動方向と交差する斜め横方向に開設されたスライド孔部に挿入されて、該スライド部材の往復動につれて該スライド孔部に沿って往復動するスライドベースと、
前記前軸部を介して前記スライドベースに固定され、該スライドベースの往復動につれて前記周縁部の一辺に重なる位置と該一辺から前記表示部に突出する位置との間で往復動する可動体とを備え、
前記スライド孔部を、前記スライド部材の往復動距離および前記接続孔部における前記後軸部の変位許容距離を辺とする仮想直角三角形を構成する斜辺の寸法以上に設定した
ことを特徴とする遊技機。
In a gaming machine having a gaming board having a gaming area in which gaming balls flow down, and a symbol display device attached to the rear side of the gaming board and facing the front side through a display unit provided on the gaming board,
A base member provided along one side of the peripheral edge defining the four sides of the display unit in the game board;
A slide member that is slidable along one side of the peripheral edge with respect to the base member, and that reciprocates linearly by forward and reverse rotation of drive means provided on the base member;
A long hole-shaped connection hole portion which is established in the slide member and extends in the lateral direction perpendicular to the reciprocating direction of the slide member;
A cover member assembled to the base member so as to cover the front side of the base member, and facing the front surface of the game board;
A rear shaft portion that is provided between the base member and the cover member and protrudes to the rear surface is inserted into the connection hole portion, and a front shaft portion that protrudes to the front surface reciprocates the slide member to the cover member. A slide base that is inserted into a slide hole portion that is opened in an oblique lateral direction that intersects the direction, and reciprocates along the slide hole portion as the slide member reciprocates;
A movable body fixed to the slide base via the front shaft portion and reciprocating between a position overlapping one side of the peripheral edge and a position projecting from the one side to the display unit as the slide base reciprocates; With
The game is characterized in that the slide hole portion is set to be equal to or larger than the size of the hypotenuse that forms a virtual right triangle whose side is the reciprocating distance of the slide member and the displacement allowable distance of the rear shaft portion in the connection hole portion. Machine.
前記カバー部材の前側に位置して、後面に設けた回転軸が該カバー部材に回転可能に支持された第2の可動体を有し、
前記第2の可動体は、後面において前記回転軸から離間配置された連結軸が前記スライド部材に連結されて、該スライド部材の往復動につれて前記可動体と同期して前記回転軸を中心として揺動するよう構成した請求項1記載の遊技機。
The second movable body is located on the front side of the cover member, and a rotary shaft provided on the rear surface is rotatably supported by the cover member,
The second movable body has a connecting shaft spaced apart from the rotating shaft on the rear surface and is connected to the slide member. As the slide member reciprocates, the second movable body swings around the rotating shaft in synchronization with the movable body. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is configured to move.
前記ベース部材には、該ベース部材の後面に配置された前記スライド部材を挟んで、後面を覆って背面カバーが組み付けられ、
前記ベース部材および背面カバーは、前記スライド部材の変位経路に沿って延在する筋状の保持リブを有し、該スライド部材が前後に対向する保持リブ間に挟持される請求項1または2に記載の遊技機。
A back cover is assembled to the base member so as to cover the rear surface with the slide member disposed on the rear surface of the base member interposed therebetween,
The base member and the back cover have a streak-like holding rib extending along a displacement path of the slide member, and the slide member is sandwiched between holding ribs facing front and rear. The gaming machine described.
前記ベース部材は、前記背面カバーの外縁部より突出した取付片を有し、
前記ベース部材は、該ベース部材における該背面カバーに覆われる部位に設けた第1の通孔および前記取付片に設けた第2の通孔を介して前記カバー部材に対して該ベース部材がネジ止めされ、
前記背面カバーには、前記第1の通孔に整合して、該通孔に対してネジを着脱可能な挿脱孔が設けられる請求項3記載の遊技機。
The base member has a mounting piece protruding from an outer edge portion of the back cover,
The base member is screwed to the cover member via a first through hole provided in a portion of the base member covered by the back cover and a second through hole provided in the mounting piece. Stopped,
The gaming machine according to claim 3, wherein the back cover is provided with an insertion / removal hole that is aligned with the first through-hole and that allows a screw to be attached to and removed from the through-hole.
前記スライドベースは、三角形の板状体を本体とし、該本体の3つの頂部に前軸部が夫々配置されると共に、該本体の重心に前記後軸部が配置される請求項1〜4の何れか一項に記載の遊技機。   5. The slide base according to claim 1, wherein the slide base has a triangular plate-shaped body as a main body, front shaft portions are respectively disposed at three top portions of the main body, and the rear shaft portion is disposed at a center of gravity of the main body. The gaming machine according to any one of the above. 前記第2の可動体は、前記回転軸を挟んで前記連結軸と反対側に配置された補助軸を後面に有し、
前記補助軸は、前記第2の可動体の揺動に伴う変位経路に合わせて前記カバー部材に開設された補助孔部を介して該カバー部材の後側に後端部が臨み、該後端部と前記回転軸におけるカバー部材の後側に臨む後端部とが補助片で連結される請求項1〜5の何れか一項に記載の遊技機。
The second movable body has an auxiliary shaft on the rear surface arranged on the opposite side of the connecting shaft across the rotation shaft,
The auxiliary shaft has a rear end facing the rear side of the cover member through an auxiliary hole formed in the cover member in accordance with a displacement path accompanying the swing of the second movable body, and the rear end The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5, wherein a portion and a rear end portion of the rotating shaft facing the rear side of the cover member are connected by an auxiliary piece.
JP2008297403A 2008-11-20 2008-11-20 Game machine Active JP5222107B2 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2008297403A JP5222107B2 (en) 2008-11-20 2008-11-20 Game machine

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2008297403A JP5222107B2 (en) 2008-11-20 2008-11-20 Game machine

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
JP2010119725A true JP2010119725A (en) 2010-06-03
JP5222107B2 JP5222107B2 (en) 2013-06-26

Family

ID=42321588

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
JP2008297403A Active JP5222107B2 (en) 2008-11-20 2008-11-20 Game machine

Country Status (1)

Country Link
JP (1) JP5222107B2 (en)

Cited By (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2014033863A (en) * 2012-08-09 2014-02-24 Heiwa Corp Movable generator device
JP2015006550A (en) * 2014-10-07 2015-01-15 株式会社サンセイアールアンドディ Game machine
JP2015006551A (en) * 2014-10-07 2015-01-15 株式会社サンセイアールアンドディ Game machine
JP2015126834A (en) * 2013-12-28 2015-07-09 株式会社三洋物産 Game machine
JP2017064522A (en) * 2017-01-19 2017-04-06 株式会社三洋物産 Game machine

Families Citing this family (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP7095712B2 (en) * 2020-03-03 2022-07-05 株式会社三洋物産 Pachinko machine

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2006218134A (en) * 2005-02-10 2006-08-24 Daiichi Shokai Co Ltd Pachinko game machine
JP2007215860A (en) * 2006-02-17 2007-08-30 Newgin Corp Movable type performance device for game machine
JP2007252446A (en) * 2006-03-21 2007-10-04 Okumura Yu-Ki Co Ltd Pachinko machine
JP2008264323A (en) * 2007-04-23 2008-11-06 Daiichi Shokai Co Ltd Game machine

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2006218134A (en) * 2005-02-10 2006-08-24 Daiichi Shokai Co Ltd Pachinko game machine
JP2007215860A (en) * 2006-02-17 2007-08-30 Newgin Corp Movable type performance device for game machine
JP2007252446A (en) * 2006-03-21 2007-10-04 Okumura Yu-Ki Co Ltd Pachinko machine
JP2008264323A (en) * 2007-04-23 2008-11-06 Daiichi Shokai Co Ltd Game machine

Cited By (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2014033863A (en) * 2012-08-09 2014-02-24 Heiwa Corp Movable generator device
JP2015126834A (en) * 2013-12-28 2015-07-09 株式会社三洋物産 Game machine
JP2015006550A (en) * 2014-10-07 2015-01-15 株式会社サンセイアールアンドディ Game machine
JP2015006551A (en) * 2014-10-07 2015-01-15 株式会社サンセイアールアンドディ Game machine
JP2017064522A (en) * 2017-01-19 2017-04-06 株式会社三洋物産 Game machine

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
JP5222107B2 (en) 2013-06-26

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP5388550B2 (en) Game machine
JP5258526B2 (en) Game machine
JP5222107B2 (en) Game machine
JP5327598B2 (en) Game machine
JP5431062B2 (en) Game machine
JP5357657B2 (en) Game machine
JP5422295B2 (en) Game machine
JP5266023B2 (en) Game machine
JP5258525B2 (en) Game machine
JP5388549B2 (en) Game machine
JP5222108B2 (en) Game machine
JP5327597B2 (en) Game machine
JP5213658B2 (en) Game machine
JP5431059B2 (en) Game machine
JP5266024B2 (en) Game machine
JP5334541B2 (en) Game machine
JP5222109B2 (en) Game machine
JP5213657B2 (en) Game machine
JP5334542B2 (en) Game machine
JP5213659B2 (en) Game machine
JP5327596B2 (en) Game machine
JP5426959B2 (en) Game machine
JP5431061B2 (en) Game machine
JP5357656B2 (en) Game machine
JP5357655B2 (en) Game machine

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
A621 Written request for application examination

Free format text: JAPANESE INTERMEDIATE CODE: A621

Effective date: 20111028

TRDD Decision of grant or rejection written
A977 Report on retrieval

Free format text: JAPANESE INTERMEDIATE CODE: A971007

Effective date: 20130220

A01 Written decision to grant a patent or to grant a registration (utility model)

Free format text: JAPANESE INTERMEDIATE CODE: A01

Effective date: 20130226

A61 First payment of annual fees (during grant procedure)

Free format text: JAPANESE INTERMEDIATE CODE: A61

Effective date: 20130308

FPAY Renewal fee payment (event date is renewal date of database)

Free format text: PAYMENT UNTIL: 20160315

Year of fee payment: 3

R150 Certificate of patent or registration of utility model

Free format text: JAPANESE INTERMEDIATE CODE: R150

Ref document number: 5222107

Country of ref document: JP

Free format text: JAPANESE INTERMEDIATE CODE: R150

R250 Receipt of annual fees

Free format text: JAPANESE INTERMEDIATE CODE: R250

R250 Receipt of annual fees

Free format text: JAPANESE INTERMEDIATE CODE: R250

R250 Receipt of annual fees

Free format text: JAPANESE INTERMEDIATE CODE: R250